JP2023153412A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing interest of a game.SOLUTION: After performing a betting operation, a slot machine 10 starts rotating each of reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the basis of operation of a start lever 41. The reels corresponding to operation of stop switches 42 to 44 are stopped, and a stop combination according to a lottery result may be stopped. An AT counter is acquired based on the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the acquired AT counter is stored in a lottery information storage area, and it is used when an AT mode shift lottery is performed. When a shift of a game state is possible, a notification when the AT mode shift lottery using the already acquired AT counter is executed in the game state in which the shift is possible may be performed on an auxiliary display unit 65.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding slot machines, when the start lever is operated while medals are being bet as gaming media, an internal lottery is carried out, the reels begin to rotate, and the reels stop while they are rotating. When the switch is operated, the reels stop rotating. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the internal lottery result, a benefit is given according to the result (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

The present invention
a plurality of orbiting bodies with plural kinds of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a starting operation means that, when operated, causes each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting;
a stop operation means that stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
drive control means for causing each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a lottery means that performs a lottery to decide whether or not to give a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
specific information acquisition means for acquiring specific information based on fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
specific information storage means capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
Specific lottery means for executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event will occur, using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and a lottery result by the lottery device;
Specific execution means capable of causing the specific event based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery device is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
It is characterized by having the following.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door closed. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front door. FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing. It is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of each reel. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between symbols and effective lines that can be visually recognized from a display window. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between symbols and effective lines that can be visually recognized from a display window. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main controller. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal game state. It is a flow chart showing reel control processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch and the winning mode that is established. It is an explanatory view for explaining stop control of a reel. 3 is a flowchart showing RT state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch and the winning mode that is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 3rd RT states. It is a flowchart which shows bonus state processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch and the winning mode that is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB states. It is an explanatory diagram showing transition relations of each state. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of display modes. It is a flowchart which shows lottery result corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows advantageous area transition lottery processing. It is a flowchart showing the first specific combination processing. It is a flowchart showing the second specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing for additional notification. It is a flowchart showing the third specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing for specialized zones. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the main results of a lottery regarding the instruction function and the difference in setting of winning probability. It is a figure showing an example of an advantageous section transition lottery table and an AT mode transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the number table of portent games. It is a diagram showing an example of an additional lottery table and an additional game number lottery table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the actual number of remaining games in the advantageous section and the number of remaining games on the display. It is a figure which shows an example of a later pick-up lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an additional notification timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for mode transition notification. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of a press order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section. It is a flowchart which shows push order processing. It is a flowchart showing winning result corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows the number of games management process. 3 is a flowchart showing end determination processing. It is a figure for explaining the outline of an instruction monitor and a section indicator. It is a flow chart which shows section display first processing. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd process. 12 is a flowchart showing remaining game number management processing. 3 is a flowchart showing remaining sheet number management processing. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the start game and end game of an advantageous section and the display of the section display. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process by the display control apparatus of the sub side. It is a flowchart showing the effect setting process at the time of bet. It is a flowchart which shows the production setting process at the time of a start. It is a flowchart which shows the press order notification process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at each stop operation. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of a full stop. It is a flowchart which shows the production setting process during a bonus. It is a flowchart which shows the transition trigger role notification process. It is a flowchart which shows continuous production setting processing. It is a diagram showing the relationship between notification timing and additional effects. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows random number acquisition processing. It is a figure showing an outline of a lottery information storage area. It is a flowchart which shows random number shift processing. It is a figure which shows an example of AT mode transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the value of the AT counter and the lottery result of a game which becomes an AT mode shift winning. It is a flowchart which shows processing for a hold display. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of special image as a hold display and an AT counter. It is a flowchart which shows processing for pending shifts. It is a figure for explaining the outline of AT mode transition lottery using an AT counter and a lottery result of a game. It is a figure for explaining the outline of AT mode transition lottery using an AT counter and a lottery result of a game. It is a diagram for explaining the difference in winning probability of a specific combination for each gaming state. It is a diagram for explaining the expectation level of special images for each gaming state. 3 is a flowchart illustrating processing for starting status display. 3 is a flowchart illustrating status display update processing. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an overview of special images and situation displays. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an overview of special images and situation displays. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an overview of special images and situation displays. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a hold display process in Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining how a special image is displayed. It is a flowchart which shows the BB winning game adjustment process in the modification 2. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an overview of special images and situation displays. 12 is a diagram showing an outline of the symbol arrangement of each reel in Modification 3. FIG. It is a figure showing an outline of a lottery information storage area in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of AT mode transition lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows random number shift processing. It is a figure for explaining the outline of AT mode transition lottery using an AT counter and a lottery result of a game. It is a figure for explaining the outline of AT mode transition lottery using an AT counter and a lottery result of a game. 7 is a flowchart showing random number shift processing in Modification 1. FIG. It is a figure for explaining the outline of AT mode transition lottery using an AT counter and a lottery result of a game. In Modification 2, (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the transition relationship of each state, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the termination condition of each bonus. It is a figure which shows an example of AT mode transition lottery table. It is a figure for explaining the outline of AT mode transition lottery using an AT counter and a lottery result of a game. It is a flowchart which shows the initial random number acquisition process in 3rd Embodiment. 7 is a flowchart illustrating initial random number acquisition processing in Modification 1. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing initial random number acquisition processing in Modification 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a conversion table. 12 is a flowchart showing initial random number acquisition processing in Modification 3. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states in 4th Embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch and the winning mode that is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 4th RT states. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the bonus awarded, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the difference in winning probability of a specific combination for each gaming state. It is a figure which shows an example of AT mode transition lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows random number shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special notification process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 4th RT transition. (a) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the AT counter, cherry counter, and watermelon counter stored in each storage area, and (b) and (c) are diagrams for each fourth RT performance and AT winning expectation level. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing special notification processing in Modification 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 4th RT transition. 12 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing in Modification 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows processing for integrated value information. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode shift lottery table in Modification 3. It is a diagram for explaining the difference in winning probability of a specific combination for each gaming state. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining specific areas where AT mode transition is likely to occur in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for CZ mode. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between AT counters stored in each storage area and CZ mode effects.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type gaming machine which is a type of gaming machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is the front side. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the door 12 and a front view of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 is formed into a box shape with an open front as a whole, and is attached to so-called island equipment by nailing or the like when installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with a bearing portion 14a at a position corresponding to each support shaft 13a, 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a, 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured such that the locked state is released by operating a predetermined key on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game status. Three vertically elongated display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Note that the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis becomes the rotational axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. . Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Furthermore, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed as if they were moving from top to bottom through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly explained.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is configured to be driven to rotate individually, that is, independently, by driving each stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to rotate once by applying, for example, a 504-pulse drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as excitation pulse), and this excitation pulse changes the rotational position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotational position of the reel. controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has rotated once is installed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, the main controller 101 changes the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

A plurality of symbols serving as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch one symbol to the next symbol at a predetermined position, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) of excitation pulses. In addition, the main controller 101 can grasp the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. Control can be performed such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will be explained.

FIG. 6 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, numbers 0 to 20 are assigned corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are symbols that can be visually recognized by the main controller 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. This is a number for recognition, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, in the following explanation, the numbers will be used.

The symbols include the "red bell" symbol (for example, the 7th on the left reel 32L), the "white bell" symbol (for example, the 20th on the left reel 32L), and the "1st replay" symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L). ), “2nd Replay” symbol (e.g., 6th on left reel 32L), “Red 7” symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), “Watermelon” symbol (e.g., 8th on left reel 32L) , "Cherry" symbol (e.g., 4th on left reel 32L), "Black BAR" symbol (e.g., 18th on left reel 32L), "White BAR" symbol (e.g., 17th on left reel 32L), "LUCKY" There are 11 types of symbols: ``Youth'' symbol (for example, 5th on the left reel 32L) and ``Youth'' symbol (for example, 0th on the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is formed so that out of 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel, only 3 symbols can be visually recognized in their entirety. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In this slot machine 10, the game results of each game are reported using combinations of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, a combination of these three symbols is, for example, by tying the upper symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R as shown in FIG. The combinations of symbols that stop on the upper line L1, the combinations of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the lower symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are combinations of symbols that stop on the lower line L3. In addition, there are also combinations of symbols that stop on the downward-sloping line L4 connecting the upper symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol on the right reel 32R, the lower symbol on the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M. There are combinations of symbols that stop on the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there are also combinations of symbols that stop on the bending line L6 connecting the upper symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the symbols are lined up, and the bending line L6 is a line that bends in the middle when the symbols are lined up. It should be noted that there are other combinations of symbols that stop on the bending line other than the bending line L6, but their explanation will be omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, lines that are activated and lines that are not activated are set depending on the number of bets on medals, and when symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the activated line, As a result of winning a prize, the player is given a privilege in which a predetermined number of medals as game media are paid out, or a privilege in which the game state is changed. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on a line that is not activated, no prize is won and the above benefits are not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 8(a), only the downward-sloping line L4 is the active line, and as shown in FIG. 8(b), two lines, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4, There are cases where the combination line is an effective line, and cases where only the bending line L6 is an effective line as shown in FIG. 8(c). More specifically, when the game is started with 3 medals bet, only the lower right line L4 is considered as the valid line, and when the game is started with 2 medals bet, the lower right line L4 is the active line. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are taken as valid lines. Further, when the game is started after one medal is bet, only the bent line L6 is set as the valid line. The three combination lines of the upper line L1, middle line L2, and right-sloping line L5 are not set as valid lines. Below, a game started with three medals bet is called a 3-bet game, a game started with two medals bet is called a 2-bet game, and a game started with one medal bet is called a 2-bet game. Also called a 1-bet game.

FIGS. 9 to 11 are diagrams showing the correspondence between symbol combinations that result in winnings and benefits that are awarded in the event of winning.

The small role winnings for which medals are paid out include the 1st small role winning to the 41st small winning winning.

The "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are on the active line. If it stops, the first small prize will be awarded. When the first small winning combination is achieved, nine medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 2nd minor prize winning to the 26th minor prize winning, the winning symbol combinations are different, but in a 3 bet game, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M "White BAR" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "White Bell" symbol or "LUCKY" symbol, right reel 32R's "White BAR" symbol, "Youth" symbol, "White Bell" symbol, This is a winning mode in which the "Red 7" symbol or the "Second Replay" symbol stops on the upper line L1, that is, the "Bell" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. For example, the "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L will stop at the top, the "Cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M will stop at the middle, and the "White BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop at the bottom. If so, it will be the 8th small winning prize. As shown in FIG. 6, on the middle reel 32M, a "red bell" symbol is arranged at a position adjacent to the "cherry" symbol (no. 11) on the upstream side (no. 12), and on the right reel 32R, A "red bell" symbol is placed at a position (number 20) one symbol away from the "white BAR" symbol (number 18) on the upstream side. For this reason, when the 8th small role prize is established on the downward-sloping line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R will stop on the upper line L1. When the 2nd minor winning combination to the 26th minor winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 27th small win is a win determined by the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, the 27th small win is a “cherry” on the left reel 32L. The 27th small winning combination is established when the symbols stop on the upper or lower row. In this case, the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L must be on the top or stop, that is, the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol must be on the active line. By stopping, the 27th small role prize is established. When the 27th minor winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 28th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbols on the left reel 32L stop on the upper or lower row, and the "cherry" symbols may stop aligned on the downward-rightward line L4. More specifically, the left reel 32L has a "cherry" symbol or a "second replay" symbol, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" symbol, a "white bell" symbol, or a "cherry" symbol, and the right reel 32R has a "cherry" symbol. When the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops, the 28th small winning combination is won. When the 28th small winning combination is achieved, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

In addition, to provide a supplementary explanation of the relationship between the 27th minor role and the 28th minor role, when the "Cherry" symbol or the "2nd Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L stops, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, Although the 27th minor winning combination is achieved, depending on the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the 28th minor winning combination may be achieved instead of the 27th minor winning winning. In other words, although the configuration is such that the winning mode for winning the 27th minor role includes the winning mode for winning the 28th minor role, winning the 27th minor role and winning the 28th minor role are clearly distinguished when determining the winning. will be held.

The 29th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. In other words, when the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the valid line, the 29th small winning combination is established when the "watermelon" symbols stop aligned downward to the right. When the 29th small winning combination is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 30th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the upper line L1. More specifically, if the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 30th small It will be a prize. When the 30th small winning combination is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"Black BAR" symbol, "Youth" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol, "1st Replay" on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "Red Bell" symbol or "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. If the "Bell" symbol stops on the activated line, the 31st small role will be won. When the 31st small winning combination is established, nine medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 32nd minor winning combination to the 35th minor winning winning, if the winning is achieved in a 3-bet game, 3 medals will be paid out, and in a 2-bet game, 14 medals will be paid out.

The 36th small prize is won if the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L. This is a winning mode in which the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the active line, while the "watermelon" symbols on the remaining reels do not stop on the active line, resulting in a so-called watermelon tenpai off-stop roll. When the 36th small winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, and "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol, "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. If the "Bell" symbol and the "Youth" symbol stop on the active line, the 37th small role will be won. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, a "second replay" symbol is arranged at a position adjacent to the "red bell" symbol (number 7) on the downstream side (number 6), and the main "white ``Bell'' symbols (No. 3, 12, 15, 20) and downstream adjacent positions (No. 2, 11, 14, 19) are arranged with ``First Replay'' symbols. On the right reel 32R, the main "Red Bell" symbols (No. 2, 5, 12, 20) and the "1 A "replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol is arranged, and a "first replay" symbol is arranged at a position (number 11) adjacent to the "white bell" symbol (number 10) on the upstream side. For this reason, when the 37th small prize is established on the downward-sloping line L4, the "Bell" symbol and the "Replay" symbol are at full strength mainly on the left reel 32L and right reel 32R, while the middle reel 32M is The "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol do not stop, resulting in a so-called double tenpai failure. When the 37th small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"White BAR" symbol, "Youth" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol, "1st Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, "1st Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R, When the "Watermelon" symbol and the "Black BAR" symbol stop on the active line, the 38th small prize is awarded. In a 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the No. 4 "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper row to the lower row, if the 38th minor prize is established, the left The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop on the middle line L2. When the 38th small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, He won the 39th small role prize. The 39th small winning combination is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 39th small winning combination is achieved, nine medals are paid out.

When the "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, This is the 40th small role prize. The 40th small winning combination is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 40th small winning combination is achieved, nine medals are paid out.

If the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol or "Cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 41st small It will be a prize. When the 41st small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

Prizes for which a replay benefit that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals include the 1st replay win to the 12th replay win. Furthermore, if the second re-game winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state, and if the third re-gaming winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-gaming win is achieved. If a winning or a fifth re-game winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state. Then, when the eleventh re-game winning or the twelfth re-gaming winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the fourth RT state.

State transition winnings in which only a gaming state transition is performed include a 1st BB winning, a 2nd BB winning, and a CB winning.

When the "Red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, the first BB prize is won and the gaming state shifts to the first BB state. Further, when the "white BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the activated line, the second BB win occurs and the gaming state shifts to the second BB state. The "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol, "1st Replay" symbol, and "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R. If , stops on the active line, it will be a CB win. If a CB win is established, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although different from winning, there is a stop result in which the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, and the "white BAR" symbol, "LUCKY" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "white bell" symbol, and "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M. When the "cherry" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Also, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white BAR" symbol, "youth" symbol, and "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R. , "Red 7" symbol, and "Second Replay" symbol stop on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Hereinafter, the combination of the above symbols will be referred to as a transition roll.

At the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 is provided which is operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, that is, start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are connected to a main control device 101, which will be described later. The main controller 101 then recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated based on detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a output LOW detection signals, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 recognizes the switching of the signals and recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, it controls the reels corresponding to the operated switches to stop rotating.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped. In this case, the right reel 32R stops rotating. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means that is operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal slot 45 involves an operation in which the player directly inserts medals, it can be said that the medal slot 45 constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting game media.

The medals inserted through the medal slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back side of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the ejection passage 48 side. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided from a medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 to a medal receiving tray 50 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out the medals to the player. The dispensing device 53 discharges the medals into an opening 48a provided in the discharging passage 48 by rotating a medal dispensing rotating plate (not shown), and dispensing the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 via the discharging passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a reserve tank 54 is provided to avoid storing more than a predetermined amount of medals in the storage tank 52. A guide plate 52a is provided inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals are stored at a level higher than the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. If the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals stuck in the selector 46 are removed. It is designed to be returned through a discharge port 49.

At the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, a first credit input switch 56 is provided for inputting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time. Further, a second credit input switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit input switch 56, and a third credit input switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56. The second credit input switch 57 is for inputting one virtual medal, and the third credit input switch 58 is for inputting two virtual medals at a time. Each of the credit input switches 56 to 58 constitutes an input means for inputting game media together with the medal input slot 45. Also, it should be noted that whereas the medal slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, the credit input switches 56 to 58 only involve the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media.

A performance switch 66 is provided between the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57, which is operated when a performance occurs. That is, a first credit input switch 56 and a third credit input switch 58 are provided on the left side of the production switch 66, and a second credit input switch 57 is provided on the right side of the production switch 66. There is.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores surplus input medals and paid-out medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the payment switch 59 is operated under the condition that the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal outlet 49 as real medals. In this case, if we focus on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display section 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining payout number that displays the remaining number of medals that will be paid out before the BB state ends. A display section 61 and a payout number display section 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are constructed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25, and to the right of the payout number display section 62, there is a push order display that indicates the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and a push order display that indicates the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. An instruction monitor 68 is provided with a section indicator for indicating an advantageous section, which is a section in which the winning rate of the small winning combination is changed by the above, and the game can be played in an advantageous situation for the player. The instruction monitor 68 will be explained in detail later.

At the top of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that play various sound effects and notify the player of the game status as the game progresses. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for providing various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and since the game using each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be based on the main display section, in this embodiment, It is called an auxiliary display section 65. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 is provided on the back side of the auxiliary display section 65.

A power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 accommodates a power supply device 91 therein, and also includes a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (set value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by a hall manager or the like inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on. Note that the reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting an error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 is attached to the housing 11 for overall management of the game.

The main control device 101 is provided with a winning ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio of gaming states that are advantageous to the player and those that are not. The role ratio monitor 77 is controlled by the main controller so that it becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is open, and becomes invisible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is closed. 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the gaming machine, and more specifically, it is installed in the board box so that the display surface of the role ratio monitor 77 can be viewed through the board box in which the main control device 101 is housed. It is accommodated. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be seen through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R, and the locked state is released by operating a predetermined key on the key cylinder 21. It is impossible to check the role ratio monitor 77 unless the front door 12 is opened. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be explained in detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 102 which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has rotated once), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a third credit. A third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the input switch 58, a payment detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the payment switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when a setting key is inserted and turned on are connected, and signals from these various sensors are outputted to the CPU 102 via an input/output port 104. It has become.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply section 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 101, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the state of power interruption and generates a power failure signal not only in the event of a power outage but also in the event of power interruption by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage, which in this example is 12 volts DC, output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power has been cut off when this drive voltage drops to, for example, less than 10 volts. It is configured so that a power outage signal is output. The power outage signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 executes power outage processing to be described later by recognizing this power outage signal. Further, this power outage signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. The time during which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for the main controller 101 to perform power outage processing.

On the output side of the main control device 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, a credit card A display section 60, a remaining payout number display section 61, a payout number display section 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 that can send information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are included. It is connected via an output port 104.

The CPU 102 described above includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106, which is not shown, as is well known, there are various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits. Various counters are built-in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as a storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the power to the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing lottery results of winning combinations, and stop information used to control the stop of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to a stop information storage area 106b for storing game conditions such as a BB state, a state information storage area 106c for storing game states such as BB state, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power cutoff (including power cutoff due to operation of the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter) when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Yes, when the power outage is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is turned off by power outage processing (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed during the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. When the power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing as power outage flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 181, which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. It has built-in RAM 183 for securing the memory.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input/output port (not shown), and the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display section 65 are connected to the output side. There is. Then, based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 serves as a sub-platform that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main platform that centrally manages the games. That is, by providing a sub-board for audio, lamps, and displays related to indirect games, the burden on the main board is reduced.

A production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) is connected to the input side of the display control device 81. Note that the various display sections 60 to 62 and 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be explained. The processing of the CPU 102 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power outage signal sent to the NMI terminal. There is also an NMI interrupt process that is activated in response to the input of . Below, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be explained.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by the main controller 101, and the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 used in normal processing to be described later are saved to the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here, an outline of the power outage process will be explained.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power outage signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power failure signal is input, the main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power outage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is ended, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing, and the command transmission is completed. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. Thereafter, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, by calculating a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal or not when the power outage is resolved and storing it in a backup area, subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In addition, considering the case where the power outage flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, for example, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power outage signal is not output, it means that the power outage has been recovered, so writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power outage flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the power outage signal continues to be output, an infinite loop will continue. Incidentally, even under an infinite loop, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, the process moves to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are performed.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clearing process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S105, interrupt end declaration processing is performed to enable the next timer interrupt to be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motor, which is the respective drum drive motor. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read results are normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor the In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to transmit various commands such as a lottery result command to be described later to the display control device 81. In step S111, segment data setting processing is performed to set segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, remaining payout number display section 61, and payout number display section 62, respectively. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed in which the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. are displayed. In step S113, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are restored to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processing is ended.

Next, the normal processing for performing main control related to the game will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 15.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 and the like complete initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game, etc.) are cleared. Thereafter, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether any re-game winnings were achieved in the previous game. If any re-game winning is established, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically input virtual medals of the same number as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is ended. Specifically, for example, if a replay winning is achieved in a 3 bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and if a replay winning is achieved in a 1 bet game, one virtual medal is automatically inserted. Performs processing to automatically insert virtual medals.

In addition, in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without subtracting the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60. In other words, if any re-game winning is achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals he owns and without inserting medals. If any re-gaming winnings have not been established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether any abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process, If an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated or not, and when the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process that pays out the same number of virtual medals as the credited virtual medals. I do.

After the end of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, it is determined whether medals were inserted or credit input switches 56 to 58 were operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one of them is performed, a medal insertion process is performed to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process is ended. Furthermore, if neither medals nor credit input switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended.

After the start waiting process ends, in step S205, it is determined whether the number of bets for medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as the specified number of CB states, and gaming states other than the CB state (specifically, normal gaming state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, third RT state, 4RT state, BB state) "1" and "3" are set as the specified numbers. In other words, in the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "2", and in other than the CB state, the condition is that the number of bets is "1" or "3". An affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a gaming state other than the CB state, if no medals have been bet, or if a bet has been made but the number of bets is "2", a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and among the processes, the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, a mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. Such transition notification processing will be explained in detail later.

After performing the process in step S206, a bet command including information on the process result in step S206 and information on the number of bets for which an affirmative determination was made in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device. Set as the output target. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the bet command will be described in detail later.

After executing the process in step S207, it is determined in step S208 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated, the configuration is such that the game can be started if the start lever 41 is operated under a situation where a specified number of medals have been bet. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S209, a valid line setting process is performed in which the combination line corresponding to the bet number is set as the valid line. That is, in a 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as an active line, and in a 2-bet game, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as active lines. Furthermore, in a 1-bet game, the bending line L6 is set as the valid line. In step S210, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a de-energized state to prohibit bet acceptance. Thereafter, the lottery process in step S211, the reel control process in step S212, the medal payout process in step S213, the RT status process in step S214, and the bonus status process in step S215 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S211 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 16.

In step S301, a random number to be used when determining the validity of a winning combination is acquired. This slot machine 10 is configured such that when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. With this configuration, it becomes possible to obtain a random number promptly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it becomes possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table is selected for determining the validity of the winning combination. This slot machine 10 has six gaming states: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a fourth RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. Tables are set up for each gaming state.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is selected. . For example, if the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, the current gaming state is determined to be the normal gaming state, and the lottery table for the normal gaming state is set. select. In addition, in this slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are prepared in advance, and when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set which winning probability is based on which internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "Setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "Setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the process related to setting the probability of winning.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process that is started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on with the setting key detection sensor 73a detecting that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on. Started after initialization processing. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. For example, each time the start lever 41 is operated, the setting value is changed from "setting 1" to "setting 2". The setting values are updated as follows: → "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1". Note that each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated every time the set value is updated. Then, the operation of the start lever 41 with the setting key detection sensor 73a turned OFF is regarded as a setting value confirmation operation, and the setting value at that point is set as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process ends. do. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display on the credit display section 60 also ends. The setting value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and held in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a process of selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored setting values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for the normal gaming state selected in the normal gaming state of "Setting 3". Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, the determination value DV used for determining the validity of the winning combination is set. In this judgment value setting process, a new judgment value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current judgment value DV. In addition, in the first judgment value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the current index value IV, 1, and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value, and a new value is set. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is valid or not. In determining the validity of the combination, it is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If the number exceeds 65535, it is determined in step S306 whether or not one of the first BB, second BB, and CB has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an affirmative determination was made in step S305 for the index value IV (IV=34 to 54) that includes any one of the first BB, second BB, and CB. If an affirmative determination is made in step S306, processing is performed to set the corresponding bonus winning flags (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag) in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S307. If a negative determination is made in step S306, or after the process in step S307 is performed, in step S308, the winning flag of each minor role corresponding to the index value IV that was affirmatively determined in step S305 is stored in the winning flag storage area. 106a. For example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=34, the 1st BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th minor winning flag, the 33rd minor winning flag, and the 33rd minor winning flag are set in step S308. 35 Set the small winning winning flag. Further, when the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=17, a winning flag indicating that the 30th minor prize and the 41st minor prize have been won is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S308.

By the way, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag indicating that the first BB was won (first BB winning flag) or a winning flag indicating that the second BB was winning (second BB winning flag), the winning flag is stored in the winning flag storage area 106a. The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag was set ends (see S203 of the normal process). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset with one of the conditions being that the corresponding winning has been achieved. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over multiple games.

In addition, in steps S306 to S308 in a state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1st BB, 2nd BB, or CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and the 1st BB, If a winning combination other than the second BB and CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=34 in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, the 1st BB winning flag is not set and the 28th minor winning flag is set. , the 33rd small winning combination winning flag, and the 35th small winning winning flag are set. In addition, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 35 while the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, the 2nd BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th minor winning flag, the 33rd The small winning combination winning flag and the 35th small winning winning flag are set.

In addition, a lottery table in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over is prepared separately, and when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery process is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. It is also possible to have a configuration that performs the following. In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV value may be set so as not to win the first BB, second BB, and CB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV has failed. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S309, and in the subsequent step S310, it is determined whether there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of the validity of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV used to judge the validity of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, the winning combination is determined based on the determination value DV. By the way, when determining the validity of the winning combination using the lottery table shown in Figure 17, the probability of winning in the normal replay (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/7.3, which is the probability of winning in the strong cherry. The probability of winning a weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 15) is approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 16) is approximately 1/183. be. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 17) is approximately 1 in 300, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 18) is approximately 1 in 300. 1. The probability of winning chance A (probability of winning when IV = 19) is approximately 1/252, and the probability of winning chance B (probability of winning when IV = 20) is approximately 252. It is 1/1. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 21) is approximately 1 in 32,800, and the probability of winning the no-questions bell (probability of winning when IV = 22) is approximately 1 in 32,800. It is 1. The probability of winning the sequential push bell 1, the sequential push bell 2, the pinch push bell 1, and the pinch push bell 2 (the probability of winning when IV = 23 to 26) is approximately 1/43.7, respectively, and the middle push bell 1. The probability of winning the middle push bell 2, the right push bell 1, and the right push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV=27 to 30) is about 1/21.8. The probability of winning Strong Cherry Duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 34) is approximately 1/21800, and the probability of winning Strong Cherry Duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is approximately 1/21800. Approximately 1 in 21,800, the probability of winning weak cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is approximately 1 in 32,800, the probability of winning weak cherry duplication 2 (when IV = 37) The probability of winning is approximately 1/32,800. The probability of winning strong watermelon stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is approximately 1/32800, and the probability of winning strong watermelon stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is approximately 1/32800. It is approximately 1/32,800. The probability of winning weak watermelon stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 40) is approximately 1/65500, and the probability of winning weak watermelon stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 41) is approximately 1/65500. It is approximately 1/65,500. The probability of winning in Chance A overlap 1, Chance A overlap 2, Chance B overlap 1, and Chance B overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=42 to 45) is about 1/32800. The probability of winning middle bell duplication 1 and middle bell duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV=46, 47) is about 1/21800, respectively. The probability of winning the special reply A duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is approximately 1/1010, and the probability of winning the special reply A duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 49) ) is approximately 1/1310. The probability of winning the special reply AB duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 50) is approximately 1/1010, and the probability of winning the special reply AB duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 51) ) is approximately 1/1310. The probability of winning the first BB and the second BB alone (probability of winning when IV=52, 53) is about 1/32800, respectively. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV=54) is approximately 1/19.9. Furthermore, the probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/1.96.

Note that in the normal game state lottery table, 0 is set for the point values PV of IV=2 to 14, 31 to 33, and 55 to 58. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, winnings cannot be won at these index values IV.

After the winning flag is set in step S308, or if it is determined in step S310 that there is no object to be judged, it means that the judgment of the winning combination has ended. In such a case, the process advances to step S311, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In the following step S312, lottery result handling processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S311, processing for notifying the winning combination, etc. are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process in step S312, a lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand the result of determining whether the winning combination is correct or not. However, in the normal process, various commands such as the above lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no commands are transmitted to the display control device 81. The command is sent to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S314, a stop information setting process is executed to set stoppable symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in steps S306 to S308. For example, if you win a strong cherry (win when IV = 15) and the strong cherry winning flag is set, the symbols corresponding to the 28th minor prize, 32nd minor prize to 35th minor prize win will be on each reel 32L. , 32M, and 32R so that the symbols can be stopped. In addition, if the strong cherry duplicate 1 is won (winning when IV = 34) and the strong cherry winning flag and the 1st BB winning flag are set, the 28th small role, 33rd small role, 35th small role, and Stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to 1BB winning can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the following step S315, when a plurality of stoppable symbol information is set in step S314, a priority setting process is executed to set the priority order. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor role, replay, and bonus roles have been won, the following priority order is set. If a small role win and a bonus are won, the priority order is set so that the small role win takes priority and the bonus win is established when the small role win cannot be achieved. . When winning a re-game and a bonus, the priority order is set so that the re-game winning is established with priority.

For example, if you win Strong Cherry Duplicate 1 and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th minor role, 33rd minor role, 35th minor role, and 1st BB prize is set, the 28th minor prize is selected more than the 1BB prize. The priority order is set so that the winning of the small prize, the 33rd minor prize, and the 35th minor prize are established with priority. In addition, if you win the special reply A duplicate 1 and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 9th replay and 1st BB win is set, the 9th replay win will take priority over the 1st BB win. Set priorities accordingly. For example, in a situation where the 1st BB winning is carried over, if you win in the normal replay and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 1st BB winning and the 1st replay winning is set, the 1. Priorities are set so that re-game winnings are established with priority.

Here, when a re-game is won, a winning combination of symbols is set so that one of the winning re-games will definitely win. In other words, if the player wins in the replay, the replay win will definitely be achieved and there will be no loss of winnings. Therefore, when stop symbol information for re-games and bonuses is set, a re-game win is always achieved in any of the set re-games, and a bonus win is never achieved.

In addition, in the case where multiple small winning combinations or multiple replays overlap and win, which small winning combination or symbol corresponding to the replay stops on the active line depends on the timing at which the stop operation is performed. For example, if you win a strong watermelon and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 30th minor role and 41st minor role winning is set, as described above, the 30th minor role and the 41st minor role are The target symbol on reel 32L is the common "watermelon" symbol. Therefore, depending on the timing of the stop operation of the left reel 32L, it is not determined which small winning combination will be achieved. On the other hand, the target symbols on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R are both the "Red Bell" symbol in the 30th small win, and the middle reel 32M is the "Cherry" symbol and the "Black BAR" symbol in the 41st small win. , the right reel 32R has a "watermelon" symbol. For example, in a 3-bet game, on the middle reel 32M, if the stop operation of the middle stop switch 43 is performed at the timing when the 4th "Watermelon" symbol to the 7th "Red Bell" symbol reaches the middle row, the 30th It is possible to stop both the 7th “Red Bell” symbol, which is the target symbol of the small role, and the “Black BAR” symbol, which is the target symbol of the 41st minor role, in the middle row on the active line. becomes. In this case, in this embodiment, the stopping symbol information is set so that symbols with a small number of slips are prioritized and stopped. As a result, in the above case, the stop drive control is performed so that the "red bell" symbol stops in the middle row, the 41st minor winning combination will not be won, and the 30th minor winning combination will become possible.

On the other hand, on the middle reel 32M, if the stop operation of the middle stop switch 43 is performed at the timing when the 8th "black BAR" symbol to the 12th "red bell" symbol reaches the middle row, the target of the 41st small role Both the 8th "Black BAR" symbol and the 11th "Cherry" symbol, which are the symbols, and the 12th "Red Bell" symbol, which is the target symbol of the 30th small role, must be stopped in the middle row. becomes possible. In this case as well, the stopping symbol information is set so that the symbol with the lowest number of slides is prioritized and stopped, so the 8th "Black BAR" symbol or the 11th "Cherry" symbol will stop in the middle row, and the 11th "Cherry" symbol will stop in the middle row, The 30th small winning combination will no longer be possible, and the 41st small winning combination will become possible.

The same goes for the right reel 32R, and depending on the timing when the right stop switch 44 is stopped, the "Red Bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor prize, and the "Watermelon" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 41st minor prize, are displayed. The stop symbol information is set so that the symbol that has a smaller number of slips than the symbol stops at the lower stage, which is the active line. In addition, on the right reel 32R, if the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed at the timing when the 6th "1st Replay" symbol and the 7th "Black BAR" symbol reach the effective position, "Watermelon" Neither the symbol nor the "red bell" symbol can be stopped, and in this case, no small winning combination is achieved and the player is left out.

After executing the process of step S315, the section display first process is executed in step S316, and then the lottery process is ended. The first section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and the hand ratio monitor 77, and this process will be explained in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S212 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 18.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation performance process is a process for performing a performance using reel control during the invalid period based on the results of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311. In the following step S402, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game, and if it has not elapsed, the wait time has elapsed. Wait until If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and motor control initialization processing is performed to set rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106. By performing such processing, acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the process waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a predetermined rotational speed, and the rotation start process ends. Furthermore, when the rotational speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting the lamps (not shown) of each stop switch 42 to 44. Notify players, etc.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. do. If a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S403 and waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand which stop switch was operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reels.

In step S406, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stopping mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, there is a corresponding stopping mode in which when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stopping mode in which the reels are stopped after sliding one symbol, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding two symbols, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are available. Therefore, in step S407, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Thereafter, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stopped symbol. If they are equal, reel stop processing to stop the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop roll of the stopped reels. In this slot machine 10, for example, if you win when IV=23 to 30, that is, sequential push bell 1, sequential push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When push bell 1 and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order bell") are won (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command are activated. A second stop information setting process is performed to change the winning mode established depending on the order of operations.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. For example, if the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the second minor role win, the seventh minor role win, or the ninth minor role win is established. Then, the stop information is set so that the first minor prize is established when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, and the second minor prize is established when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. The stop information is set so that the winning part or the 9th small winning part is achieved. However, even if the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding winning may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly explained. In this slot machine 10, in a gaming state other than the CB state (3-bet game), the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding up to 4 symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. , only the right-sloping line L4 is set as a valid line. Therefore, if the same type of symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol will be activated when it becomes a winning symbol regardless of the timing of operating the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, with regard to the symbols arranged so as to form sections separated by five or more symbols, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in order to stop the symbols on the active line.

An example will be explained in which the middle press bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → middle stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 are operated in the order. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in order to achieve the second minor prize winning, the seventh minor prize winning, or the ninth minor prize winning.

The second small role symbols on the left reel 32L are a "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol. In addition, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also have a function as the seventh minor role symbol, and also have a function as the ninth minor role symbol. The left reel 32L is arranged such that the interval between the second small role symbols (the seventh minor role symbols, the ninth minor role symbols) is four or less symbols. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped at the upper row regardless of the timing of the operation. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the No. 4 "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the middle stage, the No. 7 "Red Bell" symbol will appear as shown in FIG. 20(a). The pattern stops at the top. As a result, there remains room for winning the second minor role, winning the seventh minor role, or winning the ninth minor role on the downward-sloping line L4.

The second small role symbol on the middle reel 32M is a “white BAR” symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "white BAR" symbol is placed only at the 18th position. Furthermore, the seventh small role symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "Red 7" symbol is placed only at the 14th position. The 9th small winning symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "cherry" symbol is placed only at the 11th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second small role symbol, the seventh minor role symbol, or the ninth minor role symbol may stop on the active line, or the second minor role symbol, the seventh minor role symbol, or the ninth minor role symbol may stop on the active line. None of the 9th small winning symbols may stop on the active line.

Specifically, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the "1st Replay" symbol No. 13 to the "1st Replay" symbol No. 17 has reached the lower row, the second small role The "white BAR" symbol stops in the middle. As a result, there remains room for the second small winning combination to be realized on the downward-sloping line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the "Second Replay" symbol No. 9 to the "First Replay" symbol No. 13 has reached the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 20(b), , the ``Red 7'' symbol, which is the 7th small winning symbol, stops in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the seventh small winning combination to be realized on the downward-sloping line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 6th "white bell" symbol to the 10th "young man" symbol reaches the bottom row, the 9th small role symbol "cherry" symbol will be moved to the middle row. Stop at. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at any other timing, even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after sliding for 4 symbols, the 2nd small role symbol, the 7th minor role symbol, and the 9th minor role symbol will be changed. Cannot be stopped in the middle. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such timing, the number 2 "LUCKY" symbol or the number 6 "white bell" symbol stops at the middle stage.

When the 7th small role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the 7th small role winning can be realized.

The 7th small role symbol on the right reel 32R is a “white bell” symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white bell" symbol is placed only at the 10th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the seventh small winning symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the "1st Replay" symbol No. 6 to the "White Bell" symbol No. 10 has reached the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 20(c). As shown in , the "white bell" symbol, which is the 7th small role symbol, stops at the lower row. As a result, the 7th small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. For example, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the No. 3 "Second Replay" symbol has reached the bottom row, the No. 4 "Watermelon" symbol will be displayed as shown in FIG. 20(d). Stop at the bottom. The combination of the "red bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG. 11.

When the 9th small role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the 9th small role winning can be realized.

The 9th small role symbol on the right reel 32R is a “Youth” symbol. On the right reel 32R, a "youth" symbol is placed at the 15th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the ninth small winning symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the "1st Replay" symbol No. 11 to the "Youth" symbol No. 15 has reached the lower stage, the 9th small role symbol will be selected. The "Youth" design stops at the bottom. As a result, the 9th small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "cherry" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG. 11.

When the second small role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the second small role winning can be realized.

The second small role symbol on the right reel 32R is the “white BAR” symbol. On the right reel 32R, a "white BAR" symbol is placed at the 18th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second small winning symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 14th "Watermelon" symbol to the 18th "White BAR" symbol reaches the lower stage, the second small role symbol " The "White BAR" symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the second small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "white BAR" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG. 11.

If the 2nd small role symbol, 7th minor role symbol, and 9th minor role symbol on the middle reel 32M do not stop in the middle row, that is, the "LUCKY" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row. In this case, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol is stopped at the lower stage.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" symbol are arranged such that the interval between the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" symbol is four or less symbols. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol is stopped at the lower row regardless of the timing of the operation. From the left, the combinations of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "LUCKY" symbol ("white bell" symbol), and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) transition as shown in Figure 11. It's a good result.

In this way, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → middle stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 is operated in the order, the second minor prize winning will be established, and the seventh minor prize will be won. There are three cases: a winning is achieved, a ninth minor role winning is successful, and a transitional number is stopped.

Next, an example will be explained in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 are operated in this order. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the first small winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, "red bell" symbols, which are the first small winning symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the "red bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol stops at the middle row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols and "white bell" symbols, which are first minor prize symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the first minor prize symbols is four or less symbols. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the second time, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped on the upper row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the right reel 32R, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, which are the first minor prize symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the first minor prize symbols is four or less symbols. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated thirdly, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped at the lower row regardless of the timing of the operation.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 is operated in the order, the first small winning combination is achieved regardless of the timing of the operation.

If the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operation orders, the first small role prize will be established regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, depending on the timing of the operation, a small winning combination will be established, or the transition number will stop on the active line. By the way, if you win the middle bell, you will win the 38th small role regardless of the operation order and timing, and if you win the no-questions-asked bell, you will win the 38th small role regardless of the operation order and operation timing. 1 small win prize is established.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process that sets the number of medals to be paid out, with one condition being that the winning symbol combinations are lined up on the active line. In the payout determination process, the combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped at the bottom of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and it is determined whether or not a winning has been achieved on the active line. judge. If the winning combination is established, it is further determined whether the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S414. In the winning result corresponding process, processing for shifting the gaming state based on the winning result is performed. The winning result corresponding process will be explained in detail later.

After performing the winning result corresponding process, a second section display process is executed in step S415. The second section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this process will be described in detail later. In the subsequent step S416, a random number acquisition process is executed to acquire random numbers for lottery used in display mode transition lottery. Random number acquisition seed processing will also be explained in detail later. Thereafter, in step S417, a winning result command is set to cause the display control device 81 to grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is ended.

Next, an outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be explained.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0 or not. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a small winning combination has not been achieved. In such a case, based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process, it is determined whether any of the first to eighth replay winnings has been achieved. If any replay winnings have not been achieved, the medal payout process is immediately terminated, and if any replay winnings have been achieved, a replay setting process is performed to change the gaming state to the replaying state. , ends the medal payout process. In addition, in the start waiting process (step S204) explained earlier, when it is determined that the current gaming state is a re-gaming state, automatic insertion processing is performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts are paid out, and the medal payout process is ended. Specifically, regarding the payout of medals, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is It is displayed on the credit display section 60. In addition, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven and the medals are ejected from the hopper device 51. The medals are paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 via the outlet 49. In addition, in the medal payout process, processing is also performed to change the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals. In addition, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61 is subtracted. .

Next, the RT state processing in step S214 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 21.

In step S501, it is determined whether the gaming state is the fourth RT state by checking whether the fourth RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106. If it is the fourth RT state, the process advances to step S502 and subtraction processing of the fixed RT game number is performed. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, the fourth RT state is an RT state in which the number of executable games is predetermined, and the process in step S502 is a process for subtracting the remaining number of executable games. be. In the following step S503, it is determined whether the remaining number of executable games in the fourth RT state has become zero based on the processing result of step S502. If it becomes 0, the process of clearing the fourth RT setting flag is executed in step S504, and then the present RT state process ends. By performing the process of step S504, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. If a negative determination is made in step S503, the present RT state processing is immediately terminated. In this case, the fourth RT state continues.

If a negative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S505 whether or not the transition number has stopped on the active line. If the transition number has stopped, the process advances to step S506, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, a first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S507. After that, this process ends. If it is determined in step S505 that the transition roll has not stopped on the active line, the process advances to step S508, and the second re-game winning is determined based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine whether it is established. If the second re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S509, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S507. After that, this process ends. In addition, if the rolled number stops moving on the active line under a gaming state other than the fourth RT state and the normal gaming state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S509, and the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared. , the first RT setting flag is set in step S507, and the process ends.

If the first RT setting flag is set in step S507, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the first RT state of “Setting 3”. When compared with the lottery table for the normal gaming state (see FIG. 17), the first RT state lottery table has different point values PV for IV=1 to 5, and the same point values PV for other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when determining the validity of a winning combination using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 58 is equal to each winning probability in the normal gaming state, and the probability of winning when IV = 1 The probability of winning is approximately 1/67.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2 to 5 is approximately 1/32.8. The probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22, if you win when IV=1, it will be a normal replay win, and if you win when IV=2, it will be a first promotion replay 1 win, and IV If you win when IV = 3, you will win 1st promotion replay 2, if you win when IV = 4, you will win 1st promotion replay 3, and if you win when IV = 5, you will win 1st promotion replay 3. In this case, you will win the 1st promotion replay 4. The probability of winning when IV=1 to 5 is approximately 1/7.30. The normal replay winning probability under normal gaming conditions is also approximately 1/7.30. In other words, when the gaming state shifts to the first RT state, each role type of small role, replay, and bonus will be won with the same probability as in the normal gaming state, and the winning mode will be such that the replay benefit is granted. changes to something different from the normal gaming state. More specifically, in the normal gaming state, only the first re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state is realized, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-gaming winning, the third re-gaming prize that shifts to the second RT state is realized. To establish.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), a stop command is generated not only when the above-mentioned push order bell is won but also when the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 is won. Stop information is set in order to change the winning mode achieved depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44.

FIG. 23(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. If you win the first promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, unlike the case where you win the push order bell, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay prize or The third re-game winning is guaranteed. For 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, the 3rd replay is associated with one of the 6 operation orders, and the 1st replay is associated with the other operation orders. It is attached.

In addition, in the first promoted replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, seventh replay, and eighth replay are also distributed as winning combinations. However, these 6th re-game to 8th re-game are not associated with any of the above six operation orders. Therefore, in the sixth to eighth regames, even if the first promotion replays 2 to 4 are won, no prize is won regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated.

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is assigned the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 2 is assigned the first replay and the third replay. In addition to the 3rd replay, the 6th replay is distributed, the 1st promoted replay 3 is distributed with the 7th replay in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and the 1st promoted replay 4 is distributed. Although the 8th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, no matter which of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replay is the 1st replay and the 3rd replay. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the order of operations for achieving the third replay win. That is, for example, if there is one type of first promotion replay, there is also one type of operation order corresponding to the third replay winning, and when the first promotion replay is won, the third replay winning is intentionally established. This is because it may be possible to do so. Note that this relationship is not limited to the relationship between first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other duplicate roles.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S508 that the second replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S510, and based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third re-game winning is established. If the third replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S511, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S512, and this process ends. do.

If the second RT setting flag is set in step S512, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the second RT state lottery table is selected. do.

FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of “Setting 3”. When compared with the first RT state lottery table (see FIG. 22), the second RT state lottery table has different point values PV for IV=1 to 10, and the same point values PV for other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when determining the validity of a winning combination using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV=11 to 58 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, and the probability of winning when IV=1 The probability of not winning when IV = 2 to 5 is approximately 1/11.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is approximately 1/15.5 and IV = 9. , 10, the probability of winning is approximately 1/8.90. The probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/150. That is, when moving to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal gaming state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first replay win that does not shift the gaming state, the second replay win that shifts to the first RT state, the fourth replay win that shifts to the third RT state, and the fifth replay win that shifts to the third RT state. A prize is won.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), in addition to the case where the above-mentioned first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, and Even when winning the 2 promotion replay 2, stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

FIG. 23(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. In the case of a win in Fall Replay 1 to Fall Replay 3, the first re-game win or the second re-game win is always achieved regardless of the timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. If you win the 2nd promotion replay 1, regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, either the 1st replay win, the 4th replay win, or the 5th replay win will always be achieved. . If the second promotion replay 2 is won, the first replay win or the fourth replay win will definitely be achieved regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44.

In addition, the number attached to the fourth re-game in the figure corresponds to the symbol combination when the fourth re-game winning is achieved. "1" corresponds to a symbol combination that results in a winning combination, and "2" corresponds to a symbol combination that results in a red 7, red 7, and black BAR middle stop (see FIG. 11). For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first when winning the second promotion replay 1, the winning symbol combination will stop and the fourth replay winning will be established, or the red 7 - Red 7/Black BAR The symbol combination that stops in the middle row stops and the 4th re-game winning is established.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S510 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S513, and based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-gaming winning has been achieved. If the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S514, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S515. Then, this process ends.

If the third RT setting flag is set in step S515, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the third RT state based on the fact that the third RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the third RT state lottery table is selected. do.

FIG. 25 is a third RT state lottery table selected in the third RT state of “Setting 3”. When compared with the second RT state lottery table (see FIG. 24), the third RT state lottery table has different point values PV for IV=9 to 12, and the same point values PV for other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when determining the validity of a winning combination using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 1 to 8, 13 to 58 is equal to the probability of winning each in the second RT state, and the probability of winning when IV = 9, 10 When IV=11 and 12, the probability of winning is approximately 1/7.00. The probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/150. In other words, when the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state, each role type of small role, replay, and bonus will be won with the same probability as in the 2nd RT state, and the prize winning mode in which the replay benefit is granted. changes to a state different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-gaming winning that does not change the gaming state and the 2nd re-gaming winning that moves to the 1st RT state, the 6th re-gaming winning that does not change the gaming state, and the 6th re-gaming winning that does not change the gaming state. The 7th re-game win, the 8th re-game win, and the 3rd re-game win that moves to the 2nd RT state are established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), even if a prize is won in BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2, the winning mode that is achieved is changed depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command. Set the stop information accordingly.

FIG. 23(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. If you win BAR Replay 1, regardless of the operating timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, you will receive either the 1st replay win, 6th replay win, 7th replay win, or 3rd replay win. always holds true. If you win BAR Replay 2, regardless of the operating timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, you will receive either the 1st replay win, 6th replay win, 8th replay win, or 3rd replay win. always holds true.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S513 that the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win has not been established, the process advances to step S516, and the win set in the previous payout determination process is Based on the winning combination, it is determined whether the 11th re-game winning or the 12th re-gaming winning has been achieved. If neither the 11th re-game winning nor the 12th re-gaming winning is achieved, the RT state process is immediately ended. If the 11th replay win or the 12th replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S517, and the 4th RT setting flag is set in step S518. Then, in step S519, a fixed RT game number setting process is executed, and then this process ends. Step S519 is a process of setting the number of games that can be executed in the fourth RT state. Specifically, in step S519, a prescribed value (for example, 10) is input to the fixed RT counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. In the above step S502, the fixed RT counter is subtracted, and when the counter becomes 0, the process for ending the fourth RT state is executed in step S503.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 26.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If it is not in the bonus state, bonus determination processing shown in steps S602 to S613 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, it is determined in step S602 whether any one of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag is set. If any of the winning flags is set, the process advances to step S603, and it is determined whether or not a CB winning combination has been achieved based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If a CB win is established, a CB setting flag is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in a remaining payout number counter provided in the status information storage area 106c for counting the remaining number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state. By performing the processing of steps S604 to S605, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

Here, CB and CB state will be briefly explained.

The "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol, "1st Replay" symbol, or "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R. If , stops on the active line, it will be a CB win. The CB symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R so that the interval between the CB symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, if a CB is won, the CB is won regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The main control device 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state when the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. Then, in step S205 of the normal process, it is determined whether the number of bets on medals has reached "2" instead of "3", and in the effective line setting process (step S209), the lower line L3 and the lower right line L4 are determined. Set as the valid line.

In step S302 of the lottery process, a CB state lottery table is selected. Although illustration of the CB state lottery table is omitted, in the CB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV = 1 to 52, and "16384" is set as the point value PV for IV = 55 to 58. is set (see FIG. 17 etc. for the correspondence between the IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning CB small/medium winning combination 1 (probability of winning when IV = 55) is approximately 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB small/medium winning combination 2 (IV = 56). The probability of winning when IV = 57) is approximately 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB Small and Medium Role 3 (probability of winning when IV = 57) is approximately 1/4.00, The probability of winning the small/medium winning combination 4 (probability of winning when IV=58) is approximately 1/4.00. No outlier events occur.

FIG. 27(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, even if you win any of CB small/medium winnings 1 to CB small/medium winnings 4, any small winning will occur regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. It will definitely come true. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, if you win the 1st minor role, 27th minor role, 31st minor role, 36th minor role to 38th minor role win, you will receive 15 medals. If a payout is made and the 2nd minor role winning ~ 26th minor role winning, 28th minor role winning ~ 30th minor role winning, 32nd minor role winning ~ 35th minor role winning, 14 pieces Medals are paid out. In other words, when transitioning to the CB state, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out.

In addition, in place of or in addition to the CB as a winning combination and the CB state as a gaming state, there is a single bonus (SB) that allows you to play one game (JAC game) as a winning combination, and the single bonus winning (winning). ) may be provided.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that a CB win has not been established, this means that a bonus win flag other than CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether the first BB winning or the second BB winning has been achieved.

If any BB winning is achieved, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and the BB is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S611. flag is set. Thereafter, in step S612, the remaining payout number counter is set to 216, and the remaining payout number display section 61 is caused to display 216. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the upper limit number of payouts in the BB state, and the BB state is ended on the condition that medals equal to or greater than the numerical value have been paid out in the BB state.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding lottery table for the BB state is selected. .

FIG. 28 collectively shows the lottery table for the 1st BB state selected in the 1st BB state to which the transition occurs due to the 1st BB win, and the lottery table for the 2nd BB state selected in the 2nd BB state to which the transition occurs due to the 2nd BB win. . In the first BB state lottery table and the second BB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV of IV=1 to 14, 22 to 30, and 34 to 58. Therefore, in both the first BB state and the second BB state, winning is not possible when IV=1 to 14, 22 to 30, and 34 to 58. In addition, in the lottery table for the 1st BB state and the lottery table for the 2nd BB state, point values for IV=19 to 21, 31 to 33 are set as common point values in both lottery tables, and In either state, the probability of winning chance A with IV = 19 is approximately 1 in 65.5, and the probability of winning chance B with IV = 20 is approximately 1 in 65.5, and the probability of winning chance A with IV = 21 is approximately 1 in 65.5. The probability of winning the middle bell is approximately 1/1310, the probability of winning the first prize in a BB with IV = 31 is approximately 1/2.12, and the probability of winning the second prize in a BB with IV = 32 is approximately 1/2.12. The probability of winning the third prize in a BB with IV=33 is approximately 1/13.1.

On the other hand, in the lottery table for the 1st BB state and the lottery table for the 2nd BB state, different point values are set for IV = 15 to 18, and the probability of winning a strong cherry with IV = 15 is lower than that of the 1st BB state. It is about 1/21.8 in the second BB state, while it is about 1/93.6 in the second BB state, making it easier to win a strong cherry in the first BB state than in the second BB state. Also, the probability of winning a weak cherry with IV=16 is about 1/6.56 in the 1st BB state, while it is about 1/26.2 in the 2nd BB state. is more likely to win a weak cherry than in the 2nd BB state.

The probability of winning a strong watermelon with IV=17 is about 1 in 93.6 in the 1st BB state, while it is about 1 in 21.8 in the 2nd BB state. It is easier to win a strong watermelon than in a 1BB state. Also, the probability of winning a weak cherry with IV=18 is about 1/26.2 in the 1st BB state, while it is about 1/6.56 in the 2nd BB state. is more likely to win a weak watermelon than in the 1st BB state.

That is, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of winning a lottery result called a so-called rare combination such as strong cherry or strong watermelon is higher than in other states such as the normal gaming state and the first to third RT states. Also, when comparing the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, it is easier to win a strong cherry or a weak cherry in the 1st BB state than in the 2nd BB state, and it is easier to win a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon in the 2nd BB state than in the 1st BB state. It is set up to be easy.

In addition, for strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, weak watermelons, etc., winnings are established depending on the operating timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, and if they are operated at timings that do not correspond to winning, winnings will not be established and the winnings will be lost.

FIG. 27(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. As mentioned above, the first small winning combination is a winning mode that can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, if you win the 1st prize in BB, regardless of the operating order and timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, you will win either the 1st minor prize, the 39th minor prize, or the 40th minor prize. It will definitely come true. On the other hand, for the BB second role and the BB third role, the first minor role is associated with four of the six operation orders, and the second minor role is associated with two of the six operation orders. The 40th small role and the 41st small role are associated with each other. In other words, for the 2nd prize in the BB and the 3rd prize in the BB, if the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 matches the first minor prize, the first minor prize will be won, and the 40th minor prize will be won. If it matches the 41st minor role, the 40th minor role or the 41st minor role will be won instead of the 1st minor role. In the 3-bet game in the BB state, when the first minor role win or the 40th minor role win is established, nine medals are paid out, and when the 41st minor role win is established, three medals are paid out. In other words, if you win the first prize in the BB, the first minor prize will be won and nine medals will be paid out regardless of the order of operations, and if you win the second prize in the BB, depending on the order of operations. The first minor role winning or the 40th minor role winning is established and nine medals are paid out. If the third prize in BB is won, the first minor prize or the 41st minor prize will be established depending on the order of operations, and if the first minor prize is won, nine medals will be paid out. , If the 41st small role winning is established, three medals will be paid out. In other words, for the third combination in the BB, the number of medals paid out will differ depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated.

If a negative determination is made in step S609 and any BB winning is established, a process of setting a carryover command is performed in step S613. The carryover command is a command that is sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it aware that the bonus prize has not been won in the bonus winning game and a so-called carryover state has occurred, and the carryover command is executed by the timer interrupt processing. In the command output process (step S110), the command is output to the display control device 81.

As already explained, in games played in the carryover state, winning of other bonuses is restricted. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal gaming state (Fig. 17), if you win a combination of bonuses (1st BB, 2nd BB, CB) with IV = 34 to 51, etc., the winning combination will correspond to these bonuses. The winning flag is not set. Therefore, for example, if you win each of the minor roles from IV=34 to 51 or a combination that overlaps with a replay, the winning flags for each of these minor roles and replay will be set, but the winning flag corresponding to the bonus will be set. It is not set and only small winnings are valid. In other words, the carryover state can also be said to be a state in which bonus drawings are restricted.

When the gaming state shifts to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S614. In the end determination process, it is determined whether the value of the remaining payout number counter has become 0 or not, and when it has become 0, a process of clearing the CB setting flag or BB setting flag is performed. Furthermore, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, an end flag is set indicating that the BB state has ended in the current game. Note that the termination determination process will be described in detail later.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game returns to the gaming state when the CB winning was achieved. For example, if a CB winning is achieved under the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is returned to after the CB state ends, and if a CB winning is achieved under the 3rd RT state, the 3rd RT state is returned after the CB state ends. to return to. On the other hand, if the first BB or second BB is won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether or not the corresponding BB winning is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the first BB winning is achieved under the second RT state, the game will shift to the normal gaming state. In the case of transition to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals until the CB state ends. In the case of transition to the BB state, the player can expect to increase the number of medals by a maximum of 144 (=9×24−3×24) until the BB state ends.

As mentioned above, if you win a strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc. in the BB state, the winning may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, and if the winning is not achieved, the medals will not be paid out in the game. Does not occur. Furthermore, when winning the third winning combination in the BB, either 9 or 3 medals are paid out depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. In other words, if the upper limit number of payouts is set in the BB state (step S216) and 9 coins are paid out every game, an increase of up to 144 medals can be expected as described above, and the BB state will end after 24 games. However, depending on the lottery results of each game in the BB state and the timing and order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for that game, the number of additional medals when the maximum number of payouts is reached may be less than the maximum number mentioned above. However, it is set so that the number of games required to reach the maximum number of payouts can be large.

If none of the 1st BB winning flag, 2nd BB winning flag, or CB winning flag is set (if step S602 is NO), or the 1st BB winning flag, 2nd BB winning flag, or CB winning flag is not established and the winning is carried over. When a command is set (when the process in step S613 is executed), when a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout counter in steps S605 and S612, and when the end determination process is performed in step S614, In step S606, a status command is set. Here, the status command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the gaming status at the end of the game (that is, the gaming status of the next game), and in step S606, the status information storage area The state command corresponding to the configuration flag set in 106c is set. After setting the status command, in step S607, an external signal setting process is performed to set an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10. After that, this process ends.

<Overview of gaming state transitions and display modes>
Here, the transition of the gaming state will be explained using FIG. 29. Note that illustration of the CB state is omitted.

When the gaming state is the BB state, when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 216, the BB state ends and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state when the transition rolled number stops on the active line, and the gaming state shifts to the BB state when the BB winning is established. The transition roll will stop on the active line if a missed call occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the normal gaming state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are the trigger for transitioning to the second RT state, and the second promotion replays 1, 2, and 4 are triggers for transitioning to the third RT state. Since transition replays 1 and 2, which trigger the transition to the state, are not won, the normal gaming state does not transition to the second RT state to the fourth RT state (see FIG. 17).

When the gaming state is the first RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. The third replay win is achieved when you win any of the first promoted replays 1 to 4 and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 23(a)). . Further, when the gaming state is the first RT state, the gaming state shifts to the fourth RT state when the 11th re-gaming win or the 12th re-gaming winning is established. As already explained, the fourth RT state is a fixed RT state in which the number of games is fixed. Therefore, even if the number of transition rolls stops in the fourth RT state, the transition to the first RT state does not occur. In the lottery process using the first RT state lottery table, the second promoted replays 1 and 2, which trigger the transition to the third RT state, are not won, so the first RT state does not transition to the third RT state.

However, in this embodiment, in the first RT state, it is set not to win the transition replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the fourth RT state. Therefore, there is no transition from the first RT state to the fourth RT state. In this embodiment, the setting is such that the transition to the fourth RT state does not occur not only from the first RT state but also from other gaming states. The fourth RT state will be described in detail when describing an embodiment in which the fourth RT state is set to enable its transition.

If the corresponding BB winning flag is not achieved in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state and each BB winning flag is set. If the corresponding BB winning is achieved in the game played, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state when the fourth re-gaming win or the fifth re-gaming winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game winning is established and when the transferred number stops on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. The fourth replay win and the fifth replay win are achieved when you win the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in a predetermined order of operations (Fig. 23(b) )reference). The second re-game winning is achieved when one of the falling replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll will stop on the active line if a missed call occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not achieved in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is set. When a corresponding BB prize is established in a game in which is set, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

When the gaming state is the third RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game winning is established and when the transferred number stops on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. The third replay win is achieved when the player wins BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 and operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 23(c)). The second re-game winning is achieved when one of the falling replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll will stop on the active line if a missed call occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not achieved in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB winning is achieved in the set game, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

In this slot machine 10, the main controller 101 manages six types of gaming states: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a fourth RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. The main controller 101 manages five types of display modes: mode, AT mode (assist time mode), VB mode (virtual bonus mode, pseudo bonus mode), and BB mode.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing transitions between display modes.

The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB win or the second BB win is established and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of up to 144 medals.

When transitioning from the normal mode to the BB mode, a lottery for transition to the AT mode may be held in the BB mode. If the lottery to shift to AT mode is won, the mode shifts to AT mode after the BB mode ends. If the lottery for shifting to AT mode is not won, the mode shifts to normal mode after the BB mode ends. When transitioning from AT mode to BB mode, the AT mode is returned to after the BB mode ends. When the VB mode is changed to the BB mode, the VB mode is returned to after the BB mode ends.

Normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2. Transition Replay 1, Transition Replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "press order replay") This is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery for transition to the AT mode is held. If the lottery for shifting to AT mode is won, the mode shifts from normal mode to AT mode. There is no transition to VB mode from normal mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each gaming state of a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a fourth RT state, and a CB state. However, in the normal mode, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won or when the push order replay is won, so it is rare for the stop switches 42 to 44 to shift to the 2nd RT state to the 4th RT state. This almost corresponds to the normal gaming state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state, the 1st RT state, or the 4th RT state, you can expect that the medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time you play one game. In the case of the second to third RT states, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The AT mode is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. The AT mode has different probabilities of transition to the VB mode. 1 mode ~ LV. It is composed of four AT modes, and in any of the AT modes, the probability of transition to the VB mode is higher than in the normal mode. If the lottery for shifting to VB mode is won, the mode shifts from AT mode to VB mode. Transition to VB mode If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, etc.) without winning the lottery, the AT mode is shifted to the normal mode.

LV. 1 mode ~ LV. The four modes are set to have different probabilities of winning the lottery for switching to the VB mode. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for switching to VB mode is LV. 4 mode is the highest, LV. 1 mode is set to be the lowest, and LV. 1 mode, LV. 2 modes, LV. 3 modes, LV. The setting is such that the probability of winning the lottery for switching to the VB mode increases in the order of the four modes.

The AT mode corresponds to each gaming state: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a fourth RT state, and a CB state. However, in the AT mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, so the player can press the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified order of operation. 44 corresponds to the second RT state and the third RT state. In AT mode, if the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state, 1st RT state, or 4th RT state, you can expect that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 each time you play one game. In the case of the second RT state or the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the AT mode continues for at least 50 games after the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when shifting to the AT mode.

The VB mode, like the AT mode, is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. The difference between VB mode and AT mode is that when you win 2nd promotion replay 1 or 2nd promotion replay 2, in AT mode you will be notified of the order of operations to make the 1st replay win. , in the VB mode, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game win or the fifth re-game win is notified (see FIG. 23(b)).

The VB mode corresponds to each gaming state: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a fourth RT state, and a CB state. However, in the VB mode, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. Therefore, the VB mode corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order. In VB mode, if the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state, the 1st RT state, or the 4th RT state, you can expect the medals to increase by about 0.61 each time you play one game. In the case of the second RT state or the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the VB mode continues for at least 25 games after the gaming state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when shifting to the VB mode.

To explain the transition of the display mode when the number of medals owned by a player increases, the general flow is to transition from the normal mode to the AT mode, and then return from the AT mode to the normal mode. In addition, in AT mode, a lottery is held to transition to VB mode, so if a loop occurs in which the transition from AT mode to VB mode and from VB mode returns to AT mode, players expect to increase the number of medals they own. can.

Also, in AT mode, LV. 1 mode ~ LV. Four modes are set, and in each AT mode, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode is different. When transitioning from normal mode to AT mode, basically LV. Shift to 1 mode. LV. In 1 mode, a lottery for transition to VB mode is held, and LV. A lottery will be held to select the mode 2. LV. If you win the lottery to switch to 2 mode, you will receive LV. 2 mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to VB mode increases. LV. 2 mode, a lottery for transition to VB mode is held, and LV. A lottery will be held to switch to 3 modes. LV. If you win the lottery to switch to 3 modes, you will receive LV. 3 mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to VB mode increases. And LV. 3 mode, a lottery to transition to VB mode is held, and LV. A lottery will be held to switch to 4 modes. ATLV. If you win the lottery to switch to 4 mode, you will receive LV. 4 mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to VB mode increases.

Therefore, when shifting to AT mode, LV. 1 mode → LV. 2 modes → LV. 3 modes → LV. By promoting the 4 mode and the AT mode, the probability of transition to the VB mode increases, and a loop between the AT mode and the VB mode becomes more likely to occur.

As described above, the present slot machine 10 is configured so that the player can increase the number of medals he owns in each display mode of AT mode, VB mode, and BB mode. In conjunction with each display mode, the configuration is such that a plurality of states such as a plurality of RT states, a BB state, and a CB state change back and forth depending on the winning of each re-game or the stoppage of a transition roll. As described above, depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or the push order bell is won, the corresponding replay win is established or the transition roll is stopped. In addition, in the AT mode and the VB mode, when the push order bell is won, the order of operations that will make it possible to achieve the first minor win is announced, so it can be expected that the number of owned medals will increase.

Here, when the display mode is AT mode and VB mode, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced when the press order bell or press order replay is won as described above, and when the display mode is the normal mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified. There is no notification of the order of operations when winning the order bell or press order replay. Therefore, the AT mode and the VB mode are more advantageous for the player than the normal mode in terms of the presence or absence of notification of the push order bell and the operation order when winning the push order replay. In other words, the AT mode and the VB mode are included in the advantageous section, which is a section in which the winning rate of minor prizes, etc. is changed by notifying the order of operations, and the game can be played in an advantageous situation for the player. . This slot machine 10 is configured so that a transition to the AT mode is performed by a transition to an advantageous section, and a transition to the AT mode or VB mode can occur.In other words, a normal section that is not an advantageous section The configuration is such that a transition to AT mode or VB mode does not occur during this time.

In addition, while a lottery to switch to AT mode is held in an advantageous section, a lottery to switch to AT mode is not held in a normal section. The state and the state before winning the AT mode can also be referred to as a chance zone mode (CZ mode) as a state in which transition to the AT mode is likely to occur.

The configuration regarding the display mode will be explained below.

The configuration related to the display mode can be roughly divided into: (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) based on the winning result. and (4) processing related to notification effects on the sub side. Below, they will be explained in order.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Lottery result handling process>
The process (1) related to the display mode transition lottery is performed in the lottery result corresponding process (step S312) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main controller 101. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31.

In step S701, random number shift processing is performed. This process is a process for random numbers used in AT mode lottery, and will be explained in detail later.

In the following step S702, it is determined whether or not the current game is in an advantageous section by determining whether an advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The advantageous section flag is a flag that is set based on winning the lottery for shifting to an advantageous section including the AT mode or VB mode, and is cleared when the advantageous section ends. If the advantageous section flag is not set, the process advances to step S703, where the advantageous section transfer lottery process is executed, and then the main lottery result corresponding process is ended.

In the advantageous section shift lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32, first, in step S801, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S802, an advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 39, the advantageous section transfer lottery table is set so that the transfer rate to the advantageous section (probability of winning the advantageous section transfer lottery) differs depending on the lottery result of each game. As shown in Fig. 38, the triggers for the lottery to move to the advantageous section are set as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, and middle bell (hereinafter, these are referred to as (collectively referred to as ``transition triggers''). These transition triggers have the same set point value PV regardless of the set value, and there is no difference in the setting of the probability of winning. The probability of winning the advantageous section transition lottery is also set so that there is no difference in settings. In other words, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed with no difference in winning probability using transition triggers that have a common appearance rate, and the transition rate to the advantageous section is the same. By doing this, regardless of the setting values of multiple gaming machines that may be installed in a gaming hall, the chances of moving to an advantageous section will be the same, making it possible to eliminate inequality among players. Become.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S802, a process of acquiring random numbers for advantageous section shift lottery is executed in step S803. As the random number for advantageous section transition lottery, dedicated counters in various counter areas 106e are used, and the dedicated counters are updated at a predetermined period, and in step S803, the latest updated value of the counters is acquired. Then, in step S804, an advantageous section transition lottery is executed, and in step S805, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery has been won. If the transition lottery has not been won, the main lottery process is directly ended. If the transition lottery has been won, in step S806, processing for setting the above-mentioned advantageous section flag is executed. This process makes it possible to make an affirmative determination in step S702 of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31) for the next game and subsequent games. In the subsequent step S807, processing is executed to set an advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage areas 106d. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section has been won in the current game. After executing the process of step S807, the main advantageous section transition lottery process is ended.

In the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S702 that the advantageous section flag is set, that is, if the lottery for moving to the advantageous section has been won before the previous game, the process advances to step S704. In step S704, it is determined whether either the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The AT mode winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify that the player has won the AT mode transition lottery, and is set when the AT mode transition lottery is won. This is a flag that is cleared when The AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is AT mode, and is set when transitioning to AT mode, and when AT mode finally ends (from AT mode to VB mode or This is a flag that is cleared (except when transitioning to the specialized zone or BB mode). If a negative determination is made in step S704, a first specific combination process is executed in step S705.

<First specific combination processing>
The first specific combination processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33.

In the first specific combination processing, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to transition the display mode to the AT mode. That is, in step S901, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S902, the AT mode transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. In the AT mode transition lottery table, the probability of transition to AT mode is set depending on the type of lottery result (winning combination).

Specifically, in the mode lottery tables in the advantageous sections stored in the various table storage areas 105a, the probability of winning each mode transition lottery is determined depending on the current display mode and the type of game result that triggers the lottery. are configured differently.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, in addition to the above-mentioned transition trigger, normal replay, push order replay, and push order bell are set as the game results that trigger the mode shift lottery during the advantageous section. There is. In other words, the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is set so that there is no difference in the transition rate depending on the set value, and the lottery for transition is performed based on the game results called so-called rare hands with a particularly low probability of winning. In addition to these rare combinations, there are also lottery chances to enter the AT mode, etc. included in the advantageous section, increasing expectations for each game. In the following explanation, these normal replays, push order replays, push order bells, and transition trigger combinations are collectively referred to as "specific combinations" as the triggers for the lottery regarding the instruction function during the advantageous section.

In the AT mode transition lottery table, the probability of winning the transition lottery is set according to the type of specific combination. As shown in Figure 39, for example, if the specific combination is a strong cherry, there is a probability of about 51% to win the lottery to switch to AT mode, while if the specific combination is a weak cherry, there is a probability of about 15%. It is set such that the lower the winning probability (appearance rate) in each game is, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery.

After acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table in step S902, a process of acquiring a random number for AT mode transition lottery is executed in step S903. In step S903, a random number for the AT mode transition lottery is acquired from the lottery information storage area 106f of the RAM 106. The configuration of the lottery information storage area 106f and the process for storing random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery in the area 106f will be described in detail later, but in step S903, the random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery are acquired. The process is different from the configuration in which the latest counter value is obtained at the time of the lottery, as in other lotteries (for example, advantageous section transfer lottery).

Then, in step S904, an AT mode transition lottery is executed, and in step S905, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition lottery has been won. If the AT mode transition lottery is won, in step S906, a process is executed to set an AT mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d. By setting the AT mode winning flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S704 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). In the following step S907, it is determined whether the AT mode won this time is the SAT mode. The SAT mode is an AT mode that starts after passing through the additional specialization zone. For example, if the initial number of games in normal AT mode is 50, then in SAT mode, AT mode will start with the number of games added by adding the number of games added in the special special zone to the initial number of games of 50. . Therefore, the normal AT mode and the SAT mode have different advantages for the player, and the SAT mode is more advantageous for the player than the AT mode.

The lottery for transition to SAT mode is carried out when the lottery for transition to AT mode is won (if the lottery is won in the lottery process in step S904), and this lottery for transition is set depending on the transition trigger and the type of display mode. This is done based on the transition lottery table for SAT mode. As shown in Figure 39, the transition lottery table for SAT mode shows that the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to AT mode using a strong watermelon as an opportunity is approximately 51%, and the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to AT mode is approximately 5%. Win SAT mode.

If it is determined in step S907 that the SAT mode has been won, a process of setting a specialized zone winning flag is executed in step S908. If a negative determination is made in step S907, or after executing the process in step S908, the process advances to step S906. The processing from step S909 to step S912 is processing for setting the precursor mode.

The omen mode is a mode in which a win-suggesting effect that suggests that the player has won the AT mode, etc. is more likely to occur, and after each game in the omen mode is played, the winning notification that the player has won the AT mode, etc. is announced. . The omen mode continues from 0 games to 32 games, and the number of consecutive games of the omen mode is set to vary depending on the type of AT mode etc. won and whether or not the bonus is won at the same time. In addition, if AT mode, etc. is won at the same time as a bonus, the winning notification for the bonus will be made after passing through the precursor mode, and the notification that the winning for AT mode, etc. will be made after the bonus state ends. It will be done. Further, when the number of portent games is set as 0 games, the winning notification will be performed without going through the portent mode.

Specifically, in step S909, first, a process of acquiring a precursor game number table from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 is performed. As shown in FIG. 40, in the precursor game number table, the number of precursor games to be selected is set to vary depending on the winning display mode. Specifically, for example, when winning AT mode, 0 games are selected at 30%, 1 to 5 games are selected at 60%, 6 to 10 games are selected at 10%, while SAT When winning the mode, 0 games are selected at 10%, 1 to 5 games are selected at 70%, 6 to 10 games are selected at 10%, and 11 to 20 games are selected at 10%. The setting is such that the number of precursory games is likely to increase when the player wins the SAT mode, which is advantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, simultaneous winning of bonus and AT mode etc. is not stipulated, but in a configuration where simultaneous winning occurs, the number of precursor games may be varied depending on whether simultaneous winning occurs. Furthermore, the number of portent games may be varied depending on the game result that triggered the winning.

In step S910, the number of games in the current portent mode is drawn by lottery based on the table of number of portent games obtained in step S909 and the lottery counters obtained from various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The counter for the lottery for the number of portent games is also updated at a predetermined period, similar to the random number (counter) for the advantageous section transition lottery, and the latest updated value of the counter is updated at the time of the lottery in step S910. It will be acquired and used in the lottery. In addition, in the following explanation, random numbers (counters) for lottery used in other lotteries (for example, VB mode transition lottery, AT mode additional lottery, additional game number lottery, specialized zone transition lottery, etc.) will also be explained in particular. Unless otherwise specified, the configuration is the same as the random number (counter) for the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery, and the latest updated value is acquired at the time of the lottery.

Then, in step S911, processing is performed to input the number of precursor games into the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The omen counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game, and when the omen counter becomes 0, the omen mode ends and a winning notification is made that the player has won the transition lottery such as AT mode.

In step S912, processing is executed to set the precursor command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a sub-side control device. The omen command includes information on the lottery result that triggered the omen mode and the number of omen games. Processing on the display control device 81 side based on reception of the precursor command will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S912, the first specific combination process ends.

If it is determined in step S905 that the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has not been won, the first specific combination processing is directly ended.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if an affirmative determination is made in step S704, the process advances to step S706. In step S706, it is determined whether either the VB mode winning flag or the VB mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning the VB mode transition lottery, and is cleared when transitioning to the VB mode. The VB mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the VB mode, and is set when transitioning to the VB mode and cleared when the VB mode ends. If a negative determination is made in step S706, a second specific combination process is executed in step S707. Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S706, a third specific combination process is executed in step S708.

<Second specific combination processing>
The second specific combination processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

In the second specific combination processing, an AT mode additional lottery is performed, and a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift the display mode to the VB mode or an additional specialized zone. Note that "addition" refers to adding (increasing) the number of continued games (remaining number) in AT mode, etc., and the number of additional games corresponds to the value to be added (value to be increased) to the number of continued games. . Further, the special add-on zone indicates a state in which an add-on for the number of consecutive games in AT mode occurs with a high probability over a plurality of games. In addition, in the second specific combination processing, a lottery is carried out to promote the level of the AT mode, and processing for adding up the number of consecutive games in the AT mode is carried out.

That is, in step S1001, processing is performed to determine the level of the AT mode. As already explained, in this embodiment, LV. 1 mode ~ LV. There are four AT mode levels, and each level has a different probability of transitioning to the VB mode. Therefore, in step S1001, the current AT mode level is LV. 1 mode ~ LV. It is determined which of the four modes it is in.

In step S1002, a VB mode lottery table corresponding to the AT mode level determined in step S1001 is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set depending on the type of game result that triggers the lottery. As shown in FIG. 39, for example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. In addition, in the VB mode lottery table for each level, the probability of transition to VB mode is different overall, and the LV. LV. than the one mode one. LV.2 mode has a higher probability of transitioning to VB mode. LV. than the 2 mode one. LV.3 mode has a higher probability of transitioning to VB mode. LV. than the 3 mode one. The setting is such that the probability of transition to the VB mode is higher for the 4-mode one.

In step S1003, a VB mode transition lottery is performed using the table acquired in step S1002 and the random numbers (counters) for lottery acquired from various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Then, in step S1004, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S1003 corresponds to a VB mode win. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, a process is performed in which a VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 in step S1005. Thereafter, in steps S1006 to S1009, processing for setting the number of precursor games is performed. That is, in step S1006, the table for the number of portent games is obtained, in step S1007, the number of portent games is drawn, in step S1008, the number of portent games is set, and in step S1009, the portent command is set, and then the second specification is performed. Finish the role processing.

If it is determined in step S1004 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not a VB mode winning, the process advances to step S1010. Steps S1010 to S1013 are processes for promoting the AT mode level.

In step S1010, AT mode promotion lottery processing is performed. In this process, tables for promotion lottery are acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and random numbers (counters) for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. There are multiple tables for promotion lottery depending on the level of AT mode, specifically LV. 1 mode table, LV. Table for 2 modes, LV. There are tables for 3 modes, and a total of 3 tables (promotion lottery will not be held when staying in LV.4 mode). At each table, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set depending on the type of game result that triggers the lottery. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set higher for the strong cherry than for the weak cherry. In addition, in the table for each AT mode, LV. LV. than the table for 1 mode. The LV.2 mode table has a lower promotion probability. LV. than the 2 mode table. The table for 3 modes is set so that the probability of promotion is lower, and as the level of AT mode is promoted, it is set so that it becomes difficult to be promoted to the next level.

In step S1011, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S1010 is a promotion win. If the promotion is successful, AT mode promotion processing is performed in step S1012. In this process, the level flags provided in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 are rewritten from the level flags corresponding to the current AT mode level to the level flags one level higher. Thereafter, in step S1013, processing is performed to set the promotion command as an output target to the display control device 81. The promotion command includes information on the AT mode of the promotion destination. The display control device 81 that has received the promotion command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like to perform the AT mode presentation of the level to which the promotion destination is to be promoted. As an effect for the AT mode on the auxiliary display section 65, for example, a different background color effect is set depending on the level of the AT mode, and the display control device 81, when receiving the above promotion command, displays an effect for the AT mode. Notification is made that the level has been promoted, and control is performed so that an AT mode presentation is performed with a background color corresponding to the level to which the level has been promoted.

If it is determined in step S1011 that the player has not won the promotion lottery, or after the process in step S1013 is executed, processes for increasing the number of consecutive games in the AT mode are performed in steps S1014 to S1021.

That is, in step S1014, an additional lottery process for the number of AT mode games is performed. In this additional lottery process, tables for the AT mode additional lottery are acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and random numbers (counters) for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. As shown in FIG. 41, the AT mode supplementary lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the supplementary lottery differs depending on the type of lottery result.

Here, in the present embodiment, the AT mode game number addition lottery is set so that a specific winning combination including a push order bell, push order replay, and normal replay is used as a trigger for the transition. As shown in Figure 41, among the specific combinations, the push order bell, push order replay (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order combination"), and normal replay are different from the transition trigger role in the AT mode game. The probability of winning in the number addition lottery is set low. Therefore, the number of games in the AT mode can be expected to be increased more when a shift trigger role appears than when a push order role or normal replay appears as a lottery result of each game. In this case, it is thought that the player will proceed with the game while expecting to win the transition trigger combination based on this premise. On the other hand, the push order winning combination and normal replay have a higher winning probability in each game than the transition trigger winning combination, and can be said to be game results that are relatively likely to appear. With such a combination of winnings, it is possible to reduce the presence of the push order winnings and normal replays as bonus triggering roles, and to increase the surprise when a bonus occurs. Moreover, the opportunities for additions based on these push order and normal replays are to the extent that they can realistically occur during AT mode (more specifically, if you play the initial number of 50 games 2 to 3 times, you will only get one chance is the occurrence rate that is expected to occur). Therefore, it is possible to suitably generate unexpected additions such as the above-mentioned additions triggered by the push order or normal replay.

In the following step S1015, it is determined whether or not the player has won the additional lottery. If it is determined that the bonus lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1016 whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1017, and lottery processing for the number of additional games in AT mode is performed. In this lottery process for the number of additional games, a table for the AT mode lottery for the number of additional games is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and random numbers (counters) for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The AT mode extra game number lottery table is set so that the number of extra games varies depending on the type of specific combination, as shown in FIG. For example, in Strong Cherry, 20 to 200 games are added to the AT mode, and the average number of added games is 30 games. In addition, for weak cherry, 5 to 300 games are added, and the average number of additional games is 20 games, and although there are cases where a larger number of games is selected for weak cherry than for strong cherry, The average value is set so that strong cherries play more games.

In step S1018, processing for adding the number of games in AT mode is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn in step S1017 is set in a counter that manages the number of continuous AT mode games (more specifically, an AT mode continuous counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106). Performs addition processing. In the following step S1019, an additional notification process is performed to notify that the additional lottery has been won and the number of games played.

<Additional notification processing>
Here, in this slot machine 10, a plurality of modes of additional notification are set when an additional number of consecutive games in the AT mode occurs. More specifically, there are multiple modes of additional notification that differ in the game in which the additional notification is performed, and the additional notification may be performed in the game in which the additional notification occurs or in a series of games triggered by the game in which the additional notification occurs. (In the following explanation, it is also referred to as "immediate addition notification"), and when the notification game is determined after the fact in a game that is later than the game in which the addition occurred (in the following explanation, it is called "immediate addition notification"). (also referred to as "post-load notification") is set.

In immediate payoff notification, a series of games triggered by a game in which a payout occurred refers to, for example, a case in which a precursor mode or a continuous performance occurs triggered by a game in which a payout occurs, and A game that can be continued over a plurality of games starting from the game in which the add-on occurs is referred to as a series of games. The series of games includes cases in which consecutive effects do not occur; for example, in a game in which an additional effect occurs, the corresponding effect does not occur, and an additional notification occurs in the next game or after multiple games. The game in which the add-on occurs and the game until the add-on notification occurs are considered to be a series of games, and the mode of such add-on notification is also included in the immediate add-on notification.

On the other hand, in post-addition notification, the notification game that is determined after the fact is a game that is later than the game in which the add-on has occurred, and is not determined in the game in which the add-on has occurred, but, for example, when the AT mode is about to end. This differs from the series of games in the instant ride notification described above in that the notification timing is determined after the fact as the AT mode progresses, such as a game. In other words, the above-mentioned notification game can be said to be a game that is set without being triggered by the game in which the add-on has occurred.

Regarding the immediate boarding notification and the later boarding notification, an overview of the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 will be explained with reference to FIG.

As mentioned above, immediate play notification is to notify a part of the number of remaining games (number of remaining games in advantageous section ZG) in AT mode, etc., and post-board notification is to notify the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. The number will be announced later. If the number of games to be notified first is the display remaining counter HG, and the number of games to be notified later is the deferred counter BG, then the number of remaining games in AT mode etc. (number of remaining games in advantageous section ZG) is: It is equal to the total value of the display remaining number counter HG and the post-loading counter BG. The display remaining number counter HG is decremented by 1 each time the game is played, and the post-addition counter BG is not decremented even after the game is completed unless a post-payment notification occurs.

As shown in FIG. 42, in this embodiment, while the AT mode is being used, the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 (remaining number of games display ZGP) is a predetermined number (1). When this happens, that is, when the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number (1), a post-load notification is generated. In the post-addition notification, it is reported that the number of games (150 in the figure) corresponding to the post-payment counter BG has been added. In this case, the post-addition counter BG is subtracted by the notification amount (in the figure, it becomes 0), and the display remaining number counter HG is updated by adding the notification amount due to the post-addition notification, and the remaining game on the auxiliary display section 65 is The number display ZGP also has a value corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG (in the figure, 150 after one game is played).

In this way, in the case of an additional win, if the additional notification is selected, there may be a difference between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (number of remaining games in advantageous section ZG). On the other hand, when the immediate ride notification is selected, there is no difference between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (number of remaining games in advantageous section ZG). In this slot machine 10, the post-pay counter BG is referred to when winning an additional bid, and depending on the current value of the post-pay counter BG, whether post-pay notification or immediate pay notification is selected differs.

In the process for additional notification in step S1019 described above, the game for which additional notification is to be performed is set, and when additional notification is performed in the game, the execution timing of the additional notification is set. That is, as shown in FIG. 35, first, in step S1101, processing is performed to grasp the post-load counter BG of the various counter areas 106e. In the following step S1102, a notification game lottery process is executed. The notification game lottery process is a lottery process that determines whether the current additional notification will be a later notification or an immediate notification. In the notification game lottery process, a postcard lottery table is obtained from the various table storage areas 105a, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to post a postpay notification according to the value of the postpay counter BG grasped in step S1101.

As shown in FIG. 43, the deferred entry lottery table is set so that the probability that the deferred entry notification will be selected differs depending on the value of the deferred entry counter BG and the type of the specific combination that triggered the additional winning. There is. For example, when adding a strong cherry as a trigger, if the post-add counter BG is less than 30, post-add notification is selected at 20% (immediate add-on notification is selected at 80%); When the load counter BG is 30 or more and less than 100, the rear load notification is selected at 10%, and when the rear load counter BG is 100 or more, the rear load notification is selected at 5%, so that the value of the rear load counter BG is large. The selection rate for later notification is set to be lower as the time increases.

In addition, the types of specific winning combinations that triggered additional winnings were different from the so-called rare winning combinations (low-probability trigger results, low-probability results) that had relatively low winning probabilities, such as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon. The so-called normal combinations (high probability trigger results, high probability results) with a relatively high winning probability, such as push order replay and various push order bells, will have a higher pick-up selection rate when the pick-up counter BG value is small. It is set. More specifically, in the notification game lottery process triggered by various push order replays or various push order bells, in a situation where the follow-up counter BG is less than 30, the follow-up notification is selected with a 100% probability.

As described above, after the remaining display counter HG reaches a predetermined number, additional notification is performed, and the additional notification is subtracted from the post-addition counter BG. Therefore, basically, as the AT mode game progresses, the value of the post-play counter BG often increases, and conversely, at the beginning of the AT mode game, the value of the post-play counter BG is 0 or It is likely to be a small value.

In other words, if you win an additional win in the early stages of a game in AT mode, there is a high probability that the post-address notification will be selected, especially if you win an additional prize as a result of a normal role that is not a rare role, such as push order replay or push order bell. In the early stages of the AT mode, later notification is always selected. As a result, after the start of the AT mode, the post-load counter BG tends to accumulate relatively quickly.

After executing the notification game lottery process in step S1102, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not a later winning prize has been won. If there is no later winning game and the immediate winning notification is selected, in step S1104, the current additional winning game is added to the display remaining number counter HG provided in the various counter areas 106e. Then, in step S1105, a notification timing setting process is executed to set at which timing additional notification is to be performed in the current game. The notification timing setting process is a process of setting at which timing in the current game additional notification will be made.

In one game, the execution timing of the additional notification is set to differ depending on the number of additional games. Specifically, as shown in the execution timing table of FIG. 44, as the execution timing of the additional notification in this game, the first reel, second reel, and third reel are stopped in the order of the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this case, the settings are set for the first reel stop operation, the second reel stop operation, and the third reel stop operation. Then, among the stop operations for each reel, the timing at which the stop ON operation was performed when the stop switches 42 to 44 were pressed, and the timing at which the stop OFF operation was performed when the pressing operation was completed, is set.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44. The stop switches 42 to 44 are movable from an initial position located at the frontmost side to an operating position located at the rearmost side. When placed at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in a LOW state, and by being operated from the initial position to the operating position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a change. Switches from LOW signal to HI signal. Then, the main controller 101 determines that a stop ON operation has been performed, which means that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been pressed, based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal.

Further, the stop switches 42 to 44 are biased toward the initial position by springs or the like. Therefore, if you release your hands from the stop switches 42 to 44 and do not apply the operating force (pressing force) that pushed them toward the operating position, the stop switches 42 to 44 will be moved to the initial position by the urging force of the spring or the like. to return to. In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from HI signals to LOW signals. Then, the main controller 101 determines that a stop OFF operation has been performed, which indicates that the pressing operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been completed, based on the detection signal switching from the HI signal to the LOW signal.

The additional notification is set so that it can be generated either when the stop switches 42 to 44 are turned on or turned off. That is, in a game where an additional notification occurs, the additional effect may occur not only at the timing when the stop switch 42 to 44 is pressed, but also at the timing when the pressing operation ends.

In the top-up notification execution timing table, when the number of top-up games is relatively small, for example, 5 to 10 games, the timing when the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%. , the timing when the first reel's stop OFF operation was performed is 10%, the second reel's stop ON operation is 15%, the second reel's stop OFF operation is 20%, the third reel's stop ON operation is 20%, The third reel stop OFF operation (when all reels are stopped) is selected at 30%. In this case, the stop OFF operation of each reel is easier to select than the stop ON operation, and the rear side operation is also easier to select.

On the other hand, if the number of games with a relatively large number of add-on games is 100 or more games, the timing at which the first reel stop ON operation is performed is selected at 5%, and the first reel stop OFF operation is selected. The timing at which was performed is 10%, the second reel stop ON operation is 5%, the second reel stop OFF operation is 30%, the third reel stop ON operation is 5%, the third reel stop OFF operation ( (when all reels are stopped) is 45%, and each is selected. In this case as well, the stop OFF operation of each reel is easier to select than the stop ON operation, and the rear side operation is relatively easier to select.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the setting is such that the additional notification is more likely to occur when each reel is stopped when the reel is turned OFF than when the reel is turned OFF. In addition, when comparing the first to third reels, the stop operation of the third reel (ON operation, OFF operation) is the most likely to be selected, the second reel is the second most likely to be selected, and the stop operation of the first reel is the most likely to be selected. It is set so that it is least likely to be selected during operation.

In terms of the relationship with the number of add-on games, the larger the number of add-on games, the easier it is to select the timing of the third reel stop OFF operation. In other words, if the player is aware in advance that an additional notification will occur, if the additional notification does not occur by the time the third reel is turned ON, the player will be very concerned about the occurrence of a large number of additional games. It is considered that the player executes the third reel stop OFF operation while expecting it.

In step S1105, the additional notification execution timing for the current game is set based on the additional notification execution timing table. Thereafter, the main additional notification process is ended. In this case, the information that the current add-on will be notified in the current game as an immediate add-on notification, and the information regarding the execution timing of the add-on notification in the current game, will be executed following the main add-on notification process. In the additional command setting process (step S1020), it is set as an additional command. The display control device 81 that has received the additional command including this information sets the additional notification effect based on this information. This process will be explained later.

If it is determined in step S1103 that the player has won the later ticket lottery, the process advances to step S1106. In step S1106, a process of adding the current number of add-on games to the add-on counter BG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S1107, a process of setting a post-add flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed, and then the main post-add notification process is ended.

The rear-loading flag is used by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 to indicate that the rear-loading notification should be performed when the value of the rear-loading counter BG is larger than 0 and the remaining display counter HG reaches a predetermined value. This is a flag for understanding. Furthermore, in this case, in the additional command setting process that is executed following the main additional notification process, information that the additional notification will not occur in the current game is set in the additional command. The display control device 81 that has received the additional command including this information performs control so that no additional notification occurs in the current game.

Returning to the explanation of the second specific winning combination process (FIG. 34), after executing the add-on notification process in step S1019, the add-on command including the processing result of the add-on notification process is sent to the display control device 81 in step S1020. After performing the process of setting it as an output target, the second specific combination process ends. The top-up command includes information that the top-up has occurred, the number of top-up games, and the target for top-up.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S1016, the process advances to step S1021. In step S1021, the AT mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second specific combination processing is ended. The AT mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the conditions for adding the number of AT mode games are met. Although the details will be described later, if the bonus ends in a situation where the AT mode add-on flag is set, the AT mode add-on will be performed at the end of the bonus. In other words, the game in which the additional notification is given is set to differ depending on whether or not the bonus is won at the same time.

If it is determined in step S1015 that the player has not won the additional lottery, the process advances to step S1022. In step S1022, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. That is, in the case where a specific combination is won during the AT mode, if the lottery for transition to the VB mode or the lottery for increasing the number of games in the AT mode is not won, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is performed. In the specialized zone lottery process, a table for the specialized zone shift lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a random number (counter) for the lottery determines whether or not to shift the display mode to the specialized zone. A lottery will be held. As shown in FIG. 39, the specialized zone transition lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the transition lottery differs depending on the type of specific combination. For example, in a specialization zone transition lottery based on strong cherries, there is a probability of winning about 5%, and in a specialization zone transition lottery based on weak cherries, there is a probability of winning about 0.8%. On the other hand, in the specialization zone transition lottery based on strong watermelons, there is a probability of about 2% to win, and in the specialization zone transition lottery based on weak watermelons, the probability is about 0.8%.

In step S1023, based on the processing result of step S1022, it is determined whether or not the lottery for moving to the specialized zone has been won. If the player has won, in step S1024, a special zone winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. Then, in step S1025, a process for acquiring a portent game number table is performed, in step S1026, a lottery process for the number of portent games is performed, in step S1027, a process for setting the number of portent games is performed, and in step S1028, a portent command command is performed. After performing the process of setting , the second specific combination process ends. The processing from step S1025 to step S1028 is, for example, similar to the processing from step S1006 to step S1009, and is processing for setting the precursor mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S1023, and the lottery for transition to VB mode, the lottery for adding the number of games in AT mode, and the lottery for transition to specialized zone are not won, then in step S1029, for pseudo additional notification. After performing the process, the second specific combination process is ended. The pseudo additional notification process is a process for sustaining expectations by generating a performance similar to when winning the lottery even if the lottery does not win.

<Third specific combination processing>
Next, the third specific combination processing executed in step S708 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36.

In the third specific combination processing, processing for increasing the number of consecutive games in the AT mode and a transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to a specialized zone are performed. That is, in step S1201, an AT mode game number addition lottery process is performed. This process is similar to the process in step S1014. Note that the probability of winning the additional lottery may be different between the lottery process in step S1014 and the lottery process in step S1201.

In step S1202, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S1201 is an additional winning result. If it is determined that the bonus lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1204, and lottery processing for the number of additional games in AT mode is performed. Then, in step S1205, processing for adding the number of games in AT mode is performed, processing for adding notification is performed in step S1206, and processing for setting the additional command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S1207. , this third specific combination processing ends. The processing from step S1203 to step S1207 is similar to the processing from step S1016 to step S1020. Note that the number of additional games may be different between the lottery process in step S1016 and the lottery process in step S1204.

If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the process advances to step S1209. In step S1209, a lottery for moving to the specialized zone is executed. That is, even if a specific winning combination is won during the VB mode, but the game number addition lottery in the AT mode is not won, a lottery for shifting to the specialized zone is performed. The specialized zone lottery process is similar to the process in step S1022 described above, and is performed based on the specialized zone transfer lottery table (FIG. 39). The processing from step S1210 to step S1216 is similar to the processing from step S1023 to step S1029 described above. Further, if it is determined in step S1203 that the bonus winning flag is set, the AT mode add-on flag is set in step S1207, and then the third specific combination processing is ended. The AT mode additional flag is as described above.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). After executing any of the processes in step S705, step S707, and step S708, in step S709, it is determined whether the result of the current lottery process is a press order replay or a press order winning combination of the press order bell. . If the winning winning combination is determined by pressing the winning combination, the pressing winning combination process is executed in step S710. This push order processing will be explained in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S709, or after executing the process in step S710, the process advances to step S711. In step S711, it is determined whether a specialized zone flag corresponding to the additional specialized zone is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. As mentioned above, after the specialized zone winning flag is set based on winning the lottery for transition to SAT mode or the lottery for transition to specialized zone, the transition to the specialized zone occurs. This is a flag that is set when the seventh re-game winning is established. If the specialized zone flag is set in step S711, specialized zone processing is executed in step S712. If a negative determination is made in step S711, or after executing the process in step S712, the main lottery result corresponding process is ended.

<Specialized zone processing>
The specialized zone processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37.

In the specialized zone processing, first, in step S1301, the result of the current lottery processing is grasped. In the following step S1302, AT mode additional game number lottery processing is performed. In the subsequent step S1303, processing for adding the number of games in AT mode is performed. Then, in step S1304, additional notification processing is executed, and in step S1305, an additional command is set, and then the specialized zone processing is ended. The processing from step S1302 to step S1305 is similar to the processing from step S1017 to step S1020. However, the number of games to be selected is greater in the number of additional games lottery process in step S1302 than in the number of additional games lottery process in step S1017 (FIG. 41). Furthermore, in the specialized zone, it is set so that the number of AT mode games is always increased regardless of the game result (FIG. 41).

As described above, in the lottery result handling process, if the area is not in an advantageous area, a lottery to move to an advantageous area is performed, and if it is in an advantageous area, a lottery to transfer to AT mode or VB mode, or to continue in AT mode. Processing for adding on the number of games, etc. is performed. In other words, even if you win a specific winning combination, if it is a normal section rather than an advantageous section, the lottery for switching to AT mode or VB mode, and the processing for adding up the number of consecutive games in AT mode, etc. are basically not performed. and its implementation is restricted. In other words, the normal section can be said to be a section in which execution of processes related to instruction functions such as AT mode is restricted compared to the advantageous section. If you win a lottery for transition to AT mode or VB mode, after playing a precursor game, you will be notified that you have won the lottery for transition to AT mode or VB mode. Therefore, the process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode shift lottery will be described below.

<Processing for transitioning the gaming state based on the display mode transition lottery result>
(2) In the process for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, there is a process for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won, and a notification for transitioning the gaming state. The processing to perform is performed. Therefore, first, a process related to notification of winning the transfer lottery will be explained.

<Mode transition notification processing>
Notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode transition notification process is a process that is executed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is a specified number). The mode transition notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45.

In step S1401, it is determined whether the number of precursor games is 0 or not. Counting of the number of portent games is performed in a winning result corresponding process described later, and the number of portent games is subtracted by one each time one game is played. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is immediately ended.

If the number of portent games is 0, it is determined in step S1402 whether a bonus winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current omen mode is a omen mode triggered by a bonus win. If the bonus winning flag is set, a bonus winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1403, and then this mode transition notification processing is ended. The display control device 81 that has received the bonus winning notification command notifies that the bonus has been won, for example, by displaying "Bonus Confirmed!!" on the auxiliary display section 65. Note that the type of bonus that has been won (either the first BB or the second BB) may also be notified.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, if the bonus and AT mode etc. are won at the same time, the winning notification for AT mode etc. is made at the end of the bonus notified in step S1403. Processing related to such winning notification will be explained in detail later, but when performing winning notification in AT mode etc. in accordance with bonus winning notification, winning notification in AT mode etc. is performed in accordance with the bonus winning notification command set in step S1403. It is recommended to have a configuration in which commands are set.

If a negative determination is made in step S1402, the process advances to step S1404. In step S1404, it is determined whether the AT mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether the current precursor mode was a precursor mode triggered by the AT mode winning. If the AT mode winning flag is set, the AT mode winning flag is cleared in step S1405. Then, in step S1406, an AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The AT notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state in response to winning the AT mode shift lottery. Thereafter, in step S1407, an AT mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the AT mode winning notification command, uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the AT mode transition lottery has been won. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After executing the process in step S1407, this mode transition notification process ends.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the aspect of winning notification in SAT mode is different from the aspect of winning notification in AT mode. Therefore, in step S1407, it is preferable to set the AT mode winning notification command to include information as to whether or not the SAT mode is selected. The winning notification mode in the AT mode and the winning notification mode in the SAT mode may be different enough to be distinguishable by the player, and more preferably, the winning notification mode in the SAT mode, which is more advantageous, is different from the winning notification mode in the SAT mode. It is preferable that the mode is more flashy than the mode of winning notification in AT mode.

Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the format of winning notification in AT mode and SAT mode is made common. By doing this, between the AT mode winning notification game and the start notification game, it becomes possible to make it appear as if the winning content has been promoted from AT mode to SAT mode, and the AT mode winning notification game It is possible to eliminate the delay caused by the difference between the game and the start notification game.

If it is determined in step S1404 that the AT mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1408 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current precursor mode was a precursor mode triggered by winning the VB mode. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1409. Then, in step S1410, a VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the third RT state in response to winning the VB mode shift lottery. Thereafter, in step S1411, a VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the VB mode winning notification command, uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the VB mode transition lottery. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After executing the process of step S1411, this mode transition notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S1408 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1412. In step S1412, it is determined whether the specialized zone winning flag is set. If it has not been set, the mode transition notification process ends. If it is set, in step S1413, processing is performed to clear the specialized zone winning flag. Then, in step S1414, processing is performed to set a specialized zone notification flag in the various flag storage areas 106d. The specialized zone notification flag is a flag for executing press order notification corresponding to the seventh re-game winning. After executing the process of step S1414, the specialized zone winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1415, and then this mode transition notification process is ended. The display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone winning notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to notify that the specialized zone has been won.

In other words, for AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zones that transition through omen mode, you can win the AT mode transfer lottery or VB mode transfer lottery based on the bet operation when the number of omen games in omen mode becomes 0. Only the notification of what has happened will be done, and even if the number of precursor games reaches 0, AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone will not start. This is because the AT mode and VB mode as display modes involve transitions between gaming states; specifically, AT mode starts by moving to the second RT state, and VB mode starts by moving to the third RT state. This is due to the fact that Note that there are cases where the specialized zone does not involve a transition of the gaming state (3rd RT state → 3rd RT state), but in this embodiment, the 7th replay winning game in the 3rd RT state is the starting game, The processing configuration is as described above.

As already explained, the second RT state is entered when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, and the third RT state is entered when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won. The process shifts to the case where the player wins, and the fourth and fifth re-game wins are established. Then, the case where the first promoted replay 1 to 4 is won and the third replay prize is established, or the case where the second promoted replay 1 and 2 is won and the fourth and fifth replay prize is established, This is a case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of these promotion replay wins corresponds to the third replay win or the like. Therefore, if you win a lottery to shift to AT mode or VB mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 will be announced in subsequent games in which you win the winning combination that will shift these gaming states. The configuration allows the game state to be changed. Please note that from the time you are notified that you have won the transition lottery for AT mode or VB mode until the AT mode or VB mode starts (until the gaming state changes), you will not be notified as a preparation state (for example, " An announcement will be made that “Preparations are in progress”.

<Explanation regarding display mode transition>
The notification process for shifting the gaming state is performed in the push order process (step S710) in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 31). Here, prior to explaining the pressing order processing, an outline of the case where the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be explained with reference to FIG. 46.

<Summary of push order notification performance>
Notification of the operation order at the time of winning the push order combination (press order notification, push order notification effect, order notification, mode notification) is mainly performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the instruction monitor 68. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described using as an example a case where the push order combination is won when the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left. The push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays the button corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first among the three button displays arranged in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44 (in the figure, the middle stop The number 1 is attached to the middle button (corresponding to switch 43), and the button is displayed larger than the other button displays. Further, each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). Thereby, the player can recognize the winning combination in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. In addition, in the auxiliary display section 65, a number is displayed on the right button display to indicate that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44, and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. The number 2 is added and displayed, and the number 3 is added and displayed on the left button display.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Buttons are displayed larger. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Buttons are displayed larger. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

To explain the execution timing of the press order notification, the press order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R until the constant speed rotation after the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by having a configuration in which the press order notification is executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, it is possible to recognize the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and then press the stop switches 42 to 44. This allows the game to proceed at a good tempo.

<Press order processing>
Next, the push order process executed in step S710 in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 31) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 47.

In step S1501, it is determined whether the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1501 is the case where the first replay or the third replay wins depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, the process advances to step S1502, and it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. As already explained, the AT notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the AT mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 45). be.

If the AT notification flag is set, in step S1503, a process for notifying the press order of the third regame is executed. Specifically, of the first re-game and the third re-game, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23(a)). Thereafter, in step S1504, a process is performed to set the press order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a sub-side control device, and then the main press order process is ended. The press order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery results. Processing on the display control device 81 side based on reception of the press order notification command will be described in detail later.

In addition, the case where the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified in step S1503 basically means that the winning lottery for the AT mode is won and the winning notification for the AT mode is carried out after going through the portent mode. This is assumed to be after the switch is switched to the AT mode. That is, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won in the lottery table in the second RT state or the third RT state, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won only in the first RT state. However, even if you are in AT mode, the gaming state may fall from the 2nd RT state to the 1st RT state due to an incorrect operation, etc. Even in such a case, you will not be able to win the 1st promotion replay 1 to 4. By doing so, it is possible to return to the second RT state at an early stage.

If a negative determination is made in step S1501, it is determined in step S1505 whether or not the current lottery result is one of fall replays 1 to 3. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1505 is the case where a prize is won in the first replay or the second replay depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1506, it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, in step S1507, a process for notifying the pressing order of the first replay is executed. Specifically, of the first re-game and the second re-game, the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1508, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended.

In this way, if you win the first promotion replay 1 to 4 in a situation where you have won the AT mode shift lottery, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win will be announced, and the gaming state will be changed to the It becomes possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1502, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if you win the first promotion replay 1 to 4 without winning the AT mode, there are cases where the first replay prize is established and cases where the third replay prize is established. There is.

In addition, if you win Fall Replay 1 to 3 in a situation where the AT notification flag is set, the gaming state will shift to the 1st RT state by notifying you of the operation order corresponding to the 1st replay winning. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1506, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the AT mode ends and the AT notification flag is cleared and the display mode shifts to normal mode, the second replay prize may be established by winning Fall Replays 1 to 3, and the RT state will transition from the second RT state or the third RT state to the first RT state.

For example, in the 1st RT state, you win the 1st promoted replays 1 to 4 without winning the AT mode, and the order of operations happens to correspond to the 3rd replay win, so the 3rd replay win is established. Even in this case (even if the state shifts to the second RT state), the second re-game winning can be achieved by winning Fall Replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if the player happens to shift to the second RT state without winning the AT mode, the player will immediately shift to the first RT state thereafter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1505, it is determined in step S1509 whether the current lottery result is either second promotion replay 1 or 2. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1509 is the case where the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1510, it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1511 whether the VB notification flag or the specialized zone notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. As already explained, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the VB mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 45). be. In addition, the specialized zone notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the transition lottery to the specialized zone in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 45). be.

When the VB notification flag or the specialized zone notification flag is set, in step S1512, processing for notification of the push order of the fourth regame or the fifth replay is executed. Specifically, among the first re-game, fourth re-game, and fifth re-game, the operation order corresponding to the fourth re-game win or the fifth re-game win is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1513, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S1510, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1511, the process for notifying the press order of the first replay is executed in step S1507, and the process for setting the press order notification command is performed in step S1508. The main push order processing ends. Therefore, if you win 2nd promotion replay 1 and 2 without winning VB mode or specialized zone, if you are in AT mode, the press order notification effect corresponding to the 1st replay winning will be performed, and AT If the mode is not in effect, the press order notification effect will not be performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1509, it is determined in step S1514 whether or not the current lottery result is a BAR replay. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1514 means that depending on the operation order of the current game, any one of the first replay, third replay, and sixth to eighth replay will win a prize. In this case, in step S1515, it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1516 whether the specialized zone notification flag is set. When the AT notification flag is set and the specialized zone notification flag is set, in step S1517, processing for notification of the pressing order of the seventh regame is executed. Specifically, among the first re-game, third re-game, and sixth to eighth re-games, the operation order corresponding to the seventh re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23(c)). After that, in step S1518, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S1515, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1516, a process for notifying the press order of the third replay is executed in step S1503, and a process for setting a press order notification command is performed in step S1504. The main push order process ends. Therefore, if you win the BAR replay without winning the VB mode or specialized zone, if you are in the AT mode, a press order notification effect corresponding to the 3rd replay winning will be performed and the transition to the 2nd RT state will occur. occurs, and unless the AT mode is in effect, the press order notification effect will not be performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1514, it is determined in step S1519 whether or not the current lottery result is a push order bell win. If the push order bell is won, it is determined in step S1520 whether the AT notification flag is set. If it is set, in step S1521, a process for notifying the push order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination is executed (see FIG. 19). After that, in step S1522, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended. If a negative determination is made in step S1520, the main press order process is ended without performing the press order notification process.

In addition, if the push order bell is won in a situation where the AT notification flag is set (if an affirmative determination is made in step S1520), if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, it corresponds to the first small prize winning. It is preferable not to notify the press order. By doing this, the transition roll will be stopped, and the gaming state will be shifted to the first RT state, that is, the first promotion replay 1 to 4 will be won and the gaming state will be shifted to the high RT state. It becomes possible.

If a negative determination is made in step S1519, it is determined in step S1523 whether or not the current lottery result is a transition replay. If it is a transition replay win, special notification processing is executed in step S1524, and then the push order processing is ended. Further, also when a negative determination is made in step S1523, the push order processing is ended. The special notification process in step S1524 is a process for transitioning to the fourth RT state when the transition replay is won. In addition, as already explained, in this embodiment, it is set so that a transition replay cannot be won in any gaming state. Therefore, no transition to the fourth RT state occurs. The process in step S1524 will be described in detail when explaining an embodiment in which a player is set to be able to win a transition replay.

<Processing to shift the display mode based on winning results>
<Winning result processing>
Next, as a result of notifying to shift the gaming state as described above, a process will be described in which a winning combination corresponding to the shifting of the gaming state is won (3). This process is performed in the winning result corresponding process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). The winning result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48.

In step S1601, game number management processing is executed. Although details will be described later, in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the aforementioned precursor mode, the number of continuous games in the AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is counted. In the following step S1602, post-ride notification processing is executed. The later loading notification process is a process for performing the later loading notification explained in FIG. Additional notification (post-add notification) corresponding to the post-add counter BG is executed on the condition that Then, the value corresponding to the executed additional notification is added to the display remaining number counter HG and subtracted from the post-add counter BG, and the post-add flag is cleared on the condition that the post-add counter BG is 0.

In the following step S1603, it is determined whether or not the current stop result indicates that the third re-game winning has been established. As described above, when the third replay winning is established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1604, it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. The case where the AT notification flag is not set is the case where the third re-game winning is achieved without the conditions for transitioning to AT mode being satisfied, and in this case, without performing the process for starting AT mode, The winning result handling process is then terminated. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1605 whether the current display mode is the AT mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As described above, the AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the AT mode. Incidentally, as flags for specifying the display mode, in addition to the AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided. In this embodiment, when the display mode is a mode corresponding to an RT state higher than the AT mode (VB mode, additional specialization zone), the AT mode flag is set to the corresponding flag of that mode (VB mode flag, It is configured to coexist with the special zone flag). Therefore, for example, in step S1605, the case where it is determined that the AT mode flag is set includes not only the case where the AT mode is in effect but also the case where the case is in the VB mode and the case in the specialized zone. .

If the AT mode flag is set in step S1605, the display mode is already the AT mode, so the main winning result handling process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if the AT mode flag is not set, processing for starting the AT mode is performed in steps S1606 to S1609.

That is, in step S1606, the AT mode flag is set. In the following step S1607, an AT mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the AT mode start command, uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the AT mode will be started from the next game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. Thereafter, in step S1608, counting of the number of AT mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 50) of the number of consecutive AT mode games is set in the AT mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106.

After performing the process in step S1608, it is determined in step S1609 whether the specialized zone flag is set. An affirmative determination in step S1609 means that the AT mode won this time is the SAT mode, and in this case, after clearing the specialized zone winning flag in step S1610, The process advances to steps S1619 to S1621. The processing for starting the additional specialization zone will be explained later. If a negative determination is made in step S1609, the winning result handling process is immediately terminated.

If it is determined in step S1603 that the third re-game winning has not been established, the process advances to step S1611. In step S1611, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth re-game winnings have been achieved as a result of the current stop. As described above, when the fourth and fifth re-gaming wins are established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing is performed to shift the gaming state to the third RT state. In this case, in step S1612, it is determined whether the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is not set, it means that the 4th and 5th re-game winnings are achieved without winning the VB mode transition lottery, and in this case, the VB mode start process is not performed. , and ends the winning result handling process. If the VB notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1613 whether the VB mode flag is set. If the VB mode flag is set, the display mode is already the VB mode, and the process corresponding to the winning result is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1614 to S1616.

That is, in step S1614, a process of setting a VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the AT mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the VB mode is a mode that transitions via the AT mode, and that the VB mode is always transitioned to the AT mode after the VB mode ends.

Thereafter, in step S1615, a VB mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the VB mode start command, uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will be started from the next game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S1616, counting of the number of VB mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 25) of the number of consecutive games in the VB mode is set in a VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1616, the main prize winning result handling process ends.

If it is determined in step S1611 that the fourth and fifth replay wins have not been established, the process advances to step S1617. In step S1617, it is determined whether or not the seventh re-game winning is established as a result of the current stop. In this embodiment, when the 7th re-game winning is established, that is, the "Black BAR" symbol is placed in the middle of the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR" symbol is placed in the middle of the middle reel 32M, and the "Black BAR" symbol is placed in the middle of the right reel 32R. When the "Black BAR" symbol stops and the "Black BAR" symbol stops on the middle combination line, the system shifts to the special add-on zone. In addition, the case where the 7th replay winning is established is the case where the BAR replay 1 is won, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 7th replay winning. Yes (Figure 23(c)).

If the seventh re-game winning is established, it is determined in step S1618 whether or not the specialized zone notification flag is set. If the specialized zone notification flag is set, processing for starting the specialized zone is performed in steps S1619 to S1621. Note that, as described above, when the SAT mode is started, even if an affirmative determination is made in step S1609 and the process in step S1610 is performed, the processes in steps S1619 to S1621 are performed.

Specifically, in step S1619, processing is performed to set a specialized zone flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The specialized zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is the above-mentioned additional specialized zone, and by setting the specialized zone flag, the number of continuous games in AT mode and VB mode is counted. will be stopped. In this case, an AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag may coexist in the various flag storage area 106d.

Thereafter, in step S1620, the specialized zone start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the specialized zone will start from the next game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S1621, counting of the number of continued specialized zones is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games of the specialized zone is set in the specialized zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1621, the main prize winning result corresponding process ends.

If it is determined in step S1617 that the seventh replay winning has not been established, or if a negative determination is made in step S1618, the process advances to step S1622. In step S1622, it is determined whether or not the 11th and 12th re-game winnings have been established as the current stop result. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, it is set so that the 11th and 12th re-game winnings are not established, so a negative determination is made in step S1622 in this embodiment, and in this case, the process corresponding to the winning result is performed as is. finish. In the embodiment in which the 11th and 12th replay winnings can occur, an affirmative determination can be made in step S1622, and in this case, in step S1623, the After executing the 4RT transition process, the winning result corresponding process ends. The process for transitioning to the 4th RT will be explained in detail when explaining an embodiment in which players can win in the 11th and 12th regames.

As mentioned above, in particular, the processing for shifting the display mode is performed separately from the RT state processing (FIG. 21) based on the winning of the combination corresponding to shifting the gaming state from the second RT state to the fourth RT state. I do. This is to avoid AT mode, etc. being started based on a winning combination that corresponds to changing the gaming state, even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won. It is.

Also, when transitioning the display mode, among those that involve transitioning the gaming state, transition to a higher mode, that is, transition from normal mode to AT mode, transition from AT mode to VB mode, or AT mode When transitioning from the or VB mode to the specialized zone, the configuration is such that the transition is made based on the winning result of the corresponding combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the gaming state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of a transition to a lower mode, for example, in a case where the game state is transitioned due to a second replay winning as a fall replay or a stoppage of the transition roll, the display mode is not transitioned. When shifting to such a lower mode, the gaming state is managed by winning results (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when transitioning to these lower modes, there is a possibility that the transition of the gaming state and the transition of the display mode will be performed in different games.

<Number of games management process>
The number of games management process executed in step S1601 of the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of continuous games in AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is counted, and the number of consecutive games in these display modes becomes 0. Based on this, processing for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game number management process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether the number of bets is a specific number. As already explained, in this embodiment, each game can be performed with a bet number of 1 to 3, and in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the specific number is 3 bets. If it is not a 3 bet, the number of games management process is ended. That is, in a 1-bet or 2-bet game, the number of games in the omen mode is not counted. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which counting is performed regardless of the number of bets.

If the current game is a 3-bet game, the process advances to step S1702. In step S1702, it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set or the bonus state is present. If the determination in step S1702 is affirmative, in step S1703 flags for various display modes such as the AT mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the specialized zone flag are cleared, and then the number of games management process ends. In other words, the number of games in AT mode etc. is not counted when the bonus winning flag is set or during the bonus period. Note that if each flag is not set in step S1703, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1703, while the AT mode flag, the VB mode flag, etc. are cleared, the AT notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the bonus ends, after going through a preparation state such as AT mode, these flags are used to notify the pressing order for shifting the gaming state, making it possible to return to the gaming state before the bonus. On the other hand, if a bonus is won during a specialized zone, the specialized zone is terminated by winning the bonus. Further, in step S1703, the AT mode winning flag and the like are not cleared. Therefore, if the player wins the AT mode or the like and the bonus at the same time, the winner will be notified based on these winning flags after the bonus ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1702, it is determined in step S1704 whether the number of portent games is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the number of portent games is subtracted by 1 in step S1705. If the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1704 (not in precursor mode), or after executing the process in step S1705, the number of continuous games in each mode is counted in steps S1706 to S1723. .

That is, in step S1706, it is determined whether the current display mode is the AT mode. If it is the AT mode, the process advances to step S1707, and it is determined whether the specialized zone is in the AT mode. That is, when shifting to the specialized zone at the start of AT mode like in SAT mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1707. If the game is in the specialized zone, a game number management process for the specialized zone is performed in steps S1720 to S1723. These processes will be explained later.

If it is determined in step S1707 that the zone is not a specialized zone, in step S1708, the AT mode continuation counter is subtracted by 1, thereby subtracting the number of AT mode continuation games. Then, in step S1709, it is determined whether the AT mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the number of games management process is ended. If it is 0, the AT mode flag is cleared in step S1710, and the AT notification flag is cleared in step S1711. Thereafter, in step S1712, an AT mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. After performing the process of step S1712, the number of games management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1706 that the mode is not AT mode, the process advances to step S1713. In step S1713, it is determined whether the current display mode is VB mode. If the mode is VB mode, the process advances to step S1714, and it is determined whether the zone is an additional specialization zone. If it is not the special add-on zone, the VB mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1715, thereby decrementing the number of VB mode continuation games. Then, in step S1716, it is determined whether the VB mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the number of games management process is ended. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1717, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1718. Thereafter, in step S1719, a VB mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode termination command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will be terminated in the current game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After performing the process of step S1719, the number of games management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1714 that the area is in the special add-on zone, the process advances to step S1720. As already explained, if it is determined in step S1707 that the zone is a specialized zone in AT mode, the process also proceeds to step S1720. In step S1720, the number of continuous games in the specialized zone is subtracted by subtracting 1 from the specialized zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1721, it is determined whether the specialized zone continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is 0, the specialized zone flag is cleared in step S1722, and a specialized zone end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1723. The display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone end command notifies the end of the specialized zone in the current game on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. Such notification may include, for example, notification of the number of games in which the game has been successfully added in total in the current specialized zone. After performing the process of step S1723, the number of games management process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S1713 or step S1721, the number of games management process is directly ended.

<Completion judgment process>
Next, as the process when the bonus ends, the end determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 50. As already explained, the end determination process is a process executed in step S614 in the bonus state process (FIG. 27). In the termination determination process, it is determined whether the bonus termination conditions are met or not, and if the bonus is to be terminated, the AT mode etc. that was won after the bonus was won but before the bonus was won, or the AT mode that was won during the bonus, etc. In addition to performing notification processing, processing for adding the number of games such as AT mode is also performed.

That is, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not a small winning combination has been achieved. During the 1st BB and 2nd BB bonus, the 1st role in BB will be achieved with a high probability, and in some cases, the 2nd role in BB, the 3rd role in BB, and so-called rare roles such as strong cherry and strong watermelon will be realized ( Figure 28). When winning the first role in BB, the first minor role is won and 9 medals are paid out.In other cases, 3 to 9 medals are paid out or the medals are missed and the medals are paid out. No payout occurs. In addition, during CB, if you win any of CB Small and Medium Wins 1 to CB Small and Medium Wins 4, and even if you win any of them, the first small win will mainly be achieved and the predetermined number (15 pieces) will be awarded. A medal payout will occur. Step S1801 is a process of determining whether or not a small win that results in a medal payout has been achieved among the bonuses and winnings during the CB.

If it is determined in step S1801 that a small winning combination has been achieved, a process of subtracting the number of payouts of the current game from the remaining number of payouts is performed in step S1802. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, or after executing the process in step S1802, it is determined in step S1803 whether or not the remaining number of payouts has become 0. If it is not 0, the end determination process is immediately ended. If it is 0, the bonus end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1804, and then in steps S1805 to S1814, processing for winning notification such as AT mode, etc. Performs processing for adding on the number of consecutive games.

In step S1805, it is determined whether the AT mode winning flag is set. If the AT mode winning flag is set, a lottery process for the number of portent games is performed in step S1806, the number of portent games is set in step S1807, and a portent command is set in step S1808. Incidentally, in this embodiment, in the lottery process for the number of precursor games in step S1806, a lottery is performed in which the number of precursor games is 0 with a 100% probability. That is, in step S1807, the number of precursor games of 0 games is always set, and the winning notification of AT mode or the like is performed in the next game after the bonus ending game. After executing the process in step S1808, the end determination process ends.

If the AT mode winning flag is not set in step S1805, it is determined in step S1809 whether the VB mode winning flag is set. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode in steps S1806 to S1808 is performed, and then the end determination process is ended.

In addition, cases where the bonus ends when the AT mode winning flag is set include when you win AT mode and the bonus at the same time, when you win the AT mode after winning the bonus but before winning the bonus, This is the case when the AT mode is won during the bonus, or the case when the bonus is won during the AT mode winning notification mode. On the other hand, the bonus ends when the VB mode winning flag is set, such as when the VB mode and bonus are won at the same time during AT mode, or when the VB mode is entered after the bonus is won but before the bonus is won. This is the case where the player wins, the case where the player wins the VB mode during the bonus, or the case where the player wins the bonus during the winning announcement mode of the VB mode.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1809, the process advances to step S1810. In step S1810, it is determined whether the AT mode addition flag is set. If the AT mode addition flag is not set, the end determination process is immediately ended. If the AT mode addition flag is set, an AT mode additional game number lottery process is performed in step S1811, an AT mode additional game number lottery process is performed in step S1812, and an additional notification process is performed in step S1813. , an additional command is set in step S1814. The processing in steps S1811 to S1814 is similar to the processing in steps S1017 to S1020. After executing the process in step S1814, the end determination process ends.

As described above, on the main control device 101 side, (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, (3) winning results. As a result of each of the processes for transitioning the display mode based on the above, a push order notification effect is generated by the auxiliary display section 65, and the gaming state is also transitioned to follow the transition of the display mode, and further, It becomes possible to generate a press order bell prize by the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display section 65, and it becomes possible to expect to win a large amount of medals.

Here, when a press order notification effect is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 (a press order notification effect by the display control device 81) during a press order replay or when a press order bell is won, in addition to the press order notification effect, the main control Press order notification is also performed on the instruction monitor 68 connected to the device 101. The configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be explained with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 51(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display content.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling on/off of these individual light sources, only one arbitrary display segment can be turned on. Any combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the instruction monitor 68. Note that since all of the above-mentioned individual light sources emit light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8.

Regarding each display segment N1 to N8, in detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are linear display segments. Segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. Further, the eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally at the lower right portion of the area where the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that, as long as it is possible to individually display multiple patterns of symbols on the instruction monitor 68, the shape and arrangement of each display segment N1 to N8 may be arbitrary, and it is even possible to display seven segments instead of eight segments. It is also possible to use a configuration using 1 segment, 9 segments, or the like. Furthermore, it is not essential that the colors displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and the configuration may be such that the colors displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the configuration in which each display segment N1 to N8 is turned on or off by controlling the light source on and off is not essential, but if display control can be performed individually in each display segment N1 to N8, A segment display may be configured with a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Furthermore, instead of applying segment display to each display area, symbols may be displayed using other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used to notify the operation order of the pressing combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 51(b), by performing the stop operations in the order of "left" → "middle" → "right" as the operation order of each stop switch 42 to 44, a winning mode advantageous to the player can be achieved. If so, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and "1" is displayed. Furthermore, if the winning mode is advantageous to the player by performing the stop operations in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the operation order of each stop switch 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit to display "5". In other words, the numbers (symbols) displayed in each display segment N1 to N7 have a one-to-one correspondence with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in display segments N1 to N7. By operating the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win a prize in a manner advantageous to the player.

The eighth display segment N8 is a predetermined start condition including a notification condition in which push order notification may occur, such as transition to an advantageous section, AT mode winning notification being performed, and AT notification flag being set. If the starting condition is met, the light will be lit in the game where the starting condition is met. Further, the light is turned off when the AT mode or the SAT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section.

In other words, navigation states (AT mode, SAT mode, high-frequency mode) that make it easier for players to win prizes in an advantageous manner by making it easier to be notified of the order of operations for the push order bell and push order replay; A chance state where it is easier to win the transition lottery (CZ mode, 1st BB, high probability mode), or a winning state where you have won the transition lottery to the navigation state or chance state but have not transitioned to the navigation state or chance state. The section including (winning mode) is defined as an advantageous section (specific gaming state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is lit during the specific section in which the benefits of press order notification can be obtained in the advantageous section. This serves as a section indicator (specific notification means) that turns off during a normal section that is not an advantageous section or a non-specific section that is an advantageous section but is not a specific section.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68, which has the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as a press order indicator and the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, displays the number of payout pieces on the gaming panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display section 62. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is located above the stop switches 42 to 44 etc. operated by the player, or in other words, the instruction monitor 68 is located below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 etc. are provided on the front surface of the gaming machine. is not placed on the decorative panel. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hands operating the stop switches 42 to 44, etc., and is placed in a position where it is easily visible to the player. Also, since it is placed near the payout number display section 62, which is easy to watch for players who are playing the game with the aim of acquiring medals, it can be said that the chances of players overlooking it are suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than that of the surrounding display parts (for example, the payout number display part 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice that of the surrounding display section. Therefore, even if the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display sections are both controlled to emit light (lighted up), the eighth display segment N8 becomes conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine, the illuminance of the eighth display segment N8 toward the front of the gaming machine is higher than that of the surrounding display sections (more specifically, the illuminance of the eighth display segment N8 is higher than that of the surrounding display sections). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is twice as high. Such a configuration also improves the visibility of the eighth display segment N8, and prevents it from being overlooked when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lit state.

Hereinafter, the first section display process and the second section display process will be described as the process regarding lighting/extinguishing of the eighth display segment N8.

<Section display first process>
First, the first section display process will be explained with reference to FIG. 52. The first section display process is a process performed in step S316 in the lottery process (FIG. 16), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the lottery result of the game is determined based on the lottery result. This is carried out after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S1901, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is being lit indicates the case where it is a specific section among the advantageous sections in which at least the notification condition that can generate press order notification is satisfied. If a negative determination is made in step S1901 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is turned off, the process advances to step S1902.

In step S1902, it is determined whether an advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As already explained, the advantageous section flag is a flag that is set in the advantageous section transfer lottery process (FIG. 32) when the lottery for transition to an advantageous section is won. If the advantageous section flag is set, it is determined in step S1903 whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag is set. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous section transfer lottery is won in the advantageous section transfer lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that this is the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, processing for clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1904. If the advantageous section winning game flag is not set in step S1903, the process advances to step S1905.

In step S1905, it is determined whether the counting of the number of games in the advantageous section, more specifically, the measurement of the number of games AG in the advantageous section in the various counter areas 106e has started. If the measurement of the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not been started, processing for starting the measurement of the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed in step S1906. The number of games in the advantageous section AG corresponds to a grasping means for grasping the number of games played in the advantageous section, and a process of adding 1 for each game in the advantageous section is executed.

If it is determined in step S1905 that measurement has already started, or after executing the process in step S1906, the process advances to step S1907. In step S1907, it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. As already explained, when the AT mode winning notification is performed and the AT notification flag is set, it becomes possible for the press order notification to occur when the press order winning combination is won, and the above notification conditions are satisfied. . If it is determined in step S1907 that the AT notification flag is set, in step S1908, the section indicator starts displaying by lighting the eighth display segment N8. In addition, in the main control device 101, when the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is turned on and the display is started, a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound "Gago!") is emitted from the speaker 64. A sound output command is output to the display control device 81 so that a sound) is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 to emit the predetermined sound effect based on the sound output command. Note that when the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started, the auxiliary display section 65 or another display section may be configured to generate an effect. In this case, a corresponding command is output to the display control device 81, and It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like so that a corresponding effect is performed.

If it is determined in step S1901 that the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is being displayed, then in step S1909 a process is executed to continue displaying the advantageous section. Specifically, in step S1909, processing is performed to continue the situation in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit. That is, the process for terminating the display of the section display is not performed in the first section display process.

In the case where it is determined that the advantageous section flag is not set in step S1902, in the case where it is a winning game even if the advantageous section flag is set (after executing the process in step S1904), and in the case where it is determined that the advantageous section flag is not set, the winning game If the situation is not one in which press order notification can occur even if this is not the case (if it is determined in step S1907 that the AT notification flag is not set), the process advances to step S1910. In step S1910, a process of adding 1 to a first hand ratio counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The first hand ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which push order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

Further, after executing the display start process of the section display in step S1908 and after executing the display continuation process in step S1909, the process advances to step S1911. In step S1911, a process of adding 1 to a second win ratio counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The second hand ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which push order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1910 or step S1911, a win ratio calculation process is executed in step S1912. In this process, the value of the second hand ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first hand ratio counter and the second hand ratio counter. That is, the hand ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which press order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step S1913, a process for displaying the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1912 on the winning ratio monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the hand ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each consisting of seven display segments. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as 7-segment display sections. There is. The display segments in the first display section 77a to fifth display section 77e have individual light sources made of LEDs, similar to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources can be controlled to turn on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and any combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, each of the role ratio monitors 77 can individually display predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display 5-digit numbers. There is.

In step S1913, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1912 is output to the winning ratio monitor 77, and each display section 77a to 77e on the winning ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the winning ratio monitor 77. Perform display control. Specifically, the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur out of the total number of games is a number smaller than 1 and up to four decimal places, such as "0.5012". The numbers are displayed on the winning ratio monitor 77. After executing the process of step S1913, the first section display process ends.

Note that the display control of the winning ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit after the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step S1912. In addition, since the first display section 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display section 77a may not be provided, or the first display section 77a may be printed, etc. The configuration may be such that "0" is always displayed. Further, it is preferable that a decimal point is displayed by printing or the like between the first display section 77a and the second display section 77b.

<Second section display process>
Next, the second section display process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53. As already explained, the second section display process is a process executed in step S415 of the reel control process, and upon the end of one game, the payout of medals (payout determination process) and the transition of the gaming state based on the winning results are performed. etc. (winning result corresponding processing) is carried out.

In step S2001, it is determined whether the advantageous section flag is set. If it has not been set, the second section display process ends. If the advantageous section flag is set, in step S2002, processing for counting the number of games during the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of advantageous zone games AG is performed. After executing the process in step S2002, in step S2003, a process for updating the number of increase/decrease sheets ZM in advantageous sections provided in various counter areas 106e is executed. The increase/decrease number of medals in the advantageous section ZM is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the increase/decrease in the number of medals during the advantageous section (the difference between the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out in each game in the advantageous section). In S2003, the number of medals increased or decreased in the current game (the number of medals paid out in the current game - the number of bets in the current game) is determined based on the winning results of the current game (processing corresponding to previous winning results and payout determination processing). Then, processing is performed to add the increased/decreased number of medals to the increased/decreased number of medals ZM in the advantageous section. For example, if the current game is a 3-bet game and 9 medals are paid out, the increase/decrease number of medals is +6, and in step S2003, +6 is added to the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM. Further, if the current game is a 3-bet game and no medals are paid out, the number of medals increased or decreased is -3, and in step S2003, a process of adding -3 to the number of increased or decreased medals ZM in the advantageous section is performed.

After executing the process in step S2003, in step S2004, remaining game number management processing is executed, and in subsequent step S2005, remaining game number management processing is executed. The remaining game number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games with the current number of remaining games based on the remaining number of games in the AT mode. The remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number with the current number of remaining games based on the remaining number of games in the AT mode.

Regarding the remaining game number management process, specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 54, first, in step S2101, the number of precursor games G1 is grasped. The number of portent games G1 represents the remaining number of games in the portent mode when the current situation is in the portent mode in an advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 49). . In step S2102, the AT mode continuation number G2 is determined. For example, when the current AT mode is in an advantageous section, the AT mode continuation number G2 represents the number of remaining AT mode games, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 49). . In step S2103, the number of VB mode continuations G3 is determined. For example, when the current VB mode is in an advantageous section, the VB mode continuation number G3 represents the number of remaining VB mode games, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 49). . In step S2104, the number of continued specialized zones G4 is determined. For example, if the current specialized zone is in an advantageous zone, the number of continued specialized zones G4 represents the number of remaining specialized zone games, and is set by 1 for each game in the game number management process (Figure 49). Subtracted. In step S2105, the number of remaining BB games G5 is determined. The remaining number of BB games G5 represents the remaining number of games in the BB mode when the current situation is, for example, the BB mode (bonus state) in an advantageous section, and each time the number of games management process (FIG. 49) is started. 1 is subtracted by 1 in a subtraction process (not shown) on the condition that the BB mode is in effect.

Here, for these continuation numbers G1 to G5, a value of 0 or more may be input even if the current status is not the corresponding mode or zone. Specifically, for example, in VB mode, specialized zone, or BB mode, the count of remaining games in AT mode is stopped, but if you enter these VB modes, specialized zones, or BB mode during AT mode, When a transition occurs, a value of 0 or more is input to the AT mode continuation number G2 and the continuation number of each of these modes.

In step S2106, a process is performed to calculate the remaining number of games ZG in the advantageous section by integrating G1 to G5 obtained in each process of steps S2101 to S2105. By performing such processing, it becomes possible to grasp how many games the advantageous section will continue. In the subsequent step S2107, a process is performed to calculate the total number of advantageous section games SG by adding the number of advantageous section games played so far (number of advantageous section games AG) and the remaining number of games ZG. Then, in step S2108, the number of free games (the number of free games that can be added on, the number of remaining games) FG is calculated by subtracting the total number of advantageous section games SG from 1500G, which is the upper limit number of continuous games in the advantageous section. Perform processing.

After performing the process of step S2108, it is determined in step S2109 whether the number of free games FG is greater than 0, that is, whether there is a number of free games and it is possible to add more. If the number of free games FG is greater than 0, the remaining game number management process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the number of free games FG is 0 or less, in step S2110 a process is executed to set a first excess flag in the various flag storage areas 106d, and then the remaining game number management process is ended. The first excess flag is a flag used by the CPU 102 to determine that the first forced termination condition for the advantageous section is satisfied.

In the remaining number management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 55, first, in step S2201, the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM updated in step S2003 is determined. In the subsequent step S2202, the number of remaining games ZG in the advantageous section calculated in the remaining game management processing in step S2004 (step S2106) and the net increase in the number of coins (expected increase/decrease) that can be expected for each game in the advantageous section stored in the ROM 105 are calculated. From the number of coins (KM), a process is executed to calculate the expected remaining increase/decrease number of coins NM that can be obtained in the remaining number of games in the advantageous section. In this embodiment, the expected increase/decrease number of coins KM is when the advantageous section is consumed in a high RT state in a situation where the above press order notification occurs, and the net increase/decrease number of coins (approximately +2.46 coins) taking into account the bonus state. ). That is, for example, if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is 500 games, the expected remaining increase/decrease number NM is 500 games x 2.46 coins = 1230 coins.

In step S2203, from the number of increase/decrease coins ZM in the advantageous section grasped in step S2201 and the expected remaining increase/decrease number NM calculated in step S2202, the number of remaining games in the current advantageous section is taken into account and acquired during the current advantageous section. A process is performed to calculate the number of sheets that can be expected to change (total expected increase/decrease number SM). Then, in step S2204, a process is performed to calculate the number of free sheets FM that can be increased. The process of step S2204 corresponds to the process of calculating the number of free games FG that can be added in step S2108 in the remaining game number management process. The process of step S2204 is a process of predicting in advance that the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated in the second forced termination condition in the subsequent game. This is the process of That is, in step S2204, the total expected increase/decrease number SM calculated in step S2203 is subtracted from 2400, which is the upper limit increase in the number of tickets in the advantageous section.

In step S2205, based on the processing result in step S2204, it is determined whether or not the number of free sheets FM that can be increased becomes 0 or less, and the process will be forced to terminate in the future under the second forced termination condition. If the number of free sheets FM is 1 or more, it is assumed that the upper limit increase has not been reached, and the remaining sheet number management process is ended. If the number of free sheets FM is less than or equal to 0, the process advances to step S2206 to set a second excess flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and then ends the remaining sheet number management process. The second excess flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to understand that the second forced termination condition is likely to be satisfied thereafter.

By setting the first excess flag and the second excess flag, in this embodiment, even if a specific winning combination is won during the advantageous period, the implementation of the lottery for adding up the number of games during the AT mode is restricted. . More specifically, for example, in the AT mode game number addition lottery process such as step S1014 or step S1201, if the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set, such lottery process cannot be performed. It will be restricted and you will not be able to win additional games (or even if you win, you will receive 0 additional games). This makes it possible to prevent a misunderstanding from occurring as if the advantageous period continues for more than the upper limit number of games due to adding up to an amount that cannot be continued.

Note that, once the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, the remaining game number management process may not be performed in the current advantageous section.

Returning to the explanation of the second section display process (FIG. 53), after executing the process of step S2005, in step S2006, it is determined whether the number of games AG in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games, 1500, or It is determined whether the number of increase/decrease sheets in the advantageous section ZM has reached the upper limit increase number of 2400 or more. If any of these forced termination conditions is satisfied, the number of games AG in the advantageous section and the number of increase/decrease coins ZM in the advantageous section are cleared to zero in step S2007. In the subsequent step S2008, processing is performed to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator. Then, in step S2009, parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section are initialized, and then the second section display process is ended.

More specifically, the data initialization process in step S2009 is a process of returning the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous section, and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section to their initial values. . For example, if the AT mode winning flag is set when moving to an advantageous section, or the VB mode winning flag is set during AT mode, and if the flag remains set until the initialization process, these winnings will not be accepted. Clear flag. Further, in the initialization process, if the AT notification flag, AT mode flag, VB mode flag, specialized zone flag, etc. are set, these flags are also cleared. Further, if the precursor counter, the counter for the number of consecutive games such as attack mode, etc. are larger than 0, all of these counters are reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters that affect the performance related to press order notification regarding the advantageous section as an advantageous state using press order notification, and clears the RAM regarding such variables and parameters. This is a process that performs

If it is determined in step S2006 that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached the upper limit value, or if it is determined that the number of increase/decrease tickets in the advantageous section ZM has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process advances to step S2010, and the normal end of the advantageous section is completed. Determine whether the condition is met. More specifically, it is determined whether neither the AT mode winning flag nor the AT mode flag is set, and the number of remaining consecutive games, including modes higher than AT mode, has become 0. If neither the AT mode winning flag nor the AT mode flag is set, the process advances to step S2007, performs the advantageous section ending process of steps S2007 to S2009, and then ends the section display second process. If a negative determination is made in step S2010, the second section display process is ended. In this case, the lighting display of the section indicator (eighth display segment N8) continues.

<About the display of the push order indicator and section indicator and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be explained with reference to FIG. 56.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 56, in a normal section that is not an advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is off (not lit). In this normal section, press order notification is not performed. In other words, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have the performance related to the instruction function, as opposed to the advantageous section that has the performance related to the instruction function such as pressing order notification. A situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, for example, if you win a lottery to move to the advantageous section by winning a weak watermelon combination, etc., the number of games executed in the advantageous section will be measured from the game following the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established (advantageous section game Counting of number AG) is started. Then, if you win the lottery to switch to AT mode during the advantageous section, and the winning notification and the AT notification flag are set, and a push order notification is likely to occur, the conditions for starting the display on the section display will be set. The eighth display segment N8 lights up as the result is established.

Thereafter, in a situation where the eighth display segment N8 is lit, press order notification using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 occurs. In this case, as described above, the press order information ("1" to "6") is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7, and the player presses the button based on the press order information. Be able to understand the order. In the press order notification, the display of the press order information starts when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and the display ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If such a game is not the last game in the advantageous section, when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, only the display of the push order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 ends, and the eighth display The display of the advantageous section by segment N8 continues. If the player wins the push order combination again in the next game or later, the push order information corresponding to the push order combination is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit or the number of increased medals in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase, etc., and the final game of the advantageous section is reached, the eighth display segment N8 also turns off and the information of the advantageous section is notified. ends. In the present embodiment, in the final game of the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the medal payout ends (by the second section display process that is the process after the payout determination process). Note that if no medals are paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the time of the third reel stop OFF operation. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game is the final game in the advantageous section.

As mentioned above, the number of games in the advantageous section is counted from the game following the game that won the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, while the press order notification is only made during the period when the eighth display segment N8 is lit. Occur. In other words, even if it is an advantageous section, the push order notification does not occur in the section where the eighth display segment N8 is off (non-specific section). In other words, by checking whether or not the 8th display segment N8 as a section indicator is lit, it is possible to at least enjoy the benefits of pressing order notification among advantageous sections (specific section, substantial increase section). It is now possible to clearly understand the By doing this, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between a player who ends the game without knowing that he is in a situation where he can enjoy the benefits of push order notification and a successor player who takes his seat afterwards. You can do it like this. In other words, in a situation where the eighth display segment N8 is not lit, press order notification does not occur, so it is possible to gracefully end the game.

In addition, the present slot machine 10 is configured so that there is no difference in the advantage depending on the set value, especially regarding the game feature in which the advantage is changed by notification of the push order, particularly in the lottery for transition to the advantage section. Situations where press order notification may occur, such as AT mode, are included in the advantageous section, and press order notification does not occur not only in situations where the section display is not displayed in the advantageous section, but also in the normal section. In other words, in a game in which the player wants to benefit from the press order notification, there is no difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value in the lottery for transition to the advantageous section as the first stage. By doing this, each game machine (setting value) and each game (situation) have a uniform advantage, eliminating advantages/disadvantages between players, and the slot machine 10 allows you to aim for the symbols and receive benefits. It is possible to create a well-balanced gaming machine while fully enjoying the original gaming experience, and by linking it with the gaming experience provided by the accompanying press order notification.

<Processing related to notification performance on the sub side>
Next, various notification processes performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described as (4) processing related to notification effects on the sub side. As a process for various notifications, an effect setting process that is executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 57.

In the effect setting process, first in step S2301, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S2302. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer in which a plurality of commands can be stored individually and can be read from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S2301, or after executing the process in step S2302, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not the newly received command is a bet time command. The bet command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on a bet operation, and in addition to the bet command set in step S207 of the normal process, the mode transition notification process (Fig. 45), the AT mode winning notification command, the VB mode winning notification command, the bonus winning notification command, etc. If these are the bet time commands, a bet time performance setting process is executed in step S2304.

If a negative determination is made in step S2303, or after executing the process in step S2304, it is determined in step S2305 whether or not the newly received command is a start command. The start command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and includes the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery process, as well as the first to There are precursor commands and additional commands set in the third specific combination processing (FIGS. 33 to 36), push order notification commands set in the push order processing (FIG. 47), and the like. If it is one of these start time commands, start time effect setting processing is executed in step S2306.

If a negative determination is made in step S2305, or after executing the process in step S2306, it is determined in step S2307 whether the newly received command is a command for each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a command output from the main controller 101 in step S405 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). This is a stop command that is set in . If it is a stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, a production setting process at each stop operation is executed in step S2308.

If a negative determination is made in step S2307, or after executing the process in step S2308, it is determined in step S2309 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. In addition to commands, AT mode start command, VB mode start command, specialized zone start command, AT mode end command, VB mode end command, specialized zone end command, There are a first fixed RT start command, a second fixed RT start command, etc. If it is one of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step S2310.

If a negative determination is made in step S2309, or after executing the process in step S2310, other processes are executed in step S2311, and then the effect setting process is ended. In step S2311, effects are set based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59), and connections are made without going through the main controller 101. Based on the signal from the detected sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), settings for effects, settings for error notification, etc. are performed.

Below, the effect setting process at the time of bet, the effect setting process at start, the effect setting process at each stop operation, and the effect setting process at all stops will be explained. Note that each effect setting process will be explained with reference to the schematic diagrams of display effects shown in FIGS. 67 to 72.

<Bet performance setting process>
The bet time performance setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 58.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning notification command is included in the bet command received this time. If the AT mode winning notification command is included, in step S2402, processing for setting an AT mode winning notification effect is performed. In the AT mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the characters "AT confirmed" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the AT mode winning notification performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "I did it!" in a high-pitched female voice).

If the AT mode winning notification command is not included in step S2401, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not the VB mode winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. If the VB mode winning notification command is included, processing for setting a VB mode winning notification effect is performed in step S2404. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(b), the characters "V-BONUS confirmed" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the VB mode winning notification performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Super lucky!" in male and female voices).

If the VB mode winning notification command is not included in step S2403, it is determined in step S2405 whether or not the currently received bet time command includes a bonus winning notification command. If a bonus winning notification command is included, processing for setting a bonus winning notification effect is performed in step S2406. In the bonus winning notification performance, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the words "You did it! Bonus confirmed." In addition, in the bonus winning notification performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "We did it!" in male and female voices).

If the bonus winning notification command is not included in step S2405, it is determined in step S2407 whether or not the currently received bet time command includes a specialized zone winning notification command. If the specialized zone winning notification command is included, in step S2408, processing for setting a specialized zone winning notification effect is performed. In the special zone winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the words "Get on it!!". In addition, in the special zone winning notification performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Norinori!" in the deep voice of an ecstatic man).

After executing any of the processes in steps S2402, S2404, S2406, and S2408, or if a negative determination is made in step S2407, in step S2409, other bet effects are set, and then the main Finish the production setting process. In the process of step S2409, for example, in response to the receipt of a bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit input switches 56 to 58 for the corresponding number of bets are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. For example, a process for returning from the demo mode where one condition is that no game has been played for a predetermined period of time, and a lamp around the start lever 41 is lit to notify that the operation has become effective. Perform processing, etc.

<Start production setting process>
Next, the start effect setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 59.

In step S2501, display mode setting processing is performed. In this process, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is normal mode, AT mode, VB mode, or specialized zone, and the auxiliary display is performed in the corresponding display mode. The display effect of section 65 is set to be performed. Specifically, in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side, an area is provided for setting an AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag as flags for understanding the display mode. At the start of each mode, a corresponding flag is set, and at the end of each mode, the corresponding flag is cleared. In step S2501, by understanding these various mode correspondence flags, the current display mode is specified, and the auxiliary display section 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

In the following step S2502, pending shift processing is executed. The hold shift process is a process for displaying hold information regarding the AT mode transition lottery, and this process will be described in detail later.

In step S2503, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is a winning combination. If the pressing order winning combination is determined, a pressing order notification process is performed in step S2504. Here, the press order notification process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 60.

In step S2601, it is determined whether the start command currently received includes a press order notification command. If the press order notification command is not included, the main press order notification process is ended. If a press order notification command is included, the process advances to step S2602.

In step S2602, it is determined whether the current lottery result is the first promotion replay 1 to 4. In the case of the first promotion replay 1 to 4, in step S2603, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. are controlled to notify the press order that the third replay winning is established, and then the process for press order notification is performed. end.

If it is determined in step S2602 that the first promotion replay 1 to 4 has not been won, it is determined in step S2604 whether or not the current lottery result is a fall replay 1 to 3. If it is a fall replay 1 to 3, the process advances to step S2605, and the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled to notify the press order that the first replay win is established, and then the process for press order notification ends. do.

If it is determined in step S2604 that it is not a fall replay 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2606 whether or not the current lottery result is a second promotion replay 1 or 2. If it is the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2607 whether the VB mode winning notification effect or the specialized zone winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S2404 or the specialized zone winning notification effect in step S2408, various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 indicate that the notification of VB winning or specialized zone winning has been made. Set flag. The notified flag is cleared based on transition to VB mode or specialized zone. Then, in step S2607, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence of the notification completed flag. If the winning of the VB mode or specialized zone has been announced, in step S2608, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. are controlled to notify the press order that the 4th and 5th re-game winnings are established, and then , the press order notification process ends. If the winning of the VB mode or the specialized zone has not been announced, the process advances to step S2605, where the press order notification for winning the first re-game is performed, and then the press order notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S2606 that it is not the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2609 whether or not the current lottery result is a BAR replay. If it is a BAR replay, it is determined in step S2610 whether the specialized zone winning notification effect has been executed. If the winning of the specialized zone has been announced, in step S2611, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. are controlled to notify the pressing order that the seventh re-game winning is established, and then the pressing order notification process is executed. finish. If the winning of the specialized zone has not been notified, the process proceeds to step S2603, where the press order notification for the third re-game winning is performed, and then the press order notification process is ended.

If it is determined in step S2609 that it is not a BAR replay, it is determined in step S2612 whether or not the current lottery result is a bell. If it is a bell win, in step S2613, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. are controlled to notify the push order that the bell win is established as the first minor role, and then the push order notification process is ended. .

If a negative determination is made in step S2612, it is determined in step S2614 whether or not the current lottery result is a transition replay. If the transition replay has been won, a special notification execution process is executed in step S2615, and then the press order notification process is ended. The processes in step S2614 and step S2615 are for an embodiment in which a player can win a transition replay, and these processes will be described in detail later. If a negative determination is made in step S2614, the press order notification process is immediately terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the start performance setting process (FIG. 59), if it is determined in step S2503 that the push order winning combination has not been won, it is determined in step S2505 whether or not the transition triggering combination has been won. If the transition trigger combination has been won, a transition trigger combination notification process is performed in step S2506. The transition trigger role notification process will be explained in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S2505, or after executing the process in step S2504 or step S2506, the process advances to step S2507. In step S2507, it is determined whether an additional command has been received as the current start command. If the add-on command has been received, in step S2508, processing is performed to set the add-on effect in advance so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed when the game is stopped. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 67(a) to 67(c), a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the additional performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "squeaky squeakyyyy!").

Details of the additional effect setting process in step S2508 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 61.

In step S2701, processing is performed to determine the number of additional games to be notified based on the additional command received this time. In the following step S2702, processing for determining the notification timing is executed. The notification timing is the timing to execute the additional effect, and the timing is determined by the process (additional notification process) on the side of the main control device 101 described above. The determined timing information is set in the above-mentioned additional command and output. Therefore, on the display control device 81 side, by reading such an additional command, it becomes possible to grasp the timing at which the additional effect should be executed. As the notification timing, the game in which the additional effect is to be executed and the timing corresponding to the stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 are set.

After the notification timing is determined in step S2702, it is determined in step S2703 whether or not the result of determination in step S2702 is that an additional effect will be performed in the current game. The case where additional notification is not performed in the current game is the case where post-addition notification is selected, and in this case, the additional effect setting process is directly ended. If the current game is to perform an additional effect, it is determined in step S2704 whether or not the execution timing of the additional effect in the current game is when any of the reels is stopped. If it is the stop ON time, in step S2705, a target reel for generating an additional effect is set, and the additional effect is set to occur when the stop ON operation of the target reel is performed. Specifically, processing is performed to set any one of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage areas 183a. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing at which the additional effects occur. Further, in step S2705, the performance data of the additional performance corresponding to the number of additional games to be generated at the time of the stop ON operation is read from the performance data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined performance data setting area. I do. When the CPU 181 grasps that an additional performance will occur at a timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 181 reads out the performance data temporarily stored in the performance data setting area and causes the additional performance to be performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2704, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not the first reel or the second reel is being operated to stop or turn OFF. If the stop OFF operation of these reels is in progress, in step S2707, a target reel for generating an additional effect is set, and the additional effect is set to occur when the target reel is stopped OFF. Specifically, processing is performed to set either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage areas 183a. These flags are also flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing at which the additional effect occurs. Also, in step S2707, processing is performed in which the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is read from the effect data storage area 182b and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined effect data setting area.

If a negative determination is made in step S2706, the current additional effect is set to occur when all reels are stopped (when the third reel is turned OFF). Specifically, a process is performed in which a third reel stop OFF operation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. Further, in step S2708, temporary storage processing of performance data of the additional performance corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After executing the process of step S2705, step S2707, or step S2708, the additional effect setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the start effect setting process, if the additional command is not received in step S2507, or after executing the process of step S2508, the bonus effect setting process is executed in step S2509, and then the process proceeds to step S2510. Then, in step S2511, other start effects are set, and then the start effect setting process is ended. The mid-bonus performance setting process and the continuous performance setting process will be described in detail later. In the process of step S2511, for example, in response to the start of the game, an effect suggesting the lottery result is set, a lamp around the start lever 41 is turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted, etc.

<Production setting process for each stop operation>
Next, the effect setting process for each stop operation performed in step S2308 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 62.

In step S2801, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed among the stop operations for each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, the process advances to step S2802, and it is determined whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned ON is set as an effect for the current game. If it has not been set, this setting process ends. If set, in step S2803, it is determined whether the stop ON operation command received this time is for a reel stop operation that is the target of the set effect during the stop ON operation. If it is not a stop ON operation for the target reel, this setting process is directly ended. If it is a stop ON operation for the target reel, in step S2804, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled so that an effect is performed at the time of the stop ON operation, and then this setting process is ended.

For example, if an additional effect is set as the current stop ON operation effect, as shown in FIG. 67(a), the auxiliary display section 65 An additional performance will occur. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional performance is emitted from the speaker 64.

In addition, for example, if this game is a press order winning combination and a press order notification effect is set, the corresponding reel will stop based on each stop ON operation, and the press order notification effect will become the next operation target. The effect changes to show the reel. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating before the performance at the time of the stop ON operation, a display is made indicating that the first reel is the operation target as shown in FIG. 46(a). . When the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the next reel to be operated (right reel 32R in the figure) is shown as shown in FIG. 46(b). It changes into a performance. In addition, if the two reels are rotating before the performance when the stop ON operation is performed, a display showing that the second reel is to be stopped is displayed as shown in FIG. 46(b), and the second reel is rotated by the stop ON operation. Based on the reel stopping, the display changes to indicate that the third reel is to be stopped (FIG. 46(c)).

If a negative determination is made in step S2801, the process advances to step S2805, and it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command that is output from the main controller 101 when pressing the stop switches 42 to 44 among the stop operations for each reel is completed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2805, the process proceeds to step S2806, and it is determined whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned OFF is set as an effect for the current game. If it has not been set, this setting process ends. If set, in step S2807, it is determined whether the stop OFF operation command received this time is for a reel stop operation that is the target of the set effect during the stop OFF operation. If the operation is not to stop or turn off the target reel, this setting process is immediately terminated. If it is a stop OFF operation for the target reel, in step S2808, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled so that a stop OFF operation effect is performed, and then this setting process is ended.

For example, if an additional effect is set as the current stop OFF operation effect, as shown in FIG. At the timing when the hand is released, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display section 65. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional performance is emitted from the speaker 64. If a negative determination is made in step S2805, the main effect setting process is directly ended.

<Processing for setting effects when fully stopped>
Next, the full stop effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63.

First, in step S2901, it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes an AT mode start command. If an AT mode start command is included, processing for setting an AT mode start effect is performed in step S2902. In the AT mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(a), the characters "AT start!! LV.1" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the AT mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Let's go!" in a high-pitched female voice).

Incidentally, the display of "LV.1" in the AT mode start effect corresponds to the level of the AT mode. In other words, the AT mode started this time is LV. This is a display indicating that the mode is 1. Then, the AT mode level is LV. When the mode is promoted to 2 mode (when a promotion command is received), characters "LV.2" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 as a promotion effect. Also, the AT mode level is LV. When promoted to 3 mode, the text "LV.3" will be displayed and the LV.3 mode will be displayed. When the mode is promoted to 4 mode, the characters "LV.4" are displayed.

If the AT mode start command is not included in step S2901, it is determined in step S2903 whether or not the currently received stop command includes an AT mode end command. If an AT mode end command is included, processing for setting an AT mode end effect is performed in step S2904. In the AT mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the characters "AT END" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the current AT mode (including VB mode and specialized zone) is displayed. It also displays the total number of coins paid out in the current AT mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus). In addition, in the AT mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "See you again" in a high-pitched female voice).

If the AT mode end command is not included in step S2903, it is determined in step S2905 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a VB mode start command. If a VB mode start command is included, processing for setting a VB mode start effect is performed in step S2906. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(a), the characters "777 Lucky!!" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the VB mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Bonus Start!!" in male and female voices).

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2905, it is determined in step S2907 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a VB mode end command. If a VB mode end command is included, processing for setting a VB mode end effect is performed in step S2908. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(b), the characters "V-BONUS END" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the AT mode continuation game at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. Displays the number of consecutive games (including VB mode and specialized zone), and also displays the total number of coins paid out in AT mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus) at the end of the current VB mode. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "It's still going on" in male and female voices).

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2907, it is determined in step S2909 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone start command. If a specialized zone start command is included, processing for setting a specialized zone start effect is performed in step S2910. In the special zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays the words "Additional Challenge!!" and a special mode in which additions in AT mode are likely to occur. Displays a character that suggests that In addition, in the specialized zone start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Let's go!" in a boy's voice).

If the specialized zone start command is not included in step S2909, it is determined in step S2911 whether the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone end command. If a specialized zone end command is included, in step S2912, processing is performed to set a specialized zone end effect. In the specialized zone end effect, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the total number of games added in the current specialized zone. In addition, in the specialized zone end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "Kyukyukyukyu!"). Note that it is preferable to vary the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effects emitted from the speaker 64 depending on the total number of additional games.

If the specialized zone end command is not included in step S2911, it is determined in step S2913 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a bonus end command. If a bonus end command is included, processing for setting a bonus end effect is performed in step S2914. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the total number of coins paid out during the current bonus, and if the bonus is transferred to AT mode, VB mode, or special zone, AT mode ( Displays the total number of coins paid out (including VB mode, special zone, and bonus). In addition, in the bonus end performance, a performance using a character or the like that suggests these contents is performed depending on whether the AT mode is correct or not and the number of additional games.

After executing any one of steps S2902, S2904, S2906, S2908, S2910, S2912, and S2914, or after making a negative determination in step S2913, the process advances to step S2915. In step S2915, if an additional effect is set, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled to execute the additional effect. As already explained, the setting of the additional effect is performed in step S2507 in the start effect setting process. Specifically, in the additional effect setting process (FIG. 61), if the current generation timing of the additional effect is set to full stop, as shown in FIG. 67(c), all reels 32L, 32M , 32R is stopped, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display section 65. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional performance is emitted from the speaker 64.

Thereafter, in step S2916, a pending display process is executed. The hold display process is a process for displaying hold information regarding the AT mode transition lottery, and this process will be described in detail later. After that, in step S2917, other stop effects are set, and then the main effect setting process is ended. In step S2917, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, the sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is emitted from the speaker 64, or during replay. A sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet is emitted from the speaker 64.

As described above, based on various commands from the main control device 101, various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode are performed on the display control device 81 side, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, in addition to notifying the transition of the display mode, processing for effects during various games is performed.

<Processing for production during various games>
In this embodiment, as effects during various games, a bonus effect and a continuous effect are provided. The mid-bonus performance is a performance performed in each game during the bonus state that is transitioned based on the first BB or second BB winning. A continuous performance is a performance that makes the player expect an advantageous result (winning a bonus, AT mode, VB mode, etc.) over multiple games (four times in this embodiment). This is a performance that can be continued, and is a performance that informs whether or not there was an advantageous result in the final game.

<Bonus performance setting process>
First, the bonus effect setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 64. The bonus effect setting process is a process executed in step S2509 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 59).

In the bonus mid-performance setting process, in step S3001, it is determined whether a bonus game is to be started from the current game. The bonus game corresponds to the game from the next game in which the first BB or second BB is won until the end of the bonus. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S3001 is the case where the first BB or the second BB winning is achieved in the previous game. In this case, in step S3002, processing is performed to understand the current bonus type. More specifically, it is determined whether the current bonus game is based on the first BB winning or the second BB winning. Then, in step S3003, a bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type grasped in step S3002 is set. If a negative determination is made in step S3001, or after executing the process in step S3003, the bonus effect setting process is ended.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the content of the bonus performance is different to the extent that the player can discern the bonus game based on the first BB win and the bonus game based on the second BB win. More specifically, in the bonus game based on the 1st BB winning, a bonus effect is set in which a live-action video effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65, and in the bonus game based on the 2nd BB winning, an animation is performed on the auxiliary display section 65. A bonus performance is set in which a performance will be performed. Furthermore, the sound effects (songs) output from the speaker 64 are also different between the first BB and the second BB.

Each bonus performance is a performance that is performed independently regardless of the progress of the game, and is set to be repeatedly performed as long as the bonus game continues. For example, a unit performance is a 5-minute video performance or an animation performance, and when the unit performance ends after 5 minutes have passed from the start of the bonus performance, the unit performance is set to start again from the beginning. Note that the performance on the auxiliary display section 65 may be configured such that it stops at the screen at the end of the unit performance and only the sound effect (song) is repeated. Further, the production on the auxiliary display section 65 may be performed in synchronization with the progress of each game, and only the sound effects (songs) may be performed independently regardless of the progress of each game.

<Processing for continuous production>
An overview of the continuous performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 72.

For example, as shown in FIG. 72(a), at the start of the first game in which continuous effects are set, a display indicating the number of consecutive effects is displayed (in the figure, four stages correspond to the continuous effects of four games). (Showing a nodaruma drop performance). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect was set, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued (the figure shows the effect of the successful Daruma Drop in the first stage, (This indicates that the continuous performance continues). If the continuous performance is interrupted, at the end of the first game for which the continuous performance was set, a performance will be performed to notify that the continuous performance will end midway (for example, a performance in which the first Daruma drop fails, etc.) ). The presentation regarding whether or not to continue the continuous presentation is the same for each game in the continuous presentation.

As shown in FIG. 72(b), at the start of the second game in which continuous effects are set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, there are three remaining Daruma doll effects). Then, at the end of the second game, a performance is performed to notify whether or not the continuous performance will continue. ).

As shown in FIG. 72(c), at the start of the third game in which continuous effects have been set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, the remaining two stages of Daruma drop effects). Then, at the end of the third game, a performance is performed to notify whether or not the continuous performance will continue. ).

As shown in FIG. 72(d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the continuous performance, a display indicating that it is the final game of the continuous performance is performed (in the figure, a one-stage Daruma drop performance). Then, at the end of the final game, an effect is performed to show whether or not the result was advantageous to the player (the figure shows an effect indicating that the Daruma drop in the final stage was successful).

As described above, in the continuous performance, the performance of the next game is set by taking over the performance of the previous game, and the performance of each game has continuity. Furthermore, it is possible to clearly recognize how many games the current game is from the start of the continuous performance (how many games there are until the end of the continuous performance).

Here, in each game of continuous performance, whether or not the continuous performance continues until the next game is set such that the more the game of continuous performance progresses, the higher the continuation rate becomes. That is, at the end of the first game of the continuous performance, there is the highest possibility that the discontinuation of the continuous performance will be reported, and the more the game progresses, the lower the possibility that the discontinuation will be notified. Therefore, in a continuous production, the level of interest of the player varies greatly depending on the number of the current game in the continuous production, and the level of interest of the player increases as the game progresses from the starting game to the ending game. .

Hereinafter, as processes related to the continuous effects, the transition trigger role notification process (step S2506) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 59) and the continuous effect setting process (step S2510) will be explained.

<Transition trigger notification process>
In the transition trigger role notification process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 65, first, in step S3101, a chance effect lottery process is executed to determine whether or not the chance effect is to be set as the effect of the current game. In the chance production, as shown in FIG. 71(b), for example, the characters "Chance!!" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and characters with exclamation marks are displayed on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. so that they are displayed in correspondence with each other. In addition, in the chance production, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "Kui"). In the chance effect lottery process, for example, a lottery is performed such that a chance effect occurs in approximately one-half of the times when the transition trigger combination is won. It should be noted that the winning probability of the chance effect lottery process may be configured to vary depending on the type of shift trigger, display mode, gaming state, set value, etc. In the following step S3102, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S3101 has been won. If the player has won, a chance effect is set to be performed as the effect of the current game in step S3103.

Here, in this slot machine 10, recommended game modes for achieving winnings for each minor combination including the transition trigger combination will be explained.

Among the winning combinations in each game, the small winning combinations that cannot be won depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 and cause so-called missed winnings are set as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon. . More specifically, as already explained, the strong cherry is a winning combination of the 28th minor role and any of the 32nd to 35th minor roles, and the 28th minor symbol on the left reel 32L, The 32nd small role symbol to the 35th minor role symbol are the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol. In this case, in a 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 7th "Red Bell" symbol to the 20th "White Bell" symbol reaches the upper row of the left reel 32L, the above-mentioned None of the ``Cherry'' symbol and the ``Second Replay'' symbol, which are the 28th minor symbol, the 32nd to 35th minor symbol, can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the strong cherry combination will be missed.

In addition, the weak cherry is a role in which any of the 27th minor role, 32nd minor role to 35th minor role can win, and the 27th minor symbol, 32nd minor symbol to 32nd minor symbol on the left reel 32L. The 35 small winning symbols are a "cherry" symbol and a "second replay" symbol. Even in this case, in a 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 7th "Red Bell" symbol to the 20th "White Bell" symbol reaches the upper row of the left reel 32L, None of the above-mentioned 27th small role symbol, 32nd to 35th minor role symbol, ``cherry'' symbol and ``second replay'' symbol, can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the weak cherry combination will be missed.

The strong watermelon is a winning combination that can win either the 30th small role or the 41st small role, and the 30th small role symbol and the 41st minor role symbol on the left reel 32L are "watermelon" symbols. In this case, in a 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 9th "Red 7" symbol to the 3rd "White Bell" symbol reaches the upper row of the left reel 32L, the 30th The small winning symbol and the 41st small winning symbol "Watermelon" symbol cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the strong watermelon combination will be missed.

The weak watermelon is a win that can win either the 29th small role or the 41st small role, and the 29th small role symbol and the 41st minor role symbol on the left reel 32L are "watermelon" symbols. Even in this case, in a 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 9th "Red 7" symbol to the 3rd "White Bell" symbol reaches the upper row of the left reel 32L, The 29th small role symbol and the 41st small role symbol, ``Watermelon'' symbol, cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the weak watermelon winning combination will be missed.

Then, if you operate the left reel 32L to stop while leaving the possibility of winning for any of these winning hands, the 4th "Cherry" symbol to the 6th "2nd Replay" symbol will be on the left reel 32L. It is necessary to perform a stop operation when the upper stage is reached. In the following explanation, the operation mode of the left reel 32L will also be referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode) as an operation mode that does not cause a missed draw, and each of the above-mentioned operation modes that cause a missed draw will be referred to as a non-specific operation. Also referred to as a mode (second operation mode).

Although the chance effect set in step S3103 suggests that the current winning role is one of the transition trigger roles, it is set so that it is impossible or difficult to determine which transition trigger role it is. has been done. In other words, if a chance effect is performed, the winning combination for this game is likely to be either a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, etc., but it is either a strong cherry or a weak cherry. It is not possible to determine whether it is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon, whether it is a strong cherry or a strong watermelon, etc. Therefore, the player must operate the left reel 32L in the above-mentioned specific operation mode so as not to miss out even if he has won any of the transition trigger combinations.

Further, the chance performance does not always occur in a game in which the transition trigger role is won, but occurs on the condition that the chance performance lottery process (step S3101) is won. In this case, it is recommended to operate the left reel 32L in the above-mentioned specific operation mode in each game from the normal time so as not to miss the transition trigger combination.

If a negative determination is made in step S3102, or after performing the process in step S3103, the process advances to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether a precursor command is included as the current start command. If no precursor command is included, it is determined in step S3105 whether an additional command is included as the current start command. If the bonus command is not included, it is determined in step S3106 whether or not the bonus has been won. If you have not won a bonus, that is, if you have won a transition trigger such as strong cherry or weak watermelon as a lottery result, you have won a lottery to transition to AT mode or VB mode or an additional lottery for the number of consecutive games. If the player has not won the bonus and has not won the bonus, then in step S3107, a lottery process in the pseudo omen mode is executed. Pseudo omen mode is visually difficult to distinguish from omen mode, but in omen mode, an advantageous result to the player (such as winning in AT mode) is announced based on the completion of the number of omen games. The pseudo-harbinger mode is a mode in which the game ends without notifying the player of an advantageous result based on the completion of the number of pseudo-harbinger games.

In step S3107, a table for pseudo omen mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and a counter for lottery is acquired from the various counter areas 183b, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo omen mode. conduct. The table for the pseudo-harbinger mode lottery is set so that the probability of winning the pseudo-harbinger mode lottery differs depending on the type of winning transition trigger.For example, a strong cherry is more likely to win than a weak cherry. It is set so that the probability of winning the lottery in the pseudo omen mode is high.

In step S3108, it is determined based on the processing result in step S3107 whether or not the lottery in the pseudo omen mode has been won. If the game has been won, a lottery process for the number of games in the pseudo omen mode is performed in step S3109. This processing corresponds to step S909 and the like on the main control device 101 side, and the number of pseudo precursor games of 1 from 1 to 20 is randomly determined by lottery. However, as described above, unlike the omen mode based on various winnings, the number of pseudo omen games is determined to be 20 or less. In addition, in the lottery for the number of pseudo precursor games, 0 games are not selected. In the following step S3110, the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S3109 is set in the continuous performance counter provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuous performance counter is a counter for keeping track of the number of games until the result is announced, and is decremented by 1 for each game. For example, in a configuration that performs a continuous performance of four games, the continuous performance is started in a game where the continuous performance counter becomes 4, and the result notification is performed in a game where the continuous performance counter becomes 0. In this embodiment, when the omen mode or pseudo omen mode is set, the omen mode or pseudo omen mode ends after continuous performance. Then, by inputting the number of pseudo precursor games into the continuous performance counter in step S3110, when the remaining number of games in the pseudo precursor mode corresponds to the start of continuous performance (4 games remaining), the continuous performance is started. It happens.

In step S3111, a process is executed to set a pseudo flag indicating that the mode is a pseudo precursor mode in the various flag storage areas 183a. In the following step S3112, a continuous effect flag is set. Thereafter, the transition trigger role notification process is ended. Further, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S3104 to S3106, or if a negative determination is made in step S3108, the transition trigger combination notification process is directly terminated.

<Continuous production setting process>
Next, the continuous performance setting process performed in step S2510 of the start time performance setting process (FIG. 59) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 66.

In step S3201, it is determined whether the currently received start command includes a precursor command. If an omen command is included, in step S3202, processing is performed to input the number of omen games in the omen mode included in the omen command into a continuous performance counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the portent mode becomes one corresponding to the start of continuous performance (4 games remaining), continuous performance will be started. In addition, when inputting the number of precursor games from 1 game to 3 games into the continuous performance counter in step S3202, the continuous performance is started from the middle. For example, if 2 is input to the continuous performance counter in step S3202, the continuous performance will start from the current game, and will be performed from the performance of the third continuous performance game in FIG. 72(c). Furthermore, when 0 is input to the continuous performance counter, that is, when the winning notification of AT mode or the like is performed without going through the precursor mode, the continuous performance is not executed. After performing the process of step S3202, a continuous effect flag is set in step S3203.

If a negative determination is made in step S3201, or after executing the process in step S3203, the process advances to step S3204. In step S3204, it is determined whether the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous performance flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous performance counter is performed in step S3205. Then, in step S3206, it is determined whether the continuous performance counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to continuous performance. If the continuous performance counter is a number corresponding to continuous performance, it is determined in step S3207 whether or not a pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S3208, and the actual omen effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S3209, the performance data of the corresponding continuous performance is specified from the present omen performance table and the continuous performance counter, the corresponding performance data is acquired from the performance data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous performance is Perform the processing to set as . As for the performance data of the continuous performance specified from the performance table for this precursor, if the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, it is the performance data that indicates that the continuous performance will continue until the next game, and the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3. If it is 0, the performance data indicates that the current continuous performance ends successfully.

If it is determined in step S3207 that the pseudo flag is set, the process advances to step S3210. In step S3210, a pseudo omen effect table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S3211, the performance data of the corresponding continuous performance is specified from the pseudo-harbinger performance table and the continuous performance counter, the corresponding performance data is acquired from the performance data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous performance is Perform the processing to set as . If the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, the continuous performance performance data specified from the pseudo-foreshadowing performance table is performance data indicating that the continuous performance will continue until the next game or performance data indicating that the continuous performance will not continue. If the continuous performance counter is 0, the performance data indicates that the current continuous performance ends in failure.

Note that when the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, the performance data specified from the pseudo-harbinger performance table includes data for which no continuous performance is set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 and 2, no continuous effect effect data is set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicates that the continuous effect will continue until the next game as shown in FIG. 72(a). When the performance data for the first game is set and the continuous performance counter is 0, the performance data for the second continuous performance game is set, which indicates that the continuous performance will not continue until the next game in FIG. 72(b). By doing so, it becomes possible to set a performance in which the continuous performance is interrupted in the middle in a game in which the number of pseudo-precursor games in the pseudo-precursor mode is 0.

After performing the processing in step S3209 or step S3211, it is determined in step S3212 whether the continuous effect counter is 0 or not. If the continuous effect counter is 0, processing to clear the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag is performed in step S3213. Note that if the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. If a negative determination is made in step S3204, step S3206, or step S3212, or after performing the process in step S3213, this continuous effect setting process is ended.

As described above, in this slot machine 10, the lottery process is performed on the main controller 101 side based on the insertion of medals as game media and the starting operation of the start lever 41, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started to rotate and stopped based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and if the combination of symbols stopped on the active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. In the configuration in which benefits are given, a plurality of RT states are provided with different probabilities of becoming a replay as a result of lottery processing, and the RT state shifts when a prize is established in the corresponding promotion replay or fall replay. Whether or not the corresponding replay will win a prize is determined by the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 in addition to the results of the lottery, and the notification of the order of operations is based on the results of the lottery process. This is done by winning a transition lottery to move to an advantageous section, and then winning a transition lottery to AT mode included in the advantageous section and shifting to AT mode. As a result of the lottery process, a push order bell is provided, and depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to establish the push order bell prize and win a medal. Then, by transitioning to AT mode and transitioning to a second RT state or a third RT state as an RT state where the replay probability is improved, in that RT state, a push order bell prize is established in a state where the replay probability is improved. This allows you to earn a large amount of medals.

As already explained, when shifting to the AT mode, the initial number of games (50) is set, and it becomes possible to play in the AT mode over the initial number of games. If you win an additional lottery in the AT mode or the like, the number of consecutive games in the AT mode is added, and the number of games that can be played in the AT mode increases. As a result, the number of medals that can be acquired in the AT mode can also increase.

When the number of remaining games in AT mode is 0 and the number of remaining games in other display modes in the advantageous section is 0, or when the conditions for forced termination of the advantageous section (1500 games played or 2400 coins increased) are met. In the second section display process, an advantageous section (AT mode) end process is performed. As already explained, in the end processing of an advantageous section, various parameters (various information) in the advantageous section are initialized so that the information in the advantageous section is not inherited after the end of the advantageous section. , advantageous sections and normal sections can be clearly distinguished.

Hereinafter, the lottery mode of the AT mode shift lottery of the present slot machine 10 will be explained.

As already explained, the AT mode transition lottery is executed in the first specific combination processing of the game after transition to the advantageous section in the lottery result corresponding processing. The AT mode transition lottery includes the lottery results of the lottery process in the game in which the transition lottery is performed (in the following explanation, also referred to as "game lottery results" or simply "lottery results"), the AT mode transition lottery table, The lottery is conducted based on a random number (counter value). The lottery result of each game is the result of a lottery process performed based on the start operation of each game (operation of the start lever 41), and the AT mode transition lottery table is stored in advance in the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. On the other hand, the random numbers for the lottery are obtained in advance in a game before the AT mode transition lottery is performed.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a random number acquisition process as a process for pre-acquiring a random number for the AT mode transition lottery. The random number acquisition process is a process performed in step S416 in the reel control process (FIG. 18), and is performed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. In other words, among the stop operations for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, the third stop OFF operation in the third stop operation is performed.

In step S3301, processing is executed to obtain the AT counter C provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The AT counter C corresponds to a lottery random number used for the AT mode transition lottery. The AT counter C is a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 1 to 128, and returns to 1 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 128). The AT counter C is updated regularly, and is incremented by 1 each time a timer interrupt process is activated, for example.

Note that, like the free run counter and hardware circuit used to determine the validity of a winning combination, a dedicated free run counter and hardware circuit is used to determine the corresponding value before the process of step S3301 (for example, at the time of the third stop OFF operation). A configuration may be adopted in which the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter and reads the latched value in step S3301. Note that the latched value may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 106 until the process of step S3301 is performed.

In step S3302, processing is executed to store the value of the AT counter C acquired in step S3301 in the lottery information storage area 106f of the RAM 106. The lottery information storage area 106f includes a storage area RE and an execution area AE, as shown in FIG. The storage area RE is composed of a plurality of storage areas and includes a first storage area RE1 to a tenth storage area RE10.

In the first storage area RE1 to tenth storage area RE10, when the acquisition condition of the AT counter C is satisfied, AT is stored in the order of first storage area RE1 → second storage area RE2 → third storage area RE3... Counter C is stored chronologically. By having 10 storage areas as the plurality of storage areas, up to 10 random numbers for lottery used in the AT mode transition lottery are stored.

In step S3302, the value of the AT counter C obtained in step S3301 is stored in the area with the smallest number (younger area) among the empty areas in the first storage area RE1 to the tenth storage area RE10. For example, if the value of the AT counter C is stored in each of the first storage area RE1 to the ninth storage area RE9, and the tenth storage area RE10 is an empty area, in step S3302, in step S3301 The acquired value of AT counter C is stored in the tenth storage area RE10.

Note that the configuration is not limited to storing the value of the AT counter C as is, but may be a configuration that stores information corresponding to the value of the AT counter C. For example, the value of the AT counter C may be used as a value for AT mode lottery. The configuration may be such that the data is converted into a file and then stored.

In step S3303, it is determined whether the advantageous section flag is set. If the advantageous section flag is set, the AT command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S3304, and then the random number acquisition process ends. The AT command includes information corresponding to the value of the AT counter C stored in each storage area RE1 to RE10 in addition to information corresponding to the value of the AT counter C stored this time. Therefore, by receiving the AT command, the display control device 81 can grasp the information in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10 in the lottery information storage area 106f.

If it is determined in step S3303 that the advantageous section flag is not set, the present random number acquisition process ends without outputting the AT command. Therefore, in the game before winning the advantageous section transition lottery, although the AT counter C is acquired, the AT command is not output. Incidentally, in a game in which the advantageous section transition lottery is won, that is, a game in which the advantageous section starts from the next game, the advantageous section flag is set in the lottery result corresponding process as described above. Therefore, in the random number acquisition process that is started after the lottery result corresponding process, the output setting of the AT command is started in the game (the game that won the advantageous section transition lottery).

The random number acquisition process described above is activated regardless of the lottery result of each game, and the AT counter C is acquired regardless of the lottery result of each game. That is, the AT counter C is acquired independently of the lottery result of the game at the time of acquisition.

Next, a random number shift process for sequentially shifting the random numbers for AT mode lottery stored in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106f will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 75. The random number shift process is a process executed in step S701 in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 31).

In step S3401, among the storage areas RE1 to RE10, random number information for lottery (information corresponding to AT counter C) stored in the first storage area RE1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the first A process is performed to clear the random number information stored in the storage area RE1. The execution area AE is an area for storing information on random numbers used for the AT mode transition lottery when the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the current game. Then, in the AT mode shift lottery in the first specific combination process (FIG. 33), in the process of acquiring random numbers for the lottery in step S903, the information corresponding to the AT counter C stored in the execution area AE is Obtained as random number information used for AT mode transition lottery. That is, the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the information shifted to the execution area AE from among the information of the AT counter C that has been acquired in advance.

In the following step S3402, the information stored in each storage area RE2 to RE10 is shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, the information stored in the second storage area RE2 is stored in the first storage area RE1, the information stored in the second storage area RE2 is cleared, and in order, the information stored in the third storage area RE3→ The information in each area is shifted in the following order: second storage area RE2, fourth storage area RE4→third storage area RE3...tenth storage area RE10→ninth storage area RE9. In this case, information is only shifted from the tenth storage area RE10 to the ninth storage area RE9, and no new information is shifted. In other words, the information in the tenth storage area RE10 is cleared, and the tenth storage area RE10 becomes an empty area.

In the following step S3403, it is determined whether the advantageous section flag is set. If the advantageous section flag is set, in step S3404 a process is executed to set the shift command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the random number shift process is ended. If the advantageous section flag is not set in step S3403, the random number shift process is directly terminated.

Here, the case where the advantageous section flag is set in step S3403 means that the advantageous section transfer lottery was won in a game before this game, and the current game is in the advantageous section. It means that. In other words, regarding the output of the above AT command (step S3304), output of the AT command is started from the game that wins the advantageous section transition lottery, whereas regarding the shift command in step S3404, the output of the AT command starts from the game that wins the advantageous section transition lottery. Output will start from the game following the winning game.

<AT mode transition lottery table>
As described above, the AT mode transition lottery uses the information of the AT counter C acquired in advance based on the third stop OFF operation of each game. The AT mode transition lottery uses the random number information for lottery as the AT counter C, the lottery results of each game, and the AT mode transition lottery table. Therefore, the relationship between the value of the AT counter C and the lottery results of each game will be explained below with reference to the AT mode transition lottery table of FIG. 76.

In the AT mode transition lottery table, the value of the AT counter C that is a winning AT mode transition lottery is associated with the lottery result of each game. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result of the game is a normal replay, the value of the AT counter C that will win the AT mode transition lottery is "3", and if the lottery result of the game is a push order bell, The value of the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition lottery is "7". Furthermore, if the lottery result of the game is a strong cherry, the value of AT counter C that will win the AT mode transition lottery is "1" to "64", and if the lottery result of the game is a weak watermelon, the AT mode transition lottery will be won. The values of the AT counter C that win the transition lottery are "5" and "65" to "76".

In other words, for example, if "7" is acquired as the AT counter C and an AT mode shift lottery is held in a game in which the AT counter C is stored in the execution area AE, the lottery result of the game is If it is the first bell, you will win the AT mode transition lottery. On the other hand, even if the AT mode transition lottery is held in a game where "7" is stored in the execution area AE as the AT counter C, the lottery result of the game is weak watermelon. If this happens, you will not be able to win the AT mode transition lottery.

In addition, in the AT mode transition lottery table, the value of AT counter C that will win the SAT transition lottery is also determined. For example, if the lottery result of the game is a weak cherry, the AT counter C will be "1" to "18". '', the player wins the AT mode shift lottery, and if the AT counter C is "13", the player also wins the SAT mode shift lottery. In addition, if the lottery result of the game is a strong watermelon, if the AT counter C is "5" to "8" or "65" to "94", you will win the AT mode transition lottery; ”, “65”, and “66”, you will also win the SAT transition lottery.

In addition, in the AT mode transition lottery table, for the AT counter C that is different from the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition lottery and SAT transition lottery for the lottery results of each game, you will win the transition lottery to pseudo omen mode. The counter values are associated with each other. As already explained, if the transition trigger is won, but the various mode transition lottery or BB lottery is not won, the display control device 81, which is the sub-side control device, sets a pseudo omen. may be performed (Fig. 65). In the setting of such a pseudo omen on the sub-side, the display effect by the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effect by the speaker 64 are the same as the omen mode or are difficult to distinguish, and in the end, non-winning is announced (winner) This is to prevent notifications from being made. On the other hand, the AT counter C corresponding to the pseudo omen specified in the above AT mode transition lottery table indicates that the rotation effect or freeze effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is the same as the omen mode or This is to make identification difficult, and to set a pseudo precursor mode on the main controller 101 side. A detailed description of the process related to the pseudo precursor mode on the main controller 101 side will be omitted, but for example, in the precursor mode when winning the AT mode transition lottery, the rotation control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is normally controlled. As a control different from the rotation control, a special rotation control in which the rotation start timings of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are made different (normally they start rotating at the same time) is generated with a predetermined probability. Then, in a game in which the AT mode transition lottery was held, if the lottery result of the game and the AT counter C correspond to a pseudo omen (for example, if there is a strong cherry and the AT counter C is between "65" and "128") (in some cases), the special rotation control described above may be configured to occur with a predetermined probability as a pseudo precursor mode.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing whether or not the AT mode transition lottery is won based on the lottery result of each game based on the value of the AT counter C.

For example, if the value of AT counter C is "5", the AT mode transition lottery will be won if the lottery result of each game is strong cherry or weak cherry, as well as strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B. You can also win with the middle bell, and you can also win the AT mode transition lottery with the press order replay. In other words, in a situation where an AT counter C of "5" is acquired, it can be said that it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery. On the other hand, if the value of AT counter C is "10" to "18", the AT mode transition lottery will be won if the lottery result of each game is strong cherry or weak cherry, but if A winning lottery result will not result in a winning AT mode transition lottery. In other words, in a situation where an AT counter C of "10" to "18" is obtained, it is difficult to win the AT mode shift lottery because it is impossible to win with anything other than strong cherries or weak cherries. If "100" to "120" is acquired as the AT counter C, no matter what the lottery result of each game is, the player will not win the AT mode transition lottery. In other words, in a situation where an AT counter C of "100" to "120" is acquired, the AT mode transition lottery will not be won.

In addition, this slot machine 10 is configured so that it is possible to win the AT mode transition lottery even in the first BB role, the second BB role, and the third BB role, which can be won in the first BB state or the second BB state. That is, when the first specific combination processing (FIG. 33) is activated in a game in the first BB state or the second BB state, the lottery results of the games in the first BB state or the second BB state, the AT counter C, and the AT The AT mode transition lottery is performed using the mode transition lottery table. In this case, if the lottery result of the game is the first role in BB and the AT counter C is "128", you will win the AT mode transition lottery, and the second role in BB is "121" to "128", in BB. ``1'' to ``8'' are respectively associated with the third winning combination as values for winning the AT mode transition lottery.

In a situation where "121" to "128" are acquired as AT counter C, each lottery result that could be won during the normal gaming state does not result in winning the AT mode transition lottery, and is in the 1st BB state or 2nd BB state. The lottery results that can be won are set so that the AT mode transition lottery can be won. In other words, depending on the AT counter C that has been acquired, there may be a value that will not allow you to win the AT mode transition lottery depending on the gaming state, but if the gaming state changes in a situation where that value has been acquired, you may be able to win the AT mode transition lottery. It will also happen.

<Hold display processing>
In the present embodiment, by using the relationship between the AT counter C obtained in advance and the lottery results of each game as described above, which lottery result will lead to winning the AT mode transition lottery or will be likely to win. The auxiliary display section 65 makes a specific notification suggesting information such as . The hold display process shown in FIG. 63).

In step S3501, it is determined whether the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set. If any of the flags is set, the pending display process is ended. If neither flag is set, it is determined in step S3502 whether an AT command has been received. If no AT command has been received, the pending display process is ended. If an AT command has been received, the process advances to step S3503.

As already explained, the case where the AT command is received is the case where it is determined that the advantageous section flag is set in the random number acquisition process (FIG. 73) on the main controller 101 side. Therefore, the case where it is determined in step S3501 that the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is not set and it is determined that an AT command is received in step S3502 means that after winning the advantageous section transition lottery This means that the user has not won the AT mode transition lottery (CZ mode, non-specific section). In other words, in a situation where the user wins this advantageous section transition lottery and has not yet won the AT mode, various processes (steps S3503 to S3509) for displaying a hold as a specific notification are performed. In other words, the hold display can be started in a situation where you have won the advantageous section transition lottery and have not yet won the AT mode. The pending display will not start even after winning.

In step S3503, information of the AT counter C corresponding to each storage area RE1 to RE10 is stored in the reservation information storage area 183c of the RAM 183 based on the information included in the received AT command. Although detailed explanations using figures are omitted, the reservation information storage area 183c on the display control device 81 side has the same configuration as the lottery information storage area 106f on the main control device 101 side, and has the same configuration as the lottery information storage area 106f for 10 games (AT It has each storage area (1st storage area to 10th storage area) that can store the information of AT counter C of 10 mode transition lottery), and also has AT counter C of the game targeted for AT mode transition lottery. It has an execution area that stores information. In step S3503, based on the received AT command, the information of the AT counter C of the first storage area RE1 on the main controller 101 side is stored in the first storage area in the reservation information storage area 183c, and The information of the AT counter C of area RE2 is stored in the second storage area in the reservation information storage area 183c...The information of the AT counter C of the tenth storage area RE10 is stored in the tenth storage area of the reservation information storage area 183c. A process is performed to store the information of the AT counter C of the execution area AE in the execution area in the pending information storage area 183c.

In the following step S3504, a pending display lottery process is performed. The pending display lottery process is a lottery process in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display on the auxiliary display section 65 a display corresponding to the AT counter C acquired at the current acquisition opportunity.

Here, the hold display performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be explained with reference to FIG. 79.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), a reserved display area Dr is set as a predetermined display area in the auxiliary display section 65 at the lower part. The hold display area Dr is divided into unit hold display areas Dr1 to Dr10 of the same number as the maximum number of AT counters C stored in the hold information storage area 183c, which are arranged side by side in the left and right direction. Specifically, the hold display area Dr includes a first unit hold display area Dr1, a second unit hold display area Dr2, a third unit hold display area Dr3, a fourth unit hold display area Dr4, and a fifth unit hold display area. Dr5, a sixth unit hold display area Dr6, a seventh unit hold display area Dr7, an eighth unit hold display area Dr8, a ninth unit hold display area Dr9, and a tenth unit hold display area Dr10 are set. In addition to the hold display area Dr, on the left side of the hold display area Dr (left side of the first unit hold display area Dr1), a hold display of the AT counter C stored in the execution area of the hold information storage area 183c is displayed. An execution display area Dp is set for performing this. The execution display area Dp is partitioned as a larger area than each unit reservation display area Dr1 to Dr10, and is used to display the reservation for the AT mode transition lottery of the game and the AT mode transition lottery after the game. The player can clearly distinguish between the hold display and the hold display.

As shown in FIG. 79(b), the first special image P1 to the tenth special image P10 are set as pending displays to be displayed in the execution display area Dp and the pending display area Dr. The first special image P1 to the tenth special image P10 are special images (fourth special image P4 to eighth special image P8) that confirm that you will win the AT mode transition lottery if the lottery result of the game corresponds to the lottery result of the game. , in the following explanation, also referred to as "determined special image"), and special images (first special image P1 to third special image P1 to The images are classified into a special image P3, a ninth special image P9, a tenth special image P10 (also referred to as a "suggestive special image" in the following explanation).

For example, the first special image P1 as a suggestive special image is an AT counter C that has a high possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery if the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed is strong cherry or weak cherry. This suggests that. The second special image P2 as a suggestive special image indicates that the AT counter C has a high possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery if the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon. It is suggestive. The third special image P3, which is a suggestive special image, shows that the lottery results of the game that performs the AT mode transition lottery are strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, as well as so-called rares such as chance A, chance B, and middle bell. If it is a winning combination (transition triggering combination), it suggests that it is an AT counter C that has a high possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery.

The fourth special image P4 as a definite special image indicates that the AT counter C will win the AT mode transition lottery if the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed is a strong cherry. The fifth special image P5, which is a definite special image, suggests that the AT counter C will win the AT mode transition lottery if the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed is a strong cherry or a weak cherry. It is. The sixth special image P6 as a definite special image indicates that the AT counter C will win the AT mode transition lottery if the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed is Strong Watermelon. The seventh special image P7, which is a definite special image, suggests that the AT counter C will win the AT mode transition lottery if the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon. It is. The eighth special image P8, which is a fixed special image, suggests that if the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed is the above-mentioned rare combination, it is an AT counter C that will win the AT mode transition lottery. be.

Among the suggestive special images, the 9th special image P9 and the 10th special image P10 suggest that depending on the playing state of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed, whether or not the lottery result of the corresponding game can be obtained differs. It can also be called a state-based special image. Specifically, the ninth special image P9 as a state-based special image is a state in which the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed is different from the BB state, such as the normal gaming state, the first RT state to the third RT state (hereinafter referred to as , also simply referred to as "normal time"), this indicates that the AT counter C has a high possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery. On the other hand, the 10th special image P10 as a state-based special image is a lottery result for AT mode transition if the lottery result of the game that performs the AT mode transition lottery is a lottery result that can be won in the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state. This suggests that AT counter C has a high probability of winning.

These special images P1 to P10 are set to have different displayed characters, colors, etc. so that the player can identify each one. For example, in the first special image P1, fourth special image P4, and fifth special image P5, characters corresponding to the "cherry" symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed, and you can intuitively select one of them. It is possible to recognize that there is an advantage by winning a cherry, and the first special image P1 is a yellow cherry, the fourth special image P4 is a red cherry, and the fifth special image P5 is a green cherry. The special images P1, P4, and P5 have different colors (background colors), and are set so that the differences between them can be clearly recognized. In addition, for example, the second special image P2, the sixth special image P6, and the seventh special image P7 display characters corresponding to the "watermelon" symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and are intuitively displayed. It becomes possible to recognize that there is an advantage by winning one of the watermelons, and the second special image P2 is a yellow watermelon, the sixth special image P6 is a red watermelon, and the seventh special image P7 is a green watermelon. In addition, the special images P2, P6, and P7 have different colors (background colors), and are set so that the differences between them can be clearly recognized. Note that in the figure, different dot hatches are used to express differences in color.

In FIG. 79(a), the second special image P2 is displayed in the first unit reservation display area Dr1, the fourth special image P4 is displayed in the third unit reservation display area Dr3, and the seventh unit reservation display area Dr7 The ninth special image P9 is displayed, the tenth special image P10 is displayed in the ninth unit reservation display area Dr9, and the first special image P1 is displayed in the execution display area Dp. In this case, it has been shown that if you win a strong cherry or a weak cherry in this game, you are likely to win the AT mode shift lottery, and if you win a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon after one game, you will be able to enter the AT mode shift lottery. It has been shown that it is easy to win.

Returning to the explanation of the hold display process, the hold display lottery process performed in step S3504 is the hold display (basically, the 10th unit hold display) corresponding to the AT counter C acquired this time among the AT commands received this time. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display the pending display (corresponding to area Dr10). In this embodiment, the probability of winning the lottery is set so that the probability of winning the display lottery is about 1/5 and the pending display is displayed. In this case, the probability of winning the pending display lottery is set to be a larger value than the reciprocal of the number of the plurality of unit pending display areas Dr1 to Dr10. At least one (two in the above probability) is set as a probability that the hold display will be displayed on average.

After executing the process of step S3504, it is determined in step S3505 whether or not the hold display lottery has been won. If the winner has not been won, the pending display process is immediately terminated, and if the winner has been won, the process advances to step S3506. In step S3506, processing is performed to obtain the special image table stored in the various table storage area 182a.

As shown in FIG. 80, special images P1 to P10 that can be selected are set in the special image table in association with the value of the AT counter C. More specifically, for example, when the value of the AT counter C is "5", the special images include a first special image P1, a second special image P2, a third special image P3, a fourth special image P4, and a fifth special image. P5, the sixth special image P6, the seventh special image P7, the eighth special image P8, and the ninth special image P9 are set to be selectable. As already explained, if the value of AT counter C is "5", if the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held is strong cherry or weak cherry, the AT mode transition lottery will be won, and the AT mode transition lottery will be won. Watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, and middle bell can also be won, and it is also set so that the AT mode transition lottery can be won even if the push order is replayed. In other words, the pending display suggests that if you win each of the above results in the game corresponding to the first special image P1 to the ninth special image P9, you are likely to win the AT mode shift lottery.

Further, for example, when the value of the AT counter C is "10" to "18", the setting is made such that the first special image P1, the fourth special image P4, and the fifth special image P5 can be selected as the special images. There is. As already explained, when the value of AT counter C is between "10" and "18", the AT mode transition lottery will be won if the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held is a strong cherry or a weak cherry. It is set as follows. In other words, if you win a strong cherry or a weak cherry in the game corresponding to the first special image P1, fourth special image P4, and fifth special image P5, it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery from the pending display. It is suggested.

On the other hand, when the value of the AT counter C is between "100" and "120", settings are made such that the first special image P1 and the second special image P2 can be selected as the special images. As already explained, if the value of AT counter C is between "100" and "120", the game is set so that no one will win the AT mode transition lottery regardless of the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held. ing. In other words, even if you win a strong cherry in the game corresponding to the first special image P1, you may not win the AT mode transition lottery, and even if you win a strong watermelon in the game corresponding to the second special image P2. The pending display suggests that there is a possibility that you may not win the AT mode transition lottery.

When the value of the AT counter C is "128", the setting is such that in addition to the first special image P1, the tenth special image P10 can also be selected as the special image. As already explained, if the value of AT counter C is "128", if the AT mode transition lottery is held at normal times, the AT mode transition lottery will not be won and the AT mode transition lottery will be held in the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state. It is set up so that if the user wins, he/she can win the AT mode transition lottery. In other words, if the game corresponding to the 10th special image P10 is played in any BB state and the lottery result of such game is the corresponding lottery result (3rd hand in BB), the AT mode transition lottery will be won. is suggested by the pending display.

After acquiring the special image table in step S3506, special image selection processing is executed in step S3507. As mentioned above, the special image table is set so that a plurality of special images can be selected for the value of the AT counter C, and the ratio of which special image is selected is also predetermined. (omitted in the figure). Generally speaking, the ratio is between suggestive special images (first special image P1 to third special image P3, ninth special image P9, and tenth special image P10) and definitive special images (fourth special image P4 to eighth special image P10). If the AT counter C is associated with any of the special images P8), the setting is such that the definite special image is more likely to be selected than the suggestive special image. If the AT counter C is associated with a definite special image, it is always associated with a suggestive special image, and by setting the selection ratio as described above, the overall definite special image This makes it possible to increase the frequency of display.

In addition, if the same AT counter C is obtained for a suggestive special image or a definite special image that is associated with a lottery result with a high appearance rate or is associated with multiple lottery results. It is set so that it is easy to be selected even if it is. Specifically, the first special image P1 and the third special image P3 as suggestive special images are such that the first special image P1 is associated with a strong cherry and a weak cherry, whereas the third special image P1 is associated with a strong cherry and a weak cherry. In addition to strong cherry and weak cherry, P3 is also associated with other rare roles. Therefore, the probability that the third special image P3 will be the lottery result of the associated game is higher than that of the first special image P1, and the type of lottery result associated with the third special image P3 is also higher than that of the first special image P1. is larger than the first special image P1. Further, as definitive special images, the sixth special image P6 and the seventh special image P7 are such that the sixth special image P6 is associated with a strong watermelon, whereas the seventh special image P7 is associated with a strong watermelon. It also corresponds to weak watermelon. Therefore, the seventh special image P7 has a higher probability of being the lottery result of the associated game than the sixth special image P6, and the types of lottery results associated with it are also higher than those of the seventh special image P7. is larger than the sixth special image P6.

More specifically, regarding the selection ratio, for example, when the value of the AT counter C is "5", as described above, the first special image P1 to the ninth special image P9 are selected as the suggestive special image and the definite special image. It is associated with the image. In this case, the first special image P1 as a suggestive special image is selected at 3%, the second special image P2 is selected at 3%, the third special image P3 is selected at 4%, and the ninth special image P9 is selected at 5%. The fourth special image P4 as a special image is selected at 10%, the fifth special image P5 is selected at 15%, the sixth special image P6 is selected at 15%, the seventh special image P7 is selected at 20%, and the eighth special image P8 is selected at 25%. The proportion is determined so that In addition, when the value of the AT counter C is "10" to "18", as described above, the suggestive special image is used as the first special image P1, the fourth special image P4, and the fifth special image P5. and a definite type special image. In this case, the first special image P1 as the suggestive special image is selected at 10%, the fourth special image P4 as the definitive special image is selected at 30%, and the fifth special image P5 is selected at 60%. The proportion is determined so that the When the value of the AT counter C is between "100" and "120", as described above, the first special image P1 and the second special image P2 are associated with the suggestive special image. In this case, the ratios are determined such that the first special image P1 is selected at 40% and the second special image P2 is selected at 60%.

In the special image selection process in step S3507, special images to be displayed are selected by lottery or the like based on the predetermined ratio as described above. Then, in step S3508, a process is executed to display the selected special image in the unit pending display area corresponding to the AT counter C acquired at the current acquisition opportunity. More specifically, the image data corresponding to the selected special image is read from the ROM 182 and stored in the lowest numbered empty area (basically the 10th storage area) of the empty areas of the reserved information storage area 183c. The auxiliary display unit 65 is configured such that the selected special image is displayed in the unit hold display area (basically the 10th unit hold display area Dr10) corresponding to the area in which the AT counter C is stored. Control.

In the following step S3509, a status display start process is executed. The situation display start process is a process that starts a situation display for suggesting or explaining the relationship between the special image to be displayed this time and the gaming state. Such status display start processing will be explained in detail later. After executing the process of step S3509, the hold display start process ends.

<Pending shift processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a description will be given of a suspension shift process for shifting the area in which the suspension display started as described above is displayed in accordance with the progress of the game. The hold shift process is a process executed in step S2502 in the start effect setting process (FIG. 59) in the display control device 81.

In step S3601, it is determined whether a shift command has been received from the main controller 101. If no shift command has been received, the pending shift processing is ended. If a shift command has been received, in step S3602, processing is performed to clear the pending display in the execution display area Dp. More specifically, when a special image is displayed as a pending display in the execution display area Dp, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to erase the special image, and the special image is not displayed in the execution display area Dp. If it is not displayed, that state is maintained. Then, in step S3603, processing is performed to shift the pending display in the first unit pending display area Dr1 to the execution display area Dp. More specifically, when a special image pending display is displayed in the first unit pending display area Dr1, the pending display is displayed in the execution display area Dp, and the first unit pending display area The auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to erase the hold display displayed in Dr1, and if the hold display is not displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1, that state is maintained. In the following step S3604, processing is performed to shift the hold display in each unit hold display area to a lower display area. More specifically, the hold display of the special image displayed in the second unit hold display area Dr2 is displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1, and the hold display displayed in the second unit hold display area Dr2 is also displayed. 3rd unit reservation display area Dr3 → 2nd unit reservation display area Dr2, 4th unit reservation display area Dr4 → 3rd unit reservation display area Dr3... 10th unit reservation display area Dr10 → 9th unit The hold display of each unit hold display area is shifted such as hold display area Dr9. In this case, regarding the unit hold display area where the hold display is not performed, the state where the hold display is not performed is shifted to the lower unit hold display area as it is. Then, the hold display is only shifted from the tenth unit hold display area Dr10 to the ninth unit hold display area Dr9, and no new hold display is shifted. That is, the hold display in the tenth unit hold display area Dr10 is cleared, and the tenth unit hold display area Dr10 is in a state where no hold display is performed.

In the following step S3605, a process for updating the status display is executed. The situation display update process is a process for updating the display contents of the situation display started in the situation display start process as the game progresses (according to changes in the situation). Such status display update processing will be explained in detail later. After executing the process in step S3605, the hold display start process ends.

Here, in the above-mentioned suspension display processing, it is determined that the suspension display is started before the AT mode transition lottery is won. On the other hand, in the pending shift processing, the processing for shifting the pending display in steps S3602 to S3605 is determined to be executed regardless of the presence or absence of the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag. That is, the hold display is started after winning the advantageous section shift lottery and before winning the AT mode shift lottery, and the shift of the hold display is performed even after winning the AT mode shift lottery. By doing this, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of the AT mode transition lottery using the hold display, while avoiding the situation where the success or failure of the AT mode transition lottery becomes completely obvious depending on the presence or absence of a shift. There is.

Incidentally, although a detailed explanation using the figures is omitted, it is preferable that each pending display is ended when the AT mode winning notification is performed.

<Relationship between AT mode transition lottery and pending display>
The manner in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the AT counter C acquired in advance will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83.

82(a1) and FIG. 82(b1), in the situation before the start of the game (at the start), FIG. 82(a1) shows the hold display area Dr and the execution display area Dp in the auxiliary display section 65, and 82(b1) indicates a storage area RE and an execution area AE in the lottery information storage area 106f. For example, "20" is stored in the execution area AE as information corresponding to the AT counter C, and the first special image P1 is displayed as a pending display corresponding to the AT counter C in the execution display area Dp. Further, as a random number used for the AT mode transition lottery for the next game, "8" is stored in the first storage area RE1 as information corresponding to the AT counter C, and the first unit reservation display area Dr1 stores the AT counter C. A second special image P2 is displayed as a pending display corresponding to the second special image P2. In this situation, a case will be described in which the start lever 41 is operated and the next game is started, and a strong watermelon is won in the lottery process of the next game.

Based on the operation of the start lever 41, random number shift processing and pending shift processing are performed. 82(a2) and 82(b2) show a situation in which the information on the AT counter C and the hold display have been shifted by one game from the situation in FIGS. 82(a1) and 82(b1), The information of the AT counter C stored in the first storage area RE1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the second special image P2 displayed in the first unit pending display area Dr1 is shifted to the execution display area Dp. In this case, the second special image P2 in the execution display area Dp suggests that if the lottery result of the current game is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon, it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery. In addition, FIGS. 82(a1) and 82(b2) show how the 10th storage area RE10 and the 10th unit pending display area Dr10 become empty areas as a result of the random number shift process and the pending shift process. It shows.

As already explained, the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the information on the AT counter C shifted to the execution area AE, the information on the lottery result of the current game, and the AT mode transition lottery table. In FIG. 82(a2) and FIG. 82(b2), the AT counter C shifted to the execution area AE is "8", and the lottery result of this game is a strong watermelon, and these pieces of information are transferred to the AT mode. After checking against the lottery table (FIG. 76), the AT mode transition lottery in this case becomes the AT mode transition winning. Note that the AT mode transition lottery is executed in the first specific combination processing in the lottery result corresponding process as described above, and based on the start operation of the start lever 41, the lottery process of the current game and the AT mode transition are executed. A transition lottery will be held.

As mentioned above, in the game where the strong watermelon was won (the game where the AT mode shift lottery was won), if the operation to stop each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed, the strong watermelon is won as shown in FIG. It is possible to win a watermelon prize. The random number acquisition process is performed based on the third stop OFF operation, and in FIG. 83(b), the AT for the tenth storage area RE10 is executed based on the third stop OFF operation that establishes the strong watermelon winning. This indicates that counter C is to be acquired. Then, by storing the AT counter C in the tenth storage area RE10, as shown in FIG. 83(a), the first special image P1 as a pending display corresponding to the AT counter C can be displayed. Become.

As described above, in the configuration in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT counter C obtained in advance, a hold display corresponding to the AT counter C is displayed, so that the game can win the AT mode transition lottery. It becomes possible to proceed with the game after understanding the contents of the lottery results in advance. Then, for example, if the fourth special image P4 corresponding to strong cherry is displayed in the third unit pending display area Dr3 as a pending display corresponding to after three games, instead of after one game or two games, It is also possible to have the player play three games with the hope of winning a strong cherry after the game, which greatly improves the fun of each game.

Here, the winning probability of the lottery results for each game is determined by the lottery table set for each game state, and the winning probability of the specific combination that triggers the AT mode transition lottery also differs between normal times and BB times. It can be different. FIG. 84 shows the winning probability according to the state of each specific combination that triggers the AT mode transition lottery.

In the normal replay, there is a difference in winning probability between the normal gaming state and the first to third RT states, but it is possible to win in any state. On the other hand, it is set so that the player does not win the normal replay at the time of BB in the first BB state or the second BB state. In addition, in the push order replay, although it is possible to win in the first to third RT states, it is set so that it is not possible to win in the normal game state and during BB. The push order bell is set so that it can be won in normal times, but not in the case of BB. In other words, the normal replay, push order replay, and push order bell can be said to be normal combinations that are mainly won in normal times and not won in BB times. Then, in a situation where the AT counter C corresponding to these normal winning combinations is acquired, if the AT mode shift lottery is held in the normal time, it is possible to win, but if the AT mode shift lottery is conducted in the BB time, the player cannot win. However, in this embodiment, the AT counter C corresponding to the normal winning combination is also associated with the third winning combination in the BB (FIG. 76). Therefore, in a situation where the AT counter C corresponding to the normal winning combination has been acquired, it is possible to win if the AT mode transition lottery is held both in normal times and in BB times.

The first BB role, the second BB role, and the third BB role are BB roles that can only be won at the time of BB. Then, in a situation where the AT counter C corresponding to these BB combinations is acquired, if the AT mode transition lottery is held at BB time, the player can win, but if the AT mode transition lottery is held at the normal time, he will not win. In this embodiment, of the AT counter C corresponding to the BB combination, a value that is also associated with the normal combination and a value that is not associated with the normal combination are set (FIG. 76). Therefore, in the AT mode transition lottery that uses the value of the AT counter C corresponding to the BB role that is also associated with the normal role, it is possible to win at both the BB time and the normal time. In the AT mode transition lottery using the value of the AT counter C that is not associated with the normal winning combination, it is possible to win only at the time of BB.

Rare combinations such as Strong Cherry, Weak Cherry, Strong Watermelon, Weak Watermelon, Chance A, Chance B, and Middle Bell are common winning combinations that can be won both in normal times and in BB times. However, when comparing the probability of winning in normal times and the probability of winning in BB times, each winning probability is set so that it is overwhelmingly easier to win in BB times. In other words, in the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C associated with these common winning combinations, it is much easier to win in the BB time than in the normal time.

Among the common winning combinations, for strong cherry and weak cherry, the probability of winning is higher in the first BB state than in the second BB state. Further, for the strong watermelon and the weak watermelon, the winning probability is higher in the second BB state than in the first BB state. Therefore, in the AT mode transition lottery using AT counter C that is associated with strong and weak cherries, it is easier to win in the 1st BB state than in the 2nd BB state, which is associated with strong and weak watermelons. In the AT mode transition lottery using AT counter C, it is easier to win in the second BB state than in the first BB state.

The relationship between the AT counter C and the special image as a pending display will be explained with reference to FIG.

As already explained, the first special image P1 as a suggestive special image suggests that it is easy to win the AT mode shift lottery when a strong cherry or a weak cherry is selected, and the fourth special image P4 as a confirmatory special image indicates that when a strong cherry is selected, the fifth special image P5 is a winning AT mode transition lottery when a strong cherry or a weak cherry is selected. Since it is easier to win strong cherries and weak cherries during BB times than during normal times, in situations where the first special image P1, fourth special image P4, and fifth special image P5 are displayed, the AT mode transition lottery is not possible. It is also easier to win during BB times than during normal times. Moreover, since it is easier to win a strong cherry or a weak cherry in the first BB state than in the second BB state, it is also easier to win in the AT mode shift lottery in the first BB state than in the second BB state.

In addition, the second special image P2 as a suggestive special image suggests that it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery when the watermelon is strong or weak, and the sixth special image P6 as a definite special image is a strong watermelon. Sometimes, the seventh special image P7 indicates that the AT mode transition lottery will be won when the watermelon is strong or weak. Since it is easier to win a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon during BB than during normal times, in the situation where the second special image P2, the sixth special image P6, and the seventh special image P7 are displayed, the AT mode transition lottery is not possible. It is also easier to win during BB times than during normal times. Furthermore, since it is easier to win a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon in the second BB state than in the first BB state, it is also easier to win in the AT mode shift lottery in the second BB state than in the first BB state.

The 9th special image P9, which is a suggestive special image, suggests that it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery in the normal role, and the 10th special image P10 suggests that it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery in the BB role. It is suggestive. Therefore, in a situation where the 9th special image P9 is displayed, it is easier to win the AT mode shift lottery in the normal time than in the BB time, and in a situation where the 10th special image P10 is displayed, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery. It is easier to win the transition lottery during BB times than during normal times.

These various special images start being displayed in a game where the AT counter C is stored in the 10th storage area RE10, and are eligible for an AT mode transition lottery in a game where the AT counter C is shifted to the execution area AE. Therefore, the display start game and the game targeted for the AT mode transition lottery are different. In this case, the gaming state of the display starting game and the gaming state of the game targeted for the AT mode transition lottery may be different. In other words, a special image that has started to be displayed during normal times may become a target of the AT mode transition lottery during BB. For example, even if the game in which the first special image P1 starts displaying is in normal time, if the game that is eligible for the AT mode transition lottery is BB, it will be eligible for the AT mode transition lottery in normal time. I have high hopes that I will win the transition lottery. In the present embodiment, in the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C acquired in advance, the difference between the states at the time of acquisition and at the time of the transition lottery is notified as a status display. The configuration for displaying the status will be described below.

<Process for starting status display>
As a configuration related to status display, the process for starting status display will be described first with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 86. The status display start process is a process executed in step S3509 when starting a hold display in the hold display process. As already explained, the hold display process is a process executed in the full stop effect setting process, and is executed when the game ends. In the process for starting the status display, the content of the status display is determined based on the content of the game to be ended this time (game results, winning results, number of payouts, etc.).

In step S3701, it is determined whether the special image as a pending display that is to be displayed this time is a special image corresponding to a cherry. More specifically, it is determined whether the special image to start displaying this time is one of the first special image P1, the fourth special image P4, and the fifth special image P5. As mentioned above, in the game in the 1st BB state, it is easy to win a strong cherry or a weak cherry, and the cherry-compatible special images of the 1st special image P1, 4th special image P4, and 5th special image P5 are AT in the 1st BB state. If you are eligible for the mode transition lottery, you are likely to win.

Therefore, if the special image to start displaying this time is the above-mentioned cherry-compatible special image, the process advances to step S3702, and the current gaming state is not the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, and before the 1st BB or 2nd BB is won. It is determined whether the state is as follows. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3702, the process advances to step S3703, where a process for displaying an advantageous result when winning the 1st BB is executed as the current status display, and then the status display start process is ended. The 1st BB winning advantageous display is a notification that suggests that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery if the game in which the target special image is the target of the AT mode transition lottery is in the 1BB state. For example, as shown in FIG. 88(a), the advantageous display for winning the 1st BB can be as follows: While pointing to the special image that will be displayed this time (in a speech bubble), the character with the "red 7" pattern corresponding to the 1st BB winning may be displayed. It is recommended to display three numbers and display the message "AT chance at 7 7 7".

If a negative determination is made in step S3702, the process advances to step S3704. In step S3704, it is determined whether the current gaming state is not the first BB state or the second BB state, and is a carryover state after winning the first BB. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3704, the process advances to step S3705, where a first countdown display process is executed as the current status display, and then the status display start process is ended. The first countdown display is a notification that suggests that it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery if the target special image is in the 1BB state by the game targeted for the AT mode transition lottery, and has already been won. This is a notification that suggests that the 1st BB who is currently in a position to win the prize should be immediately entered into the prize. As the first countdown display, for example, as shown in FIG. 88(b), while pointing to the special image to be displayed this time (in a speech bubble), three characters with the "red 7" symbol corresponding to the first BB prize are displayed. It is preferable to display the message "7 7 7 prizes within 9 games!!". In this case, since the special image to be displayed this time is the target game for the AT mode shift lottery after 10 games, by establishing the 1st BB prize within 9 games, which is one game before that, the target special image The AT mode transition lottery for images will be carried out in the first BB state.

If a negative determination is made in step S3704, the process advances to step S3706. In step S3706, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the first BB state. In the case of the first BB state, it is determined in step S3707 whether the remaining number of payouts up to the upper limit number of payouts in the first BB state is greater than 45 coins. As already explained, in the first BB state, the first winning combination in the BB is achieved with a high probability and nine medals are paid out. In step S3707, if there are 45 or less medals remaining up to the maximum number of medals to be paid out, this means that there are games in which 3 or 5 medals are paid out, or games in which no medals are paid out. The game after 10 games in which the special image that starts is the target of the AT mode transition lottery is a case where there is a high possibility that the first BB state has already ended. More specifically, if 9 medals have been paid out 5 times in the 9 games up to 1 game before the special image that starts displaying this time becomes the target of the AT mode transition lottery, it becomes the target of the special image. The game is played after the first BB state ends. Therefore, if it is determined in step S3707 that the remaining number of payouts is 45 or less, the process for starting the status display is ended. In this case, no status display is performed for the special image that is to be displayed this time.

If it is determined in step S3707 that the remaining number of payouts is greater than 45, the process advances to step S3708. In step S3708, it is determined whether the remaining number of payouts is greater than 70 coins. If the number of medals is 70 or less, if 9 medals are paid out 8 or more times during the 9 games until the special image that starts displaying this time becomes the target of the AT mode transition lottery, then the special image that starts displaying this time becomes the target of the special image This is a game that occurs after the first BB state ends. In addition, even if 9 medals are paid out 7 times, if 5 medals paid out twice, or 5 medals paid out once and 3 medals paid out once, the special image will be applied. This is a game that occurs after the first BB state ends. In other words, even if 9 medals are paid out 7 times out of 9 games, if 3 medals are paid out in each of the remaining 2 games, or if no medal is paid out even in 1 of the remaining 2 games, then the relevant The game targeted by the special image is in the first BB state. Furthermore, if the number of nine medals paid out is six or less times out of nine games, the game targeted by the special image is in the first BB state, regardless of the number of medals paid out in the remaining games. If it is determined in step S3708 that there are more than 70 sheets, in step S3709, a process is executed to display a response chance as the current situation display, and then the process for starting the situation display is ended. The corresponding chance display is a notification that suggests that if the target special image becomes the target of the AT mode transition lottery, there is a high possibility of winning the AT mode transition. As a response chance display, for example, as shown in FIG. 88(c), it is preferable to display "It's extremely hot!!" while pointing to the special image to be displayed this time (in a speech bubble).

If a negative determination is made in step S3708 and the remaining number of payouts in the 1st BB state is more than 45 but less than 70, this means that the game will continue until the special image that starts displaying this time becomes the target of the AT mode transition lottery. In this case, depending on the number of games in which 3 or 5 medals are paid out or no medals are paid out, there is a possibility that the game after 10 games that is subject to the AT mode shift lottery will be in the 1st BB state. It is. In other words, depending on the lottery results of the nine games before the special image that starts displaying this time becomes the target of the AT mode transition lottery, and the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the game after 10 games will be the first BB. This is a case where it may be different whether the game is in progress or not. In this case, in step S3710, a process for displaying a delayed end display is executed as the current status display, and then the process for starting the status display is ended. The end delay display indicates that the current state should be maintained until the target special image becomes the target of the AT mode transition lottery.In other words, the current state should be maintained until the target special image becomes the target of the AT mode transition lottery. This is a notification that suggests that if you can maintain this, there is a high possibility that you will be successful in switching to AT mode. For example, as shown in FIG. 88(d), the display for delaying the end is a display (in a speech bubble) pointing to the special image that will start displaying this time, and saying, "Don't finish the bonus until the boss's turn!!" It is a good idea to do this.

If it is determined in step S3701 that the special image to be displayed this time is not a cherry-compatible special image, the process advances to step S3711. In step S3711, it is determined whether the special image as a pending display that is to be displayed this time is a special image corresponding to a watermelon. More specifically, it is determined whether the special image to start displaying this time is one of the second special image P2, the sixth special image P6, and the seventh special image P7. As mentioned above, in the game in the 2nd BB state, it is easy to win a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon, and the watermelon compatible special images of the 2nd special image P2, 6th special image P6, and 7th special image P7 are AT in the 2nd BB state. If you are eligible for the mode transition lottery, you are likely to win.

Therefore, if the special image to start displaying this time is the watermelon-compatible special image described above, the process advances to step S3712, and the current gaming state is not the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, and before winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB. It is determined whether the state is as follows. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3712, the process advances to step S3713, where a process is executed to display an advantageous display at the time of winning the second BB as the current status display, and then the status display start process is ended. The 2nd BB winning advantage display is a notification that suggests that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery if the target special image is in the 2nd BB state in the game that is the target of the AT mode transition lottery. As an advantageous display when winning the 2nd BB, for example, while pointing to the special image that will start displaying this time (in a speech bubble), three characters with the "White BAR" pattern corresponding to the 2nd BB winning are displayed, and "White BAR White BAR It is preferable to display a message that reads "AT chance at white BAR" (see FIG. 90(b)).

If a negative determination is made in step S3712, the process advances to step S3714. In step S3714, it is determined whether the current gaming state is not the first BB state or the second BB state, but is a carryover state after winning the second BB. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3714, the process advances to step S3715, where a second countdown display is performed as the current status display, and then the status display start process is ended. The second countdown display is a notification that suggests that it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery if the target special image is in the 2nd BB state by the game targeted for the AT mode transition lottery, and has already been won. This is a notice that suggests that the second BB who is currently in the position should be immediately entered into the prize. As the second countdown display, for example, while pointing to the special image that will start displaying this time (in a speech bubble), three characters with the "White BAR" pattern corresponding to the 2nd BB winnings are displayed, and "White BAR within 9 games" is displayed. It is preferable to display the following message: ``White BAR White BAR Wins!!'' (see FIG. 89(b)). In this case, since the special image to be displayed this time is the target game for the AT mode transition lottery after 10 games, by establishing the 2nd BB prize within 9 games, which is one game before that, the target special image The point that the image is displayed in the second BB state is similar to the first countdown display.

If a negative determination is made in step S3714, the process advances to step S3716. In step S3716, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the second BB state. In the case of the second BB state, it is determined in step S3717 whether the remaining number of payouts up to the upper limit number of payouts in the second BB state is greater than 45 coins. If it is determined in step S3717 that the remaining number of payouts is 45 or less, the process for starting the status display is directly ended. In this case, no status display is performed for the special image that is to be displayed this time.

If it is determined in step S3717 that the remaining number of payouts is greater than 45, the process advances to step S3718. In step S3718, it is determined whether the remaining number of payouts is greater than 70 coins. If there are more than 70 sheets, in step S3719, a process for displaying a response chance as the current status display is executed, and then the status display start process is ended. The response chance display is as described above.

If a negative determination is made in step S3718, in step S3720, a process for displaying an end delay display is executed as the current status display, and then the status display start process is ended. The display for delaying completion is as described above.

By the way, in the process for starting the status display described above, for example, if a status display has already occurred for another special image, the start of the status display for the current special image is restricted (not allowed to start, status display is not started). It is recommended that the configuration be configured such that the By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game content from becoming complicated due to overlapping status displays.

<Status display update process>
Next, as a configuration related to status display, a status display update process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87. The status display update process is a process executed in step S3605 when shifting the hold display in the hold shift process.

In step S3801, it is determined whether status display is being executed. If the status display is not being executed, there is nothing to be updated, so the status display update process ends. If the status display is being executed, the process advances to step S3802. In step S3802, it is determined whether the special image targeted for status display has been shifted to the fifth unit reservation display area Dr5 by the current shift process. If it has been shifted to the fifth unit pending display area Dr5, in step S3803, the process for terminating the status display for the shifted special image is performed, and then the status display update process is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, the status display is started when the special image is displayed in the tenth unit reservation display area Dr10, and is ended when the special image is shifted to the fifth unit reservation display area Dr5. In other words, the situation display is performed from 10 games before to 6 games before the pre-obtained AT counter C becomes the target of the AT mode transition lottery, and the situation from 5 games before to 1 game before (this game also) Display execution is restricted. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 90(b), in a situation where the second special image P2 in the sixth unit reservation display area Dr6 is displayed as an advantageous display when the second BB is won, the second BB is won. If the target second special image P2 is shifted to the fifth unit reservation display area Dr5 without any error, the second winning advantageous display is terminated at the time of the shift. By doing this, suggestions that are relatively difficult to achieve, such as an advantageous display when winning the 1st BB or an advantageous display when winning the 2nd BB, can be used to reduce the number of remaining games before becoming eligible for the AT mode transition lottery. By continuing to display even the slightest situation, it is possible to prevent the player from losing motivation.

Note that whether or not the display continues may be changed depending on the content of the status display being displayed. For example, if the status display being displayed is an advantageous display when winning the 1st BB or an advantageous display when winning the 2nd BB, the status display is ended when shifting to the 5th unit reservation display area Dr5, while other status displays ( 1 countdown display, second countdown display, response chance display, end delay display), the situation display may not be ended when shifting to the fifth unit reservation display area Dr5. Further, the timing at which the display ends may be different, and if the status display being displayed is an advantageous display when winning the 1st BB or an advantageous display when winning the 2nd BB, the relevant situation is changed when shifting to the fifth unit reservation display area Dr5. While the display ends, if there are other status displays (first countdown display, second countdown display, response chance display, end delay display), when shifting to the third unit pending display area Dr3 (fifth unit pending display). When shifting to an area different from the display area Dr5, the status display may be ended (at a later timing than the shift to the fifth unit reservation display area Dr5).

If a negative determination is made in step S3802, the process advances to step S3804. In step S3804, it is determined whether the status display to be updated is an advantageous display when winning the first BB or an advantageous display when winning the second BB. If it is an advantageous display when any BB is won, the process advances to step S3805, and it is determined whether or not the corresponding BB winning notification has been made. More specifically, when the 1st BB winning advantageous display is being executed, the bonus winning notification performance (step S2406) is performed, and as a notification of the type of bonus that is the target of the bonus winning notification performance. If a notification effect indicating that the 1st BB has been won is generated, an affirmative determination is made in step S3805, and if an advantageous display for winning the 2nd BB is being executed, a bonus winning notification effect (step S2406) is made. is carried out, and when a notification effect indicating that the second BB has been won is generated as a notification of the type of bonus targeted for the bonus winning notification effect, an affirmative determination is made in step S3805. In other words, even if the 1st BB winning advantage display is being executed and the bonus winning notification performance (step S2406) is performed, the bonus that is the target of the bonus winning notification performance is If the type of bonus is not notified or if a notification effect indicating that the 2nd BB has been won is generated as a notification of the bonus type, a negative determination is made in step S3805, and an advantageous display is executed when the 2nd BB is won. Even if the bonus winning notification effect (step S2406) is performed, the type of bonus that is the subject of the bonus winning notification effect may not be notified, or the bonus winning notification effect may not be announced. If a notification of winning the first BB is generated as the type of notification, a negative determination is made in step S3805. When a negative determination is made in step S3805, in step S3806, a process is performed to continue displaying the currently executed BB winning advantageous display, and then the present status display update process is ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3805, in step S3806, the display content is switched to a countdown display for the target bonus, and then the status display update process is ended. In this case, in the countdown display, the number of games remaining in the countdown is determined according to the number of games to be eligible for the AT mode transition lottery, and the number of games is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 89(a), in a situation where the first special image P1 in the seventh unit reservation display area Dr7 is displayed as an advantage when winning the first BB, the bonus for winning the first BB is When the winning notification effect occurs, the target first special image P1 is shifted to the sixth unit pending display area Dr6, and the first countdown display is ``Within 5 games, 7 7 7 It would be good to display a message that says, “Let me win!”

Therefore, when a BB winning advantageous display is being performed, the BB winning advantageous display ends before the bonus winning notification effect occurs, so that the bonus win may be detected before the winning notification effect. It is now possible to resolve the issue. In addition, even if you win the 2nd BB when the 1st BB winning advantageous display is displayed, or if you win the 1st BB when the 2nd BB winning advantageous display is displayed, the type of bonus will be notified. Until this happens, the advantageous display for winning BB will continue to be displayed. Further, even if the type of bonus is notified, if the type of bonus is different from the target type, the BB win advantageous display is continuously displayed. By doing this, it is possible to maintain the expectation of winning the target bonus.

If a negative determination is made in step S3804, the process advances to step S3808. In step S3808, it is determined whether the status display to be updated is the first countdown display or the second countdown display. If any of the countdown displays is displayed, it is determined in step S3809 whether or not a corresponding BB win was achieved in the previous game. That is, it is determined whether the current game is a game in the target first BB state or second BB state. If a negative determination is made in step S3809, the countdown display is updated in step S3810, and then the status display update process is ended. In the countdown display update process, the display of the number of remaining games is updated by subtracting 1 in accordance with the shift of the special image.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3809, in step S3811, the display content is switched to the correspondence chance display, and then the present status display update process is ended. For example, as shown in FIG. 89(b), in a situation where the second countdown display is performed for the sixth special image P6 in the seventh unit reservation display area Dr7, if the second BB winning is established, the second It is recommended to switch the countdown display to the response chance display.

If a negative determination is made in step S3808, the process advances to step S3812. In step S3812, it is determined whether the status display to be updated is a response opportunity display. If it is a corresponding chance display, it is determined in step S3813 whether or not the remaining number of payouts up to the upper limit number of payouts in the current bonus state is greater than 45 coins. If the remaining number of payouts is greater than 45 coins, in step S3814, a process is performed to continue displaying the corresponding chance, and then the status display update process is ended. If the remaining number of payouts is 45 or less, in step S3815, the display contents are switched to the end delay display, and then the status display update process is ended. For example, as shown in FIG. 90(a), in a situation where the response chance display is performed for the fifth special image P5 in the seventh unit reservation display area Dr7, the remaining payout number becomes 45 or less, and the target When the fifth special image P5 is shifted to the sixth unit pending display area Dr6, it is preferable to switch to the end delay display.

Here, the case where it is determined that the remaining number of payouts is 45 or less in step S3813 means, for example, when the corresponding chance display is started in a situation where the remaining number of payouts is 72, 9 A case is assumed in which a number of medals are paid out, the remaining number of medals to be paid out becomes 45, and the medals are shifted to the sixth unit reservation display area Dr6. Since the status display is ended by shifting to the fifth unit hold display area Dr5, the case where it is determined that the remaining payout number is 45 or less in the situation where the response chance display is performed in step S3813 is the case where the response chance is displayed. This is a case where the game is started in a situation where the chance display is 71 or 72 medals, and nine medals are paid out in three consecutive games from the start. In other words, if the corresponding chance display is started when the number of remaining payouts is 73 or more, even if 9 medals are paid out in 3 consecutive games from the start, it is determined in step S3813 that there are 45 or less medals remaining. Even if the response chance display starts with 71 or 72 medals, if 9 medals are not paid out at least once in the first three games, the process goes to step S3813. It is not determined that the number of sheets is 45 or less.

If it is determined in step S3812 that a response chance display is being performed, it means that the status display to be updated is an end delay display. In this case, the end delay display is continued in step S3816, and then the status display update process is ended.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In a configuration in which the AT counter C is acquired in advance and stored in the lottery information storage area 106f, and the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the stored AT counter C and the game lottery result, the transition of the game state is performed. Even if this occurs, the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT counter C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f. That is, the AT mode transition lottery can be performed at the BB time using the AT counter C acquired during the normal time, and the AT mode transition lottery can be performed at the normal time using the AT counter C acquired at the BB time. The lottery result of the game may be different between the normal time and the BB time, and even if the same AT counter C is used, the probability of winning the AT mode transition may be different. By using such a relationship, depending on the AT counter C that has been obtained in advance, there will be cases where it is better to transition to the BB state and cases where it is not, for example, in normal times. At the same time, it is possible to enjoy the AT mode transition lottery.

The winning probability of the specific winning combination that triggers the AT mode transition lottery is different between normal times and BB times. By doing this, it becomes possible to make a difference in whether or not to cause a transition to the BB state in normal times depending on the AT counter C that has been obtained in advance, and to improve the above-mentioned gameplay. It becomes possible to realize this.

The first BB state and the second BB state are configured to have different winning probabilities for the specific combination that triggers the AT mode transition lottery. By doing this, depending on the relationship with the AT counter C that has been acquired in advance, whether to transition to the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state in normal times will be different, and not only the transition timing but also the transition destination. It becomes possible to enjoy the AT mode transition lottery while taking into account the state.

In addition, the information about winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is held as the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag until the 1st BB winning or the 2nd BB winning occurs. Then, in relation to the AT counter C, the winning game of the winning BB can be adjusted.

As a pending display when each AT counter C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f becomes a target of the AT mode transition lottery, what kind of lottery result in that game would be required to win the AT mode transition lottery? Or, it is configured to specify whether the AT mode transition is likely to be won, and display each special image P1 to P10 as a notification corresponding to the specified result. By doing this, it is possible to have the player try the game after understanding what kind of lottery result should be obtained from the pending display, and it is possible to improve the gameplay when performing the AT mode transition lottery. can be dramatically improved.

Moreover, in addition to the pending displays such as special images P1 to P10, the status display informs whether or not a state transition should occur, so the AT counter C is consumed every game and the situation is updated moment by moment. In changing gameplay, it becomes possible to easily understand the game contents. This allows players who are not used to playing games to understand not only what lottery results they should draw based on the contents of the pending display, but also whether or not to shift their gaming state. It becomes possible to have the player play the game while playing the game.

In the random number acquisition process, the AT counter C is acquired regardless of whether the advantageous section flag is set. By doing this, the phenomenon that AT counter C is not obtained when moving to an advantageous section is less likely to occur, and the AT mode transition lottery using AT counter C can be suitably carried out from the time of winning the transfer to an advantageous section. It becomes possible to do so.

On the other hand, a pending display as a pre-read notification of the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C occurs after transition to the advantageous section. By doing this, we can provide advance notification of AT mode transition lottery to the extent that it does not contradict the meaning of the step-by-step lottery, such as transitioning from a normal section to an advantageous section and receiving an AT mode transition lottery in the advantageous section. It becomes possible to do so.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment described above, the special image as a hold display is displayed when a hold display lottery is won which is carried out individually for each hold (AT counter C), but a predetermined condition is met. Based on the fact that the holding display has been selected, the holding display may be displayed even if the holding display lottery is not won. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the hold display process in this modification.

In the hold display process in this modification, it is determined in step S3901 whether the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set, and in step S3902 it is determined whether an AT command has been received. In step S3903, processing is performed to store the information of the AT counter C in the corresponding area based on the received AT command. The processing from step S3901 to step S3903 described above is similar to the processing from step S3501 to step S3503 described above.

After performing the process in step S3903, in this modification, it is determined in step S3904 whether or not a bonus winning notification effect has occurred and the type of bonus has also been notified. More specifically, at the start of this game, as part of the bet time effect setting process, a bonus winning notification effect was set that included an effect indicating whether it was the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win, and whether the said effect occurred. Determine whether or not. If it has not occurred, in steps S3905 to S3910, processing is performed to generate a pending display through a pending display lottery process. The processing from step S3905 to step S3910 is similar to the processing from step S3504 to step S3509 described above.

If it is determined in step S3904 that a bonus winning notification effect has occurred at the start of the current game, the process advances to step S3911. In step S3911, it is determined whether there is a unit pending display area that is not displayed (no special image is displayed) due to non-winning of the pending display lottery. If it exists, the process advances to step S3912, and information on the AT counter C is acquired from the storage area of the hold information storage area 183c corresponding to the unit hold display area with the smallest number among the undisplayed unit hold display areas. Perform processing. Then, in step S3913, a special image table is acquired, in step S3914 a special image selection process is executed, and in step S3915, a process of displaying the selected special image in the corresponding unit pending display area is executed. These processes are similar to the processes when winning the pending display lottery.

After executing the process in step S3915, the process returns to step S3911, and it is determined whether or not an undisplayed unit pending display area still exists. When the special image is displayed in all unit pending display areas, a negative determination is made in step S3911. If the special images are displayed in all the unit pending display areas, the process advances to step S3916, and a process is performed to select the special image for status display from among the special images displayed this time. In this case, since the bonus winning notification has already been made as described above, the status display will be either the first countdown display or the second countdown display, and the first countdown display or the second countdown display The corresponding special image becomes the object of the status display. More specifically, if you have won the 1st BB, the cherry special image will be displayed, and if you have won the 2nd BB, the watermelon special image will be displayed. . If there are multiple special images that can be the target of the countdown display, the special image corresponding to the area with the smallest number among the storage areas of the pending information storage area 183c is selected as the target of the current status display. Select as.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 92, for example, in a situation where special images are displayed in the second unit reservation display area Dr2 and the sixth unit reservation display area Dr6, a bonus winning notification effect for winning the first BB When this occurs, specific notification is started in the unit pending display area where the special image was not displayed. More specifically, in response to the bonus winning notification performance, the first unit pending display area Dr1, the third unit pending display area Dr3 to the fifth unit pending display area Dr5, and the seventh unit pending display area Dr7 to the tenth unit pending display area are displayed. A special image is displayed in area Dr10. In this case, the special images corresponding to these unit reservation display areas Dr1, Dr3 to Dr5, and Dr7 to Dr9 were once non-winners in the reservation display lottery, and the bonus winning notification performance is based on such non-winners. It can be said that this is an opportunity to display what has become. In addition, regarding the 10th unit pending display area Dr10, since a special image is displayed without going through the pending display lottery, the bonus winning notification performance may limit the execution of the pending display lottery or execute the pending display lottery. This could be seen as an opportunity to restrict the possibility of being ineligible.

In FIG. 92, among the newly displayed special images, the first special image P1 as a cherry special image is displayed in the seventh unit reservation display area Dr7, and the first special image P1 targeted for the first special image P1 is A countdown display starts as a status display.

By doing the above, when any BB is won in the normal time and a transition from the normal time to the BB time becomes possible, each AT counter C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f It becomes possible to know the contents of That is, in the AT mode transition lottery, the contents of the AT counter C can be grasped by the pending display in a situation where it is possible to transition to a state where the winning probability of the specific combination that triggers the AT mode transition lottery is different. In this way, for example, it would be possible to create a configuration that does not display any hold display during normal times, so that it does not feel bothersome in terms of performance, and it would also be possible to pinpoint the hold display when necessary. By performing the display, it is also possible to suitably expect the effect of the suspension display.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, when the type of bonus won is announced, if there is no special image corresponding to the won bonus among the displayed special images, the bonus won will not be won until the corresponding special image is displayed. delay. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the BB winning game adjustment process executed by the display control device 81. The BB winning game adjustment process is, for example, a process executed in the other start effect setting process (step S2511) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 59), and is a process that is executed when the game is started based on the operation of the start lever 41. Executed when starting.

In step S4001, it is determined whether or not a bonus winning notification was executed as the immediately preceding bet performance. If the bonus winning notification has been made, it is determined in step S4002 whether or not the first BB winning notification has been made. If it is the first BB winning notification, it is determined in step S4003 whether a cherry-based special image is displayed in any unit pending display area. Note that if this modification is applied to modification 1, the unit pending display area that newly starts displaying in response to the bonus winning notification may also be subject to the determination in step S4003. If a cherry special image is displayed in any unit pending display area, the status display of the first countdown display for the cherry special image is started by the status display start process or the status display update process. This is the case. That is, by quickly winning the first BB prize, the AT counter C corresponding to the cherry-based special image can bring the game targeted for the AT mode transition lottery into the first BB state. In step S4003, if the cherry special image is displayed in any of the unit pending display areas, the main BB winning game adjustment process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4003 that the cherry-based special image is not displayed in any of the unit reservation display areas, in step S4005, the process of displaying the winning delay is executed, and then the main BB The winning game adjustment process ends. Delayed winning display means that the winning BB is not immediately entered into a prize, but the BB winning is delayed until a special image corresponding to the winning BB is displayed (until the AT counter C corresponding to the winning BB is acquired). This is a display to inform you that there is a situation where you should do so. More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 94, when a bonus winning notification effect for winning the 1st BB occurs, the cherry special image corresponding to the 1st BB is not displayed in each unit reservation display area. In this case, a message indicating that BB winning should be avoided is displayed until the first special image P1, fourth special image P4, or fifth special image P5 is displayed as the cherry-based special image.

The case where it is determined that the bonus winning notification performance executed in step S4002 does not correspond to the first BB means that it corresponds to the second BB. In this case, the process advances to step S4004, and it is determined whether or not a watermelon-related special image is displayed in any of the unit reservation display areas. If a watermelon special image is displayed in any unit pending display area, the status display of the second countdown display for the watermelon special image is started by the status display start process or the status display update process. This is the case. In other words, by quickly winning the 2nd BB prize, the AT counter C corresponding to the watermelon special image can bring the game targeted for the AT mode transition lottery into the 2nd BB state. In step S4004, if a watermelon-related special image is displayed in any of the unit pending display areas, the main BB winning game adjustment process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4004 that the watermelon-related special image is not displayed in any of the unit reservation display areas, in step S4005, a process for displaying delayed prize winning is executed, and then the main BB The winning game adjustment process ends. In the winning delay display in this case, it is preferable to display that the BB winning should be avoided until the second special image P2, the sixth special image P6, or the seventh special image P7 is displayed as the watermelon-related special image.

If it is determined in step S4001 that a bonus winning effect is not being performed in the current game, the process advances to step S4006. In step S4006, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned winning delay display is being executed. If the winning delay display is not being performed, the main BB winning game adjustment process is immediately ended. If the winning delay display is being performed, the process advances to step S4007, and it is determined whether or not the first BB is being carried over. The case where the first BB is being carried over is the case where a winning delay display indicating that the BB winning should be avoided until the above-mentioned cherry-based special image is displayed is performed. In this case, in step S4008, it is determined whether or not the cherry special image was displayed in the tenth unit pending display area Dr10 in the pending display process of the previous game (based on the third stop OFF operation). When the cherry special image is displayed, in step S4010, processing is performed to end the winning delay display. After a winning instruction is displayed in step S4011, this BB winning game adjustment process is ended. The winning instruction display is a display for notifying that the situation has come such that a BB winning should be established immediately. For example, as shown in FIG. 94, when the fifth special image P5 is displayed as a cherry-based special image on Dr10 in the tenth unit reservation display area in a situation where the winning delay display corresponding to the first BB is being displayed, It is preferable to immediately display on the auxiliary display section 65 that the first BB prize will be won (for example, display "Aim for Red 7"!!).

If it is determined in step S4007 that the first BB is not being carried over, it means that the second BB is being carried over, and the BB won until the watermelon special image is displayed as the winning delay display during execution. This is a case where a winning delay display is displayed to the effect that this should be avoided. In this case, in step S4009, it is determined whether or not a watermelon-type special image was displayed in the tenth unit pending display area Dr10 in the pending display process of the previous game (based on the third stop OFF operation). When the watermelon-related special image is displayed, processing is performed to end the winning delay display in step S4010, and a winning instruction display is performed in step S4011, and then the present BB winning game adjustment process is ended.

As described above, in relation to the BB state in which the transition is possible, it is determined whether the pre-obtained AT counter C is likely to result in a transition to AT mode, and the transition to the BB state is promptly caused. By notifying whether or not this is the case, it becomes possible to realize not only a game in which the player simply aims to win the BB, which is likely to become an AT mode transition win, but also a game in which the transition timing of the BB state is adjusted after the BB win.

In particular, in this modification, after a state transition becomes possible, the AT counter C corresponding to the state in which the transition is possible is acquired (the state remains unchanged until the corresponding AT counter C is acquired). Therefore, in the game where the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT counter C acquired in advance, the AT counter provided for the AT mode transition lottery from among the acquired AT counters C. It becomes possible to play a game in which the player selects C. As a result, the players themselves can participate in the AT mode transition lottery, which greatly improves the fun of the game.

Incidentally, the end delay display in the first embodiment is a notification indicating that the current state should be maintained until the target special image becomes a target of the AT mode transition lottery, and the end delay display described above is is a notification indicating that the current state should be maintained until the AT counter C corresponding to the target special image is acquired.

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment described above, the description has been made on the assumption that the pattern arrangement is such that the first BB winnings and the second BB winnings can be drawn separately. Good too. In addition, in the bonus winning notification performance in the third modification, the type of notification as to which of the first BB and the second BB has been won is not performed.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an outline of the arrangement of symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in this modification. In addition, in FIG. 95, only the "Red 7" symbol corresponding to the 1st BB prize winning and the "White BAR" symbol corresponding to the 2nd BB winning are displayed, and other symbols ("cherry" symbol and "1st BB" symbol) are displayed. "Replay" symbols, etc.) are omitted. In addition, in this modification 3, in the 3-bet game, in addition to the downward-sloping line L4, the middle line L2 and the upward-sloping line L5 are also set as valid lines.

In this modification, a "white BAR" symbol is placed at the 17th position on the left reel 32L, and a "red 7" symbol is placed at the 18th position adjacent to it. On the middle reel 32M, a "Red 7" symbol is placed at the 17th position, and a "White BAR" symbol is placed at the 18th position adjacent to it. On the right reel 32R, a "Red 7" symbol is placed at the 18th position, and a "White BAR" symbol is placed at the 19th position adjacent to it.

In this case, for example, if you try to make the 1st BB win and stop the left reel 32L by aiming at the 18th "Red 7" symbol, and the 18th "Red 7" symbol stops at the top row, the 17th "Red 7" symbol stops. The "White BAR" symbol stops in the middle row, leaving room for the 2nd BB prize. In other words, at this point, it is not possible to determine from the stopped numbers whether the first BB winning is achieved or the second BB winning is achieved. Furthermore, as a pinch press, after that, aim at the 18th "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R and perform a stop operation, and when the 18th "Red 7" symbol stops at the bottom row, the 19th "White BAR" symbol will appear. stops in the middle, leaving room for the second BB prize. In other words, it is impossible to determine whether the first BB winning is achieved or the second BB winning is achieved until the first BB and the second BB become double tenpai and the middle reel 32M is stopped.

In this way, by making it difficult to understand whether the transition to an advantageous bonus state will occur in relation to the special symbol that is displayed as a pending display until a bonus win is established, it is possible to It becomes possible to further enhance the feeling of excitement.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment, a common AT counter C is used in normal times and BB times as a random number for AT mode transition lottery, but in this embodiment, different random numbers are used. FIG. 96 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the lottery information storage area 106f in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the lottery information storage area 106f is provided with an execution area AE and a storage area RE. An area REA and a BB storage area REB are provided for storing random numbers for AT mode transition lottery at BB. The normal storage area REA has a plurality of storage areas, and similarly to the storage area RE in the first embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery for 10 games of the first storage area REA1 to the tenth storage area REA10 is provided. An area is set up in which random number information can be stored. Furthermore, a first storage area REB1 to a tenth storage area REB10 are also set in the BB storage area REB.

That is, in this embodiment, as the random number information for the AT mode transition lottery, the first storage area REA1 to the tenth storage area REB10 in the normal storage area REA and the first storage area REB1 to the first storage area REB1 to the tenth storage area REB10 in the BB storage area REB are used. 10 storage areas REB10, each of which can store random number information for the AT mode transition lottery for 10 games.

In this embodiment, a normal AT counter CA is provided in various counter areas 106e as a random number for AT mode transition lottery for normal times, and a BB AT counter CA is provided in various counter areas 106e as a random number for AT mode transition lottery for BB. A CB is provided. Both the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB, like the AT counter C in the first embodiment, are sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 1 to 128, and reach the maximum value (that is, 128). This is a loop counter that returns to 1. The normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB are updated regularly, and are incremented by 1 each time a timer interrupt process is activated, for example.

Note that the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB also use dedicated free run counters and hardware circuits, just like the free run counters and hardware circuits used to determine the validity of winning combinations. Before the acquisition timing of the AT counter CB for CA and BB (for example, during the third stop OFF operation), the relevant hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter and acquires the AT counter CA for normal use and the AT counter CB for BB. The latched value may be read from time to time.

The AT mode transition lottery table when the normal AT counter CA is used and the AT mode transition lottery table when the BB AT counter CB is used are collectively shown in FIG.

When the AT mode transition lottery is held, the values for winning the AT mode transition are different between the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB, corresponding to strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon. , and the values in other game results are common. More specifically, the BB AT counter CB has more values associated with it than the normal AT counter CA as the values for winning the AT mode transition at the time of strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon. In the AT mode transition lottery held for strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon, it is easier to win in the lottery using the BB AT counter CB than the lottery using the normal AT counter CA. is set to . In addition, the values corresponding to strong cherries and weak cherries have a relationship in which the value of the normal AT counter CA is included in the value of the BB AT counter CB, and the values corresponding to strong watermelon and weak watermelon are the values of the normal AT counter CA. The value of CA and the value of BB AT counter CB are set to have different relationships.

In more detail, the normal AT counter CA has "1" to "64" associated with it as the winning value for the AT mode transition lottery held when a strong cherry is won, whereas the BB AT counter CB , "1" to "95" are associated. In addition, the normal AT counter CA has "1" to "18" associated with it as the winning value for the AT mode shift lottery held when a weak cherry is won, whereas the BB AT counter CB has "1" to "18". 1” to “32” are associated with each other. In other words, the winning values at the time of a strong cherry or a weak cherry are set so that the value of the BB AT counter CB includes the value of the normal AT counter CA.

On the other hand, in the normal AT counter CA, "5" to "8" and "65" to "94" are associated as winning values in the AT mode transition lottery held when a strong watermelon is won. On the other hand, in the BB AT counter CB, "5" to "8" are associated with "33" to "58" and "95" to "128". In addition, the normal AT counter CA associates "5" with "65" to "76" as the winning value for the AT mode transition lottery held when winning a weak watermelon, whereas for BB In the AT counter CB, "5" is associated with "33" to "58". That is, except for "5" to "8" for strong watermelon and "5" for weak watermelon, the other values are set to be different values from each other.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the random number acquisition process is a process executed based on the third stop OFF operation among the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44.

In step S4101, it is determined whether the game to be ended this time is a game in the bonus state of the first BB state or the second BB state. If the bonus state is not in progress, the process advances to step S4102, and processing for acquiring the normal AT counter CA is executed. Then, in step S4103, the normal AT counter CA acquired in step S4102 is stored in the corresponding storage area in the normal storage area REA. More specifically, a process is executed to store the normal AT counter CA in the area with the smallest number (basically the 10th storage area REA10) among the empty areas in each of the storage areas REA1 to REA10. Thereafter, in step S4104, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set, and if it is set, the normal AT command A is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4105. Execute processing. The normal AT command A is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp the information of the normal AT counter CA stored in each storage area REA of the normal storage area REA.

If the advantageous section flag is not set in step S4104, or after executing the process in step S4105, the process advances to step S4106. In step S4106, the BB storage area REB is checked, and it is determined whether the BB AT counter CB is stored in all of the storage areas REB1 to REB10. If it is stored in all areas, the present random number acquisition process is ended. If there is an area in which no data is stored, the process advances to step S4107 to execute processing to obtain the BB AT counter CB. Then, in step S4108, processing is performed to store the BB AT counter CB acquired in step S4107 in the corresponding storage area in the BB storage area REB. More specifically, processing is executed to store the BB AT counter CB in the area with the smallest number among the empty areas in each of the storage areas REB1 to REB10. Then, in step S4109, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set, and if it is set, in step S4110, AT command B for BB is set as an output target to the display control device 81. After executing the process, this random number acquisition process ends. The BB AT command B is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp the information of the BB AT counter CB stored in each storage area REB of the BB storage area REB. If the advantageous section flag is not set in step S4109, the random number acquisition process is directly terminated.

That is, in the random number acquisition process when the bonus state is not in progress, the normal AT counter CA is acquired and stored in the corresponding storage area, and the BB AT counter is stored on the condition that there is a free area in the BB storage area REB. It also performs CB acquisition processing and storage processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4101 that the bonus state is in progress, the process advances to step S4111 and performs the reverse process of steps S4102 to S4110. That is, the BB AT counter CB is acquired and stored in the corresponding storage area, and the normal AT counter CA is also acquired and stored on the condition that there is a free area in the normal storage area REA.

More specifically, in step S4111, the process of acquiring the BB AT counter CB is executed, and in step S4112, the process of storing the BB AT counter CB in the area with the lowest number among the free areas of the BB storage area REB. I do. Then, in step S4113, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set, and if it is set, a process of setting AT command B for BB is executed in step S4114. If the advantageous section flag is not set in step S4113, or after executing the process in step S4114, in step S4115, check whether the normal AT counter CA is stored in all areas of the normal storage area REA. Determine whether or not. If it is stored in all areas, the random number acquisition process is immediately terminated. If there is a free area, the normal AT counter CA is acquired in step S4116, and the normal AT counter CA is placed in the smallest numbered area among the free areas in the normal storage area REA in step S4117. Perform the storage process. If the advantageous section flag is set in step S4118, the normal AT command A is set in step S4119, and then the random number acquisition process ends. If the advantageous section flag is not set, the random number acquisition process is ended without setting the normal AT command A.

Next, the random number shift process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 99. As already explained, the random number shift process is a process executed in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 31) at the start of the game (step S701).

In step S4201, it is determined whether the current game is a game in the bonus state of the first BB state or the second BB state. If the bonus state is not in progress, the process advances to step S4202 and shifts processing of the normal storage area REA is performed. That is, in step S4202, the normal AT counter CA stored in the first storage area REA1 among the storage areas REA1 to REA10 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the normal AT counter CA stored in the first storage area REA1 is shifted to the execution area AE. Performs processing to clear the information in the normal AT counter CA. In the AT mode transition lottery in the first specific combination processing (FIG. 33), information corresponding to the normal AT counter CA stored in the execution area AE is acquired as random number information used in the current AT mode transition lottery. do. That is, the AT mode transition lottery in normal times, not in the bonus state, is performed based on the normal AT counter CA out of the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB that have been acquired in advance.

Subsequent step S4203 performs a process of shifting the normal AT counter CA stored in each storage area REA2 to REA10 to the lower area side. Specifically, the information stored in the second storage area REA2 is stored in the first storage area REA1, the information stored in the second storage area REA2 is cleared, and in turn, the information stored in the third storage area REA3 is cleared. The information in each area is shifted in the following order: → second storage area REA2, fourth storage area REA4 → third storage area REA3... tenth storage area REA10 → ninth storage area REA9. In this case, information is only shifted from the tenth storage area REA10 to the ninth storage area REA9, and no new information is shifted. In other words, the information in the tenth storage area REA10 is cleared, and the tenth storage area REA10 becomes an empty area.

If it is determined in step S4201 that the bonus state is in progress, the process advances to step S4204, and a shift process of the BB storage area REB is performed. That is, in step S4204, the BB AT counter CB stored in the first storage area REB1 among the storage areas REB1 to REB10 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the BB AT counter CB stored in the first storage area REB1 is shifted to the execution area AE. Performs processing to clear information in the BB AT counter CB. In the AT mode transition lottery in the first specific combination processing (FIG. 33), information corresponding to the BB AT counter CB stored in the execution area AE is acquired as random number information used in the current AT mode transition lottery. do. That is, the AT mode transition lottery during the bonus state is performed based on the BB AT counter CB, out of the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB, which have been obtained in advance.

Subsequent step S4204 performs a process of shifting the BB AT counter CB stored in each storage area REB2 to REB10 to the lower area side. Specifically, this is the same as the shift of the normal storage area REA, and the tenth storage area REB10 becomes a vacant area by this shift process.

After executing the process of step S4203 or step S4205, it is determined in step S42006 whether the advantageous section flag is set. If the advantageous section flag is set, in step S4207 a process is executed to set the shift command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the random number shift process is ended. If the advantageous section flag is not set in step S4206, the random number shift process is immediately terminated.

Although detailed explanation with figures is omitted, the reservation information storage area 183c of the display control device 81 in this embodiment is set with a normal reservation information storage area and a BB reservation information storage area. Similarly to the normal storage area REA and the BB storage area REB on the main control device 101 side, each can store information on 10 random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery.

As shown in FIG. 100(a), in this embodiment, a normal hold display area Dra and a BB hold display area Drb are set at the lower part of the auxiliary display section 65 as predetermined display areas. A hold display area Dra and a BB hold display area Drb are set as areas arranged vertically. The normal hold display area Dra is partitioned so that the same number of unit hold display areas Dra1 to Dra10 as the maximum number of normal AT counters CA stored in the normal storage area REA are arranged side by side in the left and right direction. . Further, the BB reservation display area Drb is also divided into unit reservation display areas Drb1 to Drb10 of the same number as the maximum number of BB AT counters CB stored in the BB storage area REB, which are arranged side by side in the left and right direction. ing. In addition, an execution hold information storage area 183c is provided on the left side (left side of the first unit hold display area Dra1 and the first unit hold display area Drb1) in parallel with the normal hold display area Dra and the BB hold display area Drb. An execution display area Dp is set for displaying the normal AT counter CA or the BB AT counter CB stored in the area AE on hold.

Detailed explanations using figures regarding the hold display process (FIG. 79) and hold shift process (FIG. 81) on the display control device 81 side will be omitted, but in the hold display process in this embodiment, the normal When AT command A for BB is received, the information of the normal AT counter CA is stored in the corresponding area of the normal hold information storage area, and when AT command B for BB is received, the information of the normal AT counter CA is stored in the BB hold information storage area. The information of the BB AT counter CB is stored in the corresponding area (step S3503). Then, a hold display lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform a hold display based on the counter acquired this time (step S3504), and if the hold display lottery is won, a corresponding special image is displayed (step S3508).

In the pending shift process in this embodiment, based on the reception of the shift command, the special image in the execution display area Dp is cleared (step S3602), and the first unit pending display on the side that is currently shifted is cleared. A process of shifting the special image of the area to the execution display area Dp is performed (step S3603). More specifically, if the shift command is output when the normal storage area REA is shifted, the special image of the first unit pending display area Dra1 in the normal pending display area Dra is transferred to the execution display area Dp. If the shift command is output when the BB storage area REB is shifted, the special image of the first unit reservation display area Drb1 in the BB reservation display area Drb is moved to the execution display area Dp. shift to.

That is, as shown in FIG. 100(b), in normal times, each special image displayed in the normal reserved display area Dra is shifted for each game and displayed in the execution display area Dp. It is understood that the user is eligible for the AT mode transition lottery. On the other hand, each special image displayed in the BB reservation display area Drb remains on standby without being shifted. In addition, as shown in FIG. 101, during BB, each special image displayed in the BB hold display area Drb is shifted for each game and displayed in the execution display area Dp, thereby transitioning to AT mode. It is understood that the person is eligible for the lottery. On the other hand, each special image displayed in the normal hold display area Dra remains on standby without being shifted.

In other words, during normal times, it is possible to know the special image when it comes to BB time and carry that special image over until winning the BB. can receive the AT mode transition lottery at BB without consuming the special image at normal time. In this way, different AT counters are stored separately, and the AT counter to be consumed (shifted) is selected according to the state, so the AT counter for each state can be handled more reliably. In such a state, it becomes possible to select the AT mode transition lottery.

As described above, in this embodiment, a normal AT counter CA and a BB AT counter CB are provided as random number information used for the AT mode transition lottery, and the normal AT counter CA is used during normal times. An AT mode transition lottery is performed, and at the time of BB, an AT mode transition lottery is performed using the BB AT counter CB.

The AT mode transition lottery is performed using the lottery results of each game in addition to the random number information for lottery such as the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB, which is different from the first embodiment. For example, if the probability of winning the AT mode transition with a predetermined lottery result (for example, strong cherry) is adjusted for each gaming state, the winning probability of the predetermined lottery result will be different for each gaming state. There is a method like this. However, there is a limit to how much the probability of winning a predetermined lottery result in each game can be increased or decreased, and changing the probability of winning a predetermined lottery result may also affect the medal payout rate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the random number information for the lottery associated with the predetermined lottery result is changed so that the AT mode transition win is determined, so that the winning probability of the predetermined lottery result does not change significantly. However, it is possible to change the probability of winning the AT mode transition depending on the gaming state. In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, information on random numbers for lottery is provided for each gaming state, so it is possible to not only determine the probability of winning a transition to AT mode for each gaming state, but also to determine the probability of winning a transition. The degree of freedom in the information on random numbers that can be assigned is greatly improved.

In this case, for example, it is also possible to make the update ranges of the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB different. The minimum probability of a lottery using random numbers is basically the reciprocal of the maximum value (number of random numbers) of the random number update range for that lottery.If you want to lower the minimum probability, you can change the random number. It is better to widen the update range. On the other hand, if the update range of the random numbers is too wide, problems may occur in the configuration, such as complicating the correspondence of lottery tables. In other words, it is preferable that the range of random numbers for the lottery be adjusted based on the winning probability of the target lottery, the processing load, and the like. In this regard, if the update ranges of the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB are configured to be different as described above, it becomes possible to successfully customize the random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery for each state. .

Moreover, in this embodiment, during normal times, AT mode transition lottery is performed using the normal AT counter CA, and the BB AT counter CB is not used or shifted, and during BB, the BB AT counter CB is The AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT mode, and the normal AT counter CA is not used or shifted. Because of this, as in the first embodiment, in normal times, it is necessary to make the bonus winning target before the acquired AT counter C becomes the target of the AT mode transition lottery. Unlike games, in this embodiment, the acquired BB AT counter CB is not consumed during normal times, so it is possible to grasp the advantages and disadvantages of the AT mode transition lottery in the next bonus over a relatively long period of time. becomes. In other words, if the random number for the lottery corresponds to the 1st BB, it will make people expect the next bonus to be the 1st BB, and if it corresponds to the 2nd BB, they will expect the next bonus to be the 2nd BB. The expectations are the same as in the first embodiment, but whereas in the first embodiment the notice was for a short period of time, such as 10 games, which is the number of reserved areas, in this embodiment, the following Since the random numbers for the lottery are held until the bonus is issued, it can be used as a long-term notice. Therefore, it is possible to stimulate expectations for the bonus over a longer period of time.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, a normal AT counter CA and a BB AT counter CB are provided for each gaming state as described above, and a special image corresponding to the normal AT counter CA and a special image corresponding to the BB AT counter CB are provided. In the configuration in which the auxiliary display section 65 displays the auxiliary display section 65 in parallel, the counters CA and CB are shifted regardless of the gaming state. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing random number shift processing in this modification.

In step S4301, it is determined whether the bonus state is in progress. If the bonus state is not in progress, in step S4302, a shift process is performed from the normal storage area REA to the execution area AE. That is, in step S4302, the normal AT counter CA stored in the first storage area REA1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the normal AT counter CA stored in the first storage area REA1 is cleared. conduct. This process is similar to the process in step S4202 above. In the following step S4303, similarly to step S4203, the normal AT counter CA stored in each storage area REA2 to REA10 is shifted to the lower area side.

After executing the process in step S4303, in step S4304, a process is executed to clear the data in the first storage area REB1 of the BB storage area REB. Then, in step S4305, processing is performed to shift the BB AT counter CB stored in each storage area REB2 to REB10 in the BB storage area REB to the lower area side. This process is similar to the process in step S4204 above. That is, in this modification, the BB AT counter CB in the BB storage area REB is shifted even if the player is not in the bonus state and is not eligible for the AT mode transition lottery.

If it is determined in step S4301 that the bonus state is in effect, a shift process is performed in step S4306 from the BB storage area REB to the execution area AE. That is, in step S4306, the BB AT counter CB stored in the first storage area REB1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the BB AT counter CB stored in the first storage area REB1 is cleared. conduct. This process is similar to the process in step S4204 above. In the following step S4307, similarly to step S4205, the BB AT counter CB stored in each storage area REB2 to REB10 is shifted to the lower area side.

After executing the process of step S4307, a process of clearing the data in the first storage area REA1 of the normal storage area REA is executed in step S4308. Then, in step S4309, the normal AT counter CA stored in each of the storage areas REA2 to REA10 in the normal storage area REA is shifted to the lower area side. This process is similar to the process in step S4203 above. That is, in this modification, during the bonus state, the normal AT counter CA in the normal storage area REA is shifted even if it is not a target of the AT mode transition lottery.

After executing the process in step S4305 or step S4309, it is determined in step S4310 whether the advantageous section flag is set, and if it is set, a shift command is sent to the display control device 81 in step S4311. After setting it as the output target, the random number shift processing ends. If the advantageous section flag is not set, the random number shift process is ended without setting the output of the shift command.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 103, in normal times, each special image displayed in the normal reserved display area Dra is shifted for each game and displayed in the execution display area Dp, so that the AT mode It is understood that the applicant will be eligible for the migration lottery. Furthermore, even in normal times, each special image displayed in the BB reservation display area Drb is shifted for each game. In addition, during BB, each special image displayed in the BB reservation display area Drb is shifted for each game and displayed in the execution display area Dp, so that it can become a target of the AT mode transition lottery. be understood. Furthermore, even during BB, each special image displayed in the normal reserved display area Dra is shifted for each game.

In normal times, the special image in the BB reservation display area Drb is not shifted to the execution display area Dp, but is only cleared. Furthermore, during BB, the special image in the normal reserved display area Dra is not shifted to the execution display area Dp, but is only cleared. Therefore, the player can clearly understand which special image in the normal reserved display area Dra and the BB reserved display area Drb is the target of the AT mode transition lottery.

By doing this, it is possible to understand in which gaming state it would be advantageous to receive the AT mode transition lottery by comparing the special images in the normal hold display area Dra and the BB hold display area Drb. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the gameplay using the AT counter obtained in advance.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the game state to which the game transitions after the end is different between the first BB state and the second BB state. That is, as shown in FIG. 104(a), when the first BB state ends, a transition is made to the normal gaming state similarly to each of the above embodiments, but when the second BB state ends, each of the above Unlike the embodiment, it is assumed that the state shifts to the fourth RT state. The fourth RT state is a fixed RT state in which the number of games shifts to the normal gaming state when the specified number of games is played (FIG. 21), and in this modification, 10 games are set as the specified number of games. In this modification, the lottery contents of each game in the 4th RT state have the same or almost the same structure as the lottery contents of each game in the normal gaming state, and compared to the normal gaming state, the lottery contents of each game in the 4th RT state are The difference is that the state does not shift to the first RT state even if the state stops. The lottery table for the fourth RT state may be the same as the lottery table for the normal game state (FIG. 17).

In this modification, the fourth RT state is used as a high probability state in which the AT mode transition is likely to be won in the AT mode transition lottery. That is, as shown in FIG. 105, in the AT mode transition lottery using the normal AT counter CA, the probability of winning the AT mode transition is different in the normal gaming state, the first to third RT states, and the fourth RT state. It's different. More specifically, in the normal game state and the first to third RT states, for strong cherries, "1" to "64" of the normal AT counter CA are set as winning values, In the fourth RT state, for strong cherries, "1" to "128" of the normal AT counter CA are set as winning values. Also, regarding weak cherries, in the normal game state and the first to third RT states, "1" to "18" of the normal AT counter CA are set as winning values, whereas the In the 4RT state, "1" to "128" of the normal AT counter CA are set as winning values. Regarding Strong Watermelon, in the normal game state and the 1st to 3rd RT states, "5" to "8" and "65" to "94" of the normal AT counter CA are set as winning values. On the other hand, in the fourth RT state, "1" to "95" of the normal AT counter CA are set as winning values. Regarding the weak watermelon, in the normal game state and the 1st RT state to 3rd RT state, "5" and "65" to "76" of the normal AT counter CA are set as winning values. , in the fourth RT state, "1" to "95" of the normal AT counter CA are set as winning values. In this way, it is easier to win the AT mode transition in the case of strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon in the fourth RT state than in the normal game state and the first to third RT states.

Furthermore, in this modification, the upper limit payout number that triggers the end is different between the first BB state and the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 104(b), the first BB state is assumed to end when 216 medals are paid out, as in each of the above embodiments, and when 9 medals are paid out every game. In this case, the first BB state ends after 24 games (the shortest). On the other hand, for the second BB state, 36 coins are set as the upper limit number of payouts. That is, in step S612 of the bonus state processing (FIG. 26), if the currently won BB is the first BB, 216 is set, and if it is the second BB, 36 is set. In this case, in the second BB state, if nine medals are paid out in each game, the second BB state will end after four games (the shortest).

In other words, in this modification, when winning the 2nd BB, the number of medals that can be expected to be won in the transitional bonus state is smaller than when winning the 1st BB, but after that, the number of medals that can be expected to be won in the transitional bonus state is smaller than that in the 1st BB winning. Set to 4RT state.

In such a configuration, a normal AT counter CA and a BB AT counter CB are provided for each gaming state in the above modification 1, and a special image corresponding to the normal AT counter CA and a BB AT counter CB are provided. By displaying special images in parallel on the auxiliary display section 65 and then shifting each counter CA, CB regardless of the gaming state, the bonus winning timing and the bonus ending timing can be set on hold. It is possible to have fun in relation to the special image in the display area.

That is, as shown in FIG. 106(a), the first special image P1 is placed in the fourth unit pending display area Drb4 in the BB pending display area Drb among the normal pending display area Dra and the BB pending display area Drb. It is assumed that the second BB is won in a situation where the first special image P1 is displayed in the tenth unit reservation display area Dra10 of the normal reservation display area Dra. As mentioned above, since it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery in the first BB state and the second BB state, the AT mode transition lottery for the first special image P1 of the fourth unit reservation display area Drb4 is not normally held. It is preferable for the player to receive it at BB instead.

In addition, after the second BB state, the transition to the fourth RT state occurs, and since it becomes easier to win the AT mode transition lottery even in the fourth RT state, the AT mode transition for the first special image of the tenth unit reservation display area Dra10 is It is preferable for the player to receive the lottery during the fourth RT state during normal times. Therefore, in this modified example, as a status display for the special image in the tenth unit reservation display area Dra10 as described above, for example, a display such as "After BB is a chance" is displayed.

In this case, for example, if you win the 2nd BB in the game shown in FIG. 106(b), which is the next game to the game shown in FIG. 106(a), the AT You will be able to receive the mode transition lottery. That is, the special image (BB AT counter CB) of the BB reservation display area Drb among the normal reservation display area Dra and the BB reservation display area Drb is used for the AT mode transition lottery.

As described above, the upper limit of the number of coins to be paid out in the second BB state is defined as 36 coins, and if nine coins, which are the maximum number of coins to be paid out in each game, are paid out, the second BB state can be completed in four games at the earliest. In other words, the second BB state can continue for at least four games. Then, the first special image P1 displayed in the fourth unit reservation display area Drb4 in FIG. 106(a) and the third unit reservation display area Drb3 in FIG. 106(b) is at least in the second BB state. It will be used in the AT mode transition lottery.

However, if the lottery result of each game during the second BB state is not a lottery result corresponding to the payout of 9 coins, or the number of coins to be paid out may be small or no payout may occur depending on the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. Then, the second BB state will require more than four games to complete. In that case, the first special image P1 displayed in the 10th unit pending display area Dra10 in FIG. 106(a) and the 9th unit pending display area Dra9 in FIG. Depending on the number, whether or not it will be used for the AT mode transition lottery under normal circumstances, more specifically, under the fourth RT state, will differ.

For example, when the second BB state ends in the shortest four games with nine payouts occurring in each game, the first special image P1 displayed in the ninth unit pending display area Dra9 in FIG. 106(b) is The second BB state ends with the game displayed in the sixth unit pending display area Dra6, and as shown in FIG. 106(c), after the second BB state ends with the game displayed in the fifth unit pending display area A fourth RT state is started. Since the 4th RT state continues for 10 games, the first special image P1 displayed in the 5th unit reservation display area Dra5 is used for the AT mode transition lottery under the situation of the 4th RT state. Become.

On the other hand, if the second BB state ends after 12 games with three coins paid out every game, as shown in FIG. 106(d), the ninth unit reservation display area Dra9 in FIG. 106(b) After the displayed first special image P1 has already been cleared from the normal reserved display area Dra, the fourth RT state after the end of the second BB state is started. That is, in this case, the benefit of the first special image P1 displayed in the ninth unit reservation display area Dra9 in FIG. 106(b) cannot be enjoyed.

As described above, since the minimum number of games to be completed is different depending on whether the transition BB state is the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, the AT counter C corresponding to the currently displayed pending display is The possibility of holding the AT mode transition lottery based on the BB state after the BB state differs. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the type of BB state to which the player will transition, also from the viewpoint of AT mode transition lottery after the BB state.

Moreover, whether or not the second BB state ends with the minimum number of games to be completed depends on the lottery result of the game and the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in that game, so it depends on the element of luck and the technical intervention of the player. These elements are added to the game, and the gameplay of the relationship with the pending display being displayed is further enhanced.

By the way, the lottery results that can be won in each game in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are results that can cause medals to be paid out, and when the ending condition is that the number of medals paid out reaches a specified number, each of the above games It can be said that the lottery results in which a winner can be won constitute part or all of the termination conditions.

Regarding the above modification 2, we will explain the gameplay using the relationship between the first BB state, the second BB state, and the fourth RT state, assuming a configuration using the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB. However, in a configuration in which the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB are shifted regardless of the gaming state, a common AT counter C is used regardless of the gaming state as in the first embodiment to shift the AT mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a transition lottery is performed.

<Third embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, it is assumed that the random numbers "(AT counter C, normal AT counter CA, BB AT counter CB) used in the AT mode transition lottery have already been obtained, and the random numbers used in the AT mode transition lottery are assumed to have been obtained. Although it has been explained that the random number information is replenished in the random number acquisition process, in this embodiment, the explanation will be given in a situation where the random number information for the AT mode transition lottery has not been acquired. That is, as already explained, the random number acquisition process is executed based on the third stop OFF operation, but if the random number information is not stored in the lottery information storage area 106f, the first specific This means that the AT mode transition lottery cannot be executed in the process.Therefore, in this slot machine 10, when the slot machine 10 is powered on, a process is performed to obtain information on the random numbers used for the AT mode transition lottery in advance. In detail, as already explained, when the power is turned on, the main process is started in the main controller 101.The initial random number acquisition process, which is the process for acquiring the random number information used for the AT mode transition lottery, is When the winning probability setting process set during the main process is started, it is set to be started at the same time.

In addition, in the following explanation, a configuration will be described in which the AT counter C in the first embodiment is acquired as random number information for the AT mode transition lottery, but as in the second embodiment, the lottery for each game state In a configuration in which a normal AT counter CA and a BB AT counter CB are provided as random numbers for use, a configuration may be adopted in which acquisition processing is performed for each counter CA and CB, or each counter CA, CB is acquired within the same process. A configuration may also be adopted in which CB is acquired.

As already explained, the winning probability setting process is started when the setting change operation is performed when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned ON when the power is turned on. . When the winning probability setting process is started, the set value is updated by operating the start lever 41, and the set value indicates that the start lever 41 was operated after the setting key detection sensor 73a was turned off. As a confirmation operation, the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is completed.

In the initial random number acquisition process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 107, it is determined in step S4401 whether a setting change operation has been performed. That is, it is determined whether or not the winning probability setting process has been activated. If no setting change operation has been performed, the initial random number acquisition process is immediately terminated.

Here, as already explained, the lottery information storage area 106f is provided in the RAM 106 in the main controller 101, and the winning probability setting process is performed using various information stored in the RAM 106 in the main process when the power is turned on. It is activated when the initialization process (RAM reset process, RAM clear process) of (gaming status information, winning flag, etc.) is performed. In other words, the case where it is determined in step S4401 that the winning probability setting process has not been started is the case where the slot machine 10 is powered on without initializing the RAM 106. In this case, various information stored in the RAM 106 before the power cutoff (for example, the previous day) is inherited (read), and the state before the power cutoff is restored. That is, if it is determined in step S4401 that the winning probability setting process has not been activated, the AT counter C acquired before the power was shut off is inherited.

If it is determined in step S4401 that a setting change operation has been performed, the process advances to step S4402, and it is determined whether a setting confirmation operation has been performed. If the setting confirmation operation has not been performed, the system waits in that state. When the setting confirmation operation is performed, that is, when the start lever 41 is operated after the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off in the winning probability setting process, the lottery information storage area is stored in step S4403. It is determined whether the AT counter C is stored in all the storage areas of 106f. As mentioned above, when the winning probability setting process is started, the initialization process is performed, so basically, when proceeding from step S4402 to step S4403, the vacant area is It will be determined that there is. If it is determined in step S4403 that there is a vacant area, the process advances to step S4404.

In step S4404, random numbers for lottery are updated. In this process, a random value is added to the AT counter C to update it. That is, by performing the initialization process as described above, the value of the AT counter C is initialized to the initial value (1). Step S4404 is a process for updating the initial value as a random value.

Specifically, this slot machine 10 is provided with a random number circuit for a free run counter that is activated when the power is turned on. The random number circuit generates random numbers from 1 to 128, and independently updates and generates the random numbers even while the main process is activated (that is, while the initial random number acquisition process is being executed). In step S4404, the random number at the time of activation in step S4404 is obtained from the random number circuit, and the obtained random number is added to the current AT counter C.

Then, in step S4405, the updated AT counter C is acquired. Thereafter, in step S4406, processing is performed to store the AT counter C in the area with the smallest number among the empty areas. The processing in steps S4405 and S4406 is similar to the processing in steps S3301 and S3302 described above.

After executing the process of step S4406, the process returns to step S4403, and it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in the lottery information storage area 106f. If there is a vacant area, the process returns to step S4404, where the AT counter C is updated, and then the AT counter C is acquired and stored. By doing so, when acquiring AT counters C for multiple games at once, it becomes difficult to acquire AT counters C having the same value or consecutive values. Note that the update cycle of the random number circuit is set to be asynchronous with the cycle cycle of steps S4403 to S4406.

When the AT counter C is stored in all areas, a negative determination is made in step S4403, and the process advances to step S4407. In step S4407, the AT command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the initial random number acquisition process ends. The AT command set here is output to the display control device 81 in timer interrupt processing after the main processing ends. As a result, the first game after execution of the initialization process can be played with the AT counter C already stored in all areas of the lottery information storage area 106f.

Incidentally, when the initialization process is executed when the power is turned on, the advantageous section flag is also cleared, so after the initialization process, the game will start in the normal section instead of the advantageous section. Then, in this embodiment, after the power is turned on, an AT command can be outputted and a hold display can be made even in the normal section. By doing this, it is also possible to play a game in which the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on, and whether or not the winning probability (set value) has been changed is predicted based on the presence or absence of a pending display. becomes possible.

Note that, as in the other embodiments described above, the AT command may also be output in the initial random number acquisition process on the condition that it is in an advantageous period.

By doing the above, in a configuration where the AT mode transition lottery is performed by acquiring the AT counter C in advance, the phenomenon that the AT mode transition lottery cannot be performed because the AT counter C has not been acquired can be prevented. It is possible to prevent this from occurring.

In particular, in the above embodiment, since the initial random number acquisition process is performed in the winning probability setting process in the main process when the power is turned on, the main process shifts to normal process and the game can be started. In this situation, the AT counter C is already full in the lottery information storage area 106f. Therefore, even in the first game after the power is turned on, it is possible to suitably carry out the AT mode transition lottery.

In the normal random number acquisition process, the AT counter C is acquired at the third stop OFF operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and in the initial random number acquisition process, the AT counter C is acquired based on the probability of winning. In the setting process, the setting value is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41. In this way, some kind of operation is required to acquire the AT counter C, and compared to a configuration in which the AT counter C is automatically acquired, the acquisition timing is likely to be random, and the acquisition timing is likely to be random. The value of the AT counter C also tends to be random.

<Modification 1>
In the third embodiment described above, the configuration is such that the random number information for the vacant areas of the lottery information storage area 106f is acquired based on the operation to confirm the setting value, but the random numbers are acquired based on the acquisition operation for the vacant areas. It may also be configured to acquire the information. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing initial random number acquisition processing in this modification.

In step S4501, it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed, and if no setting change operation has been performed, the initial random number acquisition process is directly ended. If a setting change operation is performed, it is determined in step S4502 whether or not there is an empty area in the lottery information storage area 106f. This process is similar to the process in step S4403 above. If there is a vacant area, the process advances to step S4503, and processing for executing operation instruction notification is performed. The operation instruction notification is, for example, a notification for causing the administrator to perform an operation for obtaining a random number for the AT mode transition lottery. For example, if the acquisition operation is to operate the start lever 41, the auxiliary display section 65 may display "Please operate the start lever", or the instruction monitor 68 may display predetermined symbols (alphabetic, It may also be configured to display numbers (for example, the letter "S").

In this case, it is preferable that the operation for changing the set value (winning probability) and the operation for acquiring the AT counter C be configured so that they can be distinguished on the gaming machine side and the administrator side. More specifically, it is preferable that the operation for changing the set value (winning probability) and the operation for acquiring the AT counter C are performed at different timings.

Thereafter, in step S4504, it is determined whether or not an acquisition operation has been performed, and the process waits until the acquisition operation is performed. If an acquisition operation is performed, a random number update process is performed in step S4505, an AT counter C acquisition process is performed in step S4506, an AT counter C storage process is performed in step S4507, and then step S4502 Return to The processing from step S4505 to step S4507 is similar to the processing from step S4404 to step S4406 described above.

If it is determined in step S4502 that there is no free area, the process advances to step S4508, where it is determined whether or not a setting value confirmation operation has been performed, and the process waits until the confirmation operation is performed. If the confirmation operation has been performed, the AT command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4509, and then the initial random number acquisition process ends.

By doing the above, in a configuration in which the AT counter C is acquired based on an operation by the administrator, there is a one-to-one relationship between the acquisition operation and the acquired random number information. As a result, the timing at which the AT counter C is acquired tends to be random, and the value of the AT counter C that is acquired also tends to be random.

<Modification 2>
It is also possible to use a random number from another counter other than the AT counter C to obtain a random number for the AT mode transition lottery. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the initial random number acquisition process in this modification.

In step S4601, it is determined whether a setting change operation has been performed, and in step S4602, it is determined whether a setting value finalizing operation has been performed. Then, in step S4603, it is determined whether there is a vacant area in the lottery information storage area 106f. The processing in steps S4601 to S4603 is similar to the processing in steps S4401 to S4403. If it is determined in step S4603 that there is a vacant area, the process advances to step S4604.

In step S4604, random number updating processing is performed. This update process is basically the same as the update process of AT counter C such as step S4404, but in this modification, update process of random numbers of other counters etc. is also performed. In this modification, a lottery counter used for the additional lottery, a lottery counter used for the VB mode transition lottery, and a lottery counter used for the specialized zone transition lottery will be explained as examples of other random numbers such as counters.

As shown in FIG. 110, the lottery counter used for the additional lottery is a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 1 to 256 and returns to 1 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 256). The lottery counter used for the additional lottery is updated regularly, and is incremented by 1 each time a timer interrupt process is activated, for example. The lottery counter used for the VB mode transition lottery is a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 1 to 128 and returns to 1 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 128). The lottery counter used for the VB mode shift lottery is also updated regularly, and is incremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, for example. The lottery counter used in the specialized zone shift lottery is a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 1 to 64 and returns to 1 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 64). The lottery counter used in the specialized zone transition lottery is also updated regularly, and is incremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, for example.

Although these lottery counters are also updated by timer interrupt processing after the main processing ends, they are initialized to the initial value (1) by the initialization processing as described above when starting the initial random number acquisition processing. has been done. Therefore, in step S4604, these lottery counters are also updated as random values. In this case, when updating the AT counter C, the random number obtained from the random number circuit is added as is, and when updating the lottery counter used for the additional lottery, the random number obtained from the random number circuit is subjected to a first calculation (for example, the first When updating the lottery counter used for the VB mode transition lottery, a second operation (which is different from the first operation) is performed on the random number obtained from the random number circuit. For example, when updating the lottery counter used in the specialized zone transfer lottery, the first calculation or the second calculation is performed on the random number obtained from the random number circuit. By performing a third calculation different from the calculation (for example, adding a third predetermined value) and then adding the calculated value, the updated values from the initial value can be different values.

Alternatively, the initial values may be different from each other. Alternatively, random number circuits for updating may be prepared separately, and the update cycles of the respective random number circuits may be made different, so that each lottery counter can be updated to a different value.

In step S4605, processing is performed to obtain a random number for AT mode transition lottery. In this case, in this modification, in addition to the AT counter C, there are also a free run counter (a counter latched by a hardware circuit) for lottery used in the lottery processing of each game, a lottery counter used for additional lottery, and a VB mode transition. Performs acquisition processing of the lottery counter used in the lottery and the lottery counter used in the specialized zone transfer lottery. As mentioned above, not only the AT counter C but also the lottery counter used for the additional lottery, the lottery counter used for the VB mode transition lottery, and the lottery counter used for the specialized zone transition lottery are also updated in step S4604. is updated as a random value. Furthermore, random values are individually latched in the hardware circuit for the lottery free run counter (counter latched by the hardware circuit) used in the lottery process of each game.

These free run counters for lottery used in the lottery process of each game, lottery counters used for additional lottery, lottery counters used for VB mode transition lottery, lottery counters used for specialized zone transition lottery, etc. This is a random number for lottery provided separately from counter C. In this modification, a random number for lottery, which is provided separately from the AT counter C, is used for the AT counter C.

At least one of these separately provided random numbers for lottery (specifically, a free run counter for lottery used for lottery processing of each game) is updated at a cycle different from the update cycle of AT counter C. It is something that More specifically, the lottery free run counter used in the lottery process of each game is updated at a shorter update cycle than the AT counter C update cycle. Furthermore, the free run counter starts being updated when the power is turned on, regardless of the progress status of the main process.

In step S4606, the counter acquired in step S4605 is converted. Specifically, each lottery counter as a random number separately provided above is converted into a value corresponding to a random number for AT mode transition lottery. As shown in FIG. 110, conversion tables for each counter are stored in the various table storage area 105a, and in step S4606, the AT mode is Convert it as a random number that can be used for the transition lottery.

For example, the lottery free run counter used in the lottery process of each game has a value between 0 and 65535, and if a value between 0 and 511 has been acquired, it is used as an AT counter C. If a value of 512 to 1023 is obtained, the AT counter C is converted to 2. If a value of 65024 to 65535 is obtained, the AT counter C is converted to 128. In addition, the lottery counter for the additional lottery has acquired any value between 1 and 256, and if 1 or 2 is acquired, it is converted to 1 as AT counter C, and 3 or 4 is acquired. If 255 or 256 is obtained, the AT counter C is converted to 2. If 255 or 256 is obtained, the AT counter C is converted to 128. In this way, for counters that have a wider update range than AT counter C (counters that can have larger values), a conversion table is set in which one AT counter value is associated with a plurality of counter values.

Also, for example, the lottery counter for the VB mode transition lottery has a value between 1 and 128, and if 1 is acquired, it is converted to 1 as AT counter C, and 2 is acquired. If it is, the AT counter C is converted to 2, and if 128 is obtained, the AT counter C is converted to 128. That is, for counters in the same update range as the AT counter C, the conversion table is set so that the obtained counter value becomes the AT counter value as is. Note that if 1 is obtained, the AT counter C is converted to 128, if 2 is obtained, the AT counter C is converted to 127, and if 128 is obtained, the AT counter C is converted to 1. The conversion table may be set so that the AT counter has a value different from the obtained counter value.

The lottery counter for specialized zone transition lottery has a value between 1 and 64. If 1 is acquired, it is converted to 1 or 2 as AT counter C, and if 2 is acquired, it is converted to 1 or 2. If so, the AT counter C is converted to 3 or 4, and if 64 is obtained, the AT counter C is converted to 127 or 128. That is, for a counter whose update range is narrower than that of AT counter C (a counter that cannot have a large value), a conversion table is set in which one counter value is associated with a plurality of AT counter values. In this case, the value of the AT counter C to be converted to is also determined by lottery or the like. For example, if 1 is acquired as the lottery counter for specialization zone transfer lottery, 50% is converted to 1 as AT counter C, and 50% is converted to 2 as AT counter C. Note that which AT counter C is converted to does not have to be divided evenly; for example, if 1 is acquired as the lottery counter for specialized zone transfer lottery, 20% is converted to 1 as AT counter C. The AT counter C may be converted to 2, and 80% may be converted to 2 as the AT counter C.

Note that in each conversion table, a configuration may be adopted in which some of the conversion destination AT counters overlap. For example, if 1 is acquired as the lottery counter for specialized zone transfer lottery, 30% is converted to 1 as AT counter C, 30% is converted to 2 as AT counter C, and 40% is converted to AT counter C. In addition, if 2 is obtained as the lottery counter for specialized zone transfer lottery, 40% is converted to 2 as AT counter C, 30% is converted to 3 as AT counter C, It may be configured such that 30% is converted to 4 as AT counter C.

After executing the process of converting each counter to the AT counter C in step S4606, a process of storing the converted value in an empty area of the lottery information storage area 106f is performed. In this case, for example, the AT counter C, the converted value of the free run counter for lottery used in the lottery process of each game, the converted value of the lottery counter used for the additional lottery, the converted value of the lottery counter used for the VB mode transition lottery , the converted values of the lottery counters used in the specialized zone transition lottery may be stored in the order of the converted values of the lottery counters, starting from the area with the smallest number among the vacant areas, or the converted value of which counter is stored in which vacant area. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is randomly determined by lottery or the like.

After executing the process in step S4606, the process returns to step S4602, and if there is no free area, a negative determination is made in step S4602, and the process proceeds to AT command setting process in step S4607. This process is similar to the process in step S4407 above.

Incidentally, in this modified example, as mentioned above, it is possible to obtain five random numbers in one round of the processing from step S4603 to step S4607, so when the processing from step S4603 to step S4607 is performed for two rounds, the entire area is AT counter C (or a value equivalent to it) is stored in . In this regard, the number of random numbers acquired for the AT counter C may be set to 10, and the AT counter C may be stored in all areas in one round of the processing from step S4603 to step S4607. In this case, one AT counter C and nine other random numbers may be prepared so that 10 random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery can be obtained at one time. 10 random numbers may be prepared, and ten random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery may be obtained at one time. By doing the latter, it may be meaningless to obtain it, such as in a situation where AT counter C remains at its initial value, or there may be inconveniences such as the lottery result being the same every time. If obtained, it is possible to replace it with another random number.

Also, assuming that three random numbers are acquired for the AT counter C, the AT counter C is stored in nine areas in three rounds of the processing from step S4603 to step S4607, and one AT counter C is stored in the remaining one round. The number of counters acquired in step S4605 may vary depending on the number of empty areas, such as in the following example.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which a plurality of random numbers different from the AT counter C are acquired and each of them is converted into an AT counter C, as in the above modification, a configuration in which among the plurality of random numbers, the one with the shortest update cycle is acquired may also be used. good. By doing this, for example, when acquiring the random numbers, they will be acquired in order from the initial value to those that are most likely to have been updated, and the values closest to the initial value will always be acquired. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of an increased possibility.

<Modification 3>
Instead of, or in addition to, the configuration in which random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery are acquired in advance when the winning probability setting process at the time of power activation is activated, a configuration may be adopted in which the random numbers are acquired in advance in the game after activation. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing initial random number acquisition processing in this modification. The initial random number acquisition process of this modification is started at a predetermined period, and for example, every time the timer interrupt process is started, it is started within the timer interrupt process or as a separate process from the timer interrupt process.

In step S4701, it is determined whether there is a vacant area in the lottery information storage area 106f. Note that in step S4701, an affirmative determination is also made when the execution area AE as well as each storage area RE in the lottery information storage area 106f are empty areas. If a negative determination is made in step S4701, this initial random number acquisition process is directly terminated.

If it is determined in step S4701 that there is an empty area in the execution area AE or storage area RE, the process advances to step S4702, and it is determined whether or not a game is being played. Incidentally, in step S4702, the start lever 41 is operated to start the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and based on the third stop OFF operation, all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped to correspond to the winning result. The period until the processing (medal payout, etc.) is completed is considered to be one game, and the period during that period is determined to be in-game. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process advances to step S4703, and it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated to start the game. Note that when operating the start lever 41, the condition for determining the start operation may be that a valid bet has been made. If the start operation has not been performed, the initial random number acquisition process is ended.

If it is determined that a start operation has been performed, the process advances to step S4704, and an AT counter C acquisition process is performed. Then, in step S4705, the AT counter C is stored. Note that if the execution area AE is an empty area, the AT counter C is stored in the execution area AE in step S4705. When performing the AT mode transition lottery in the lottery result handling process during normal processing, if the AT counter C is not stored in the execution area AE, it is preferable to wait until the storage process in step S4705 is completed. If the AT counter C is stored in the execution area AE in step S4705, the AT counter C is stored in the area with the smallest number among the empty areas in the storage area RE. After executing the process of step S4705, the present initial random number acquisition process ends.

If it is determined in step S4702 that the game is in progress, the process advances to step S4706. In step S4706, it is determined whether the first stop ON operation has been performed. When the first stop ON operation is performed, the AT counter C is acquired in step S4707, and the AT counter C is stored in the lowest numbered area among the free areas of the storage area RE in step S4708. , this initial random number acquisition process ends.

If it is determined in step S4706 that the first stop ON operation has not been performed (the first stop ON operation has already been performed), the process advances to step S4709. In step S4709, it is determined whether the second stop ON operation has been performed. When the second stop ON operation is performed, the AT counter C is acquired in step S4710, and the AT counter C is stored in the lowest numbered area among the free areas of the storage area RE in step S4711. , this initial random number acquisition process ends.

If it is determined in step S4709 that the second stop ON operation has not been performed (the second stop ON operation has already been performed), the process advances to step S4712. In step S4712, it is determined whether the third stop ON operation has been performed. When the third stop ON operation is performed, the AT counter C is acquired in step S4713, and the AT counter C is stored in the lowest numbered area among the free areas of the storage area RE in step S4714. , this initial random number acquisition process ends. If it is determined in step S4712 that the third stop ON operation has not been performed (the third stop ON operation has already been performed), this initial random number acquisition process is directly ended.

As described above, since the acquisition of the AT counter C is made to involve the player's operation in the initial random number acquisition process, the AT mode transition lottery is carried out within the scope of the player's own responsibility. This makes it easier for players to understand the results compared to a configuration obtained through operations by a game hall manager or the like, and the transparency of games is ensured.

Note that, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which only one AT counter C or the like is acquired in the initial random number acquisition process when the power is turned on, and the rest are acquired in accordance with the game progress operations as described above.

<Fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, transition to the fourth RT state may occur in the first RT state. Then, upon transition to the fourth RT state, notification corresponding to the AT counter C acquired in advance is performed. In this embodiment, the hold display area Dr is not set, and the special image corresponding to the AT counter C is not displayed. As already explained, the fourth RT state is a fixed RT state in which the number of games is fixed.
FIG. 112 shows a lottery table for the first RT state in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, it is possible to win the transition replay 1 and the transition replay 2, which are wins in the 11th replay and the 12th replay in which the transition to the 4th RT state occurs. More specifically, the probability of winning transition replay 1 with index value IV = 13 is approximately 1/400, and the probability of winning transition replay 2 with index value IV = 14 is also approximately 1/400. Yes, and in total, the probability of winning either Transition Replay 1 or Transition Replay 2 is approximately 1/200.

FIG. 113 shows the relationship between the game results that result in winnings at the time of transition replay winning and the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44. Both transition replay 1 and transition replay 2 are operated in the following order: left → middle → right, left → right → middle, or middle → left → right. If the 11th re-gaming win is established and the operation is performed in any of the following stop order: right → middle → left, right → left → middle, or middle → right → left, the 12th It is set so that replay winnings are established.

In this embodiment, when the 11th re-game winning is established, the game moves to the 4th RT state A of the 4 RT states, and when the 12th re-game winning is achieved, the game moves to the 4th RT state B of the 4 RT states. The lottery tables for each game are different between the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B. Specifically, FIG. 114 shows a lottery table for the fourth RT state, where the values shown on the left side of the point value PV column indicate the fourth RT state A, and the values shown on the right side of the point value PV column The value indicates the fourth RT state B.

Here, in this embodiment, the winning results of index value IV=59 and 60 are set. If the index value IV=59 is won, the 13th re-game winning can be achieved. In addition, the 14th re-game winning can be achieved when the index value IV=60. The winning mode of the 13th re-gaming prize and the 14th re-gaming prize is as shown in FIG. It can be established. The 13th replay is also called cherry replay because, for example, when the "LUCKY" symbol stops on the upper row of the left reel 32L and a winning is achieved, the "cherry" symbol stops on the middle row of the left reel 32L. Ru. The 14th re-game is also called watermelon play because, for example, the "watermelon" symbol may stop at the middle row of the middle reel 32M and a winning may be achieved.

Cherry Replay and Watermelon Replay are included in the specific combination as game results that are subject to the AT mode transition lottery. In FIG. 115(b), the probability of winning a specific combination in this embodiment is shown for each gaming state. The winning probabilities of specific combinations in the normal gaming state, the first to third RT states, the first BB state, and the second BB state are the same as those in each of the above embodiments. In the 4th RT state, you won't win the normal replay or the push-order replay (transition replay 1 and transition replay 2 are not included here), but you will win the cherry replay and watermelon replay of transition replay 1 and transition replay 2. You will get it. In the 4th RT state A and the 4th RT state B, the winning probabilities for Cherry Replay and Suikari Play are different, and in the 4th RT state A, you have about 1/2 chance of winning Cherry Replay and about 1/20 chance of winning Suikari Play. On the other hand, in the fourth RT state B, about 1 in 20 people win Cherry Replay, and about 1 in 2 people win Watermelon Play. That is, the fourth RT state A is likely to win Cherry Replay and is also called Cherry RT, and the fourth RT state B is easy to win Watermelon Play and is also called Watermelon RT.

If a winning is achieved in Cherry Replay, a replay will be awarded, and if a winning is achieved in Suikari Play, a replay will also be awarded. Further, in the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B, the winning probabilities other than Cherry Replay and Watermelon Replay are the same. The fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B both transition to the normal gaming state by playing 10 games. In other words, there is no difference in the degree of advantage for the player between the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B in terms of the expected number of medals acquired per game. Therefore, when transition replay 1 or transition replay 2 is won, no difference occurs in the number of medals that the player can expect in either the fourth RT state A or the fourth RT state B in that RT state.

FIG. 116 shows an AT mode transition lottery table in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the value of the AT counter C that will win the AT mode transition lottery is set for Cherry Replay and Watermelon Play, and the values of the AT counter C for other specific combinations are those of each of the above embodiments. is the same as Specifically, when the AT mode transition lottery is held in Cherry Replay, if the value of AT counter C is "1" to "64", the AT mode transition will be won, and the AT mode transition lottery will be held in Suikari Play. If the value of the AT counter C is between "65" and "128", the AT mode transition is determined to be successful. The value of the AT counter C associated with these Cherry Replay and Watermelon Replay is common to the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B. Note that the value of the AT counter C that is used to win the AT mode transition in Cherry Replay or Suikari Play in the normal gaming state or the 1st to 3rd RT states is also set, but in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state or in the 3rd RT state In the 1st RT state to the 3rd RT state, it is set not to win Cherry Replay or Watermelon Play, so the event of AT mode transition winning triggered by Cherry Replay or Watermelon Play does not occur in these game states.

Here, the value of AT counter C associated with Cherry Replay and the value of AT counter C associated with Watermelon Replay are both continuous values, and their average values are different. . Specifically, Cherry Replay ranges from "1" to "64", and its average value is 32.5. On the other hand, Suikari Play has a score of "65" to "128", with an average value of 96.5. As already explained, AT counter C has a value whose update range is "1" to "128", and Cherry Replay is associated with the first half of the update range, and Watermelon Replay is associated with the second half of the update range. are associated. In other words, if the acquired AT counter belongs to a small value within the update range (first half update range, first range), it corresponds to cherry replay, and if the acquired AT counter belongs to a large value within the update range ( If it belongs to the second half update range (second range), it corresponds to Suikari Play.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing in this embodiment.

In step S4801, processing for acquiring the AT counter C is executed, and in subsequent step S4802, processing for storing the AT counter C in the corresponding storage area is executed. After executing the process in step S4802, it is determined in step S4803 whether the value of the AT counter C acquired and stored this time is smaller than 65. That is, it is determined whether the current AT counter C is a smaller value within the update range and corresponds to cherry replay. If it is compatible with cherry replay, in step S4804, the process of adding 1 to the cherry counter CC provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed, and then the random number acquisition process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4803 that the current AT counter C is a larger value within the update range and corresponds to Suikari Play, then in step S4805 the AT counter C is set in the various counter areas 106e. After executing the process of adding 1 to the watermelon counter SC, the random number acquisition process ends. The cherry counter CC is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of AT counters C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f that correspond to cherry replays with a smaller value within the update range. The counter SC is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of AT counters C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f that correspond to Suikari Play with a larger value within the update range.

As described above, in this embodiment, the hold display area Dr is not set and the special image corresponding to the AT counter C is not displayed. Therefore, in the random number acquisition process in this embodiment, a process for outputting an AT command to the display control device 81 is not set.

Next, the random number shift process in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 118.

In step S4901, processing is executed to shift the AT counter C stored in the first storage area RE1 to the execution area AE. In the following step S4902, it is determined whether the value of the AT counter C shifted in step S4901, that is, the value of the AT counter C shifted to the execution area AE, is smaller than 65. 65, the current AT counter C is on the smaller side of the update range, and corresponds to cherry replay, a process of subtracting 1 from the cherry counter CC is executed in step S4903. On the other hand, the value of the AT counter C shifted to the execution area AE is 65 or more, and it is determined that the current AT counter C is a value on the larger side within the update range and corresponds to Suicari Play. In this case, in step S4904, the watermelon counter SC is decremented by 1. After executing the process of step S4903 or step S4904, a shift process of each storage area is executed in step S4905, and then the random number shift process is ended. Note that, as described above, in this embodiment, a hold display using a special image is not performed, and therefore, in the random number shift processing in this embodiment, processing for setting the output of a command at the time of shift is not provided.

Next, the special notification process executed in step S1524 of the push order process in the main control device 101 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 119. The special notification process is a process executed in the game in which the transition replay 1 or the transition replay 2 is won.

In step S5001, it is determined whether the currently won transition replay is transition replay 1. If it is transition replay 1, the cherry counter CC and watermelon counter SC are compared in step S5002, and it is determined whether or not the values of the cherry counter CC and watermelon counter SC are the same. If the cherry counter CC is 5 and the watermelon counter SC is 5, it is determined in step S5002 that the numbers are the same.

If the numbers are not the same, it is determined in step S5003 whether the cherry counter CC is larger than the watermelon counter SC. If the cherry counter CC is larger, the special notification A command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S5004.

The case where the cherry counter CC is larger means that more than half of the AT counters C for 10 games stored in the lottery information storage area 106f are AT counters C corresponding to cherry replay, and this time This is a case where it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery if the transition to the fourth RT state A (cherry RT) is made based on the transition replay 1 win. In the display control device 81 that has received the special notification A command, in the special notification execution process (step S2615) in the press order notification process (FIG. 60), the operation mode corresponding to the 11th re-game winning is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. Execute the process to notify the following information. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(a), it is preferable to notify which stop switches 42 to 44 should be stopped first, such as "stop from the left" (FIG. 113).

If the watermelon counter SC is larger than the cherry counter CC in step S5003, a special notification B command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S5005.

The case where the watermelon counter SC is larger means that more than half of the AT counters C for 10 games stored in the lottery information storage area 106f are AT counters C corresponding to the watermelon play, and this time This is a case where it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery if the transition to the fourth RT state B (Watermelon RT) is made based on the transition replay 1 win. The display control device 81 that has received the special notification B command executes a process for notifying the operation mode corresponding to the 12th re-game winning on the auxiliary display section 65 in the special notification execution process. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(b), it is preferable to notify which stop switches 42 to 44 should be stopped first, such as "stop from the right" (FIG. 113).

If it is determined in step S5001 that the transition replay 2 has been won instead of the transition replay 1, and if it is determined in step S5002 that the cherry counter CC and the watermelon counter SC are the same, in step S5006, the special notification C The command is set as an output target to the display control device 81.

The display control device 81 that has received the special notification C command performs a stop operation corresponding to the 11th re-game win or a stop operation corresponding to the 12th re-game win on the auxiliary display section 65 in the special notification execution process. A process for notifying the player to select whether to proceed is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(c), a message such as "choice of fate" was displayed, and the operation mode corresponding to the 11th replay winning prize and the operating mode corresponding to the 12th replay winning prize were announced. Then, it is preferable to have the player select which fourth RT state to transition to.

After executing any of the processes in step S5004, step S5005, and step S5006, in step S5007, a process is performed to set the press order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then a special notification process is performed. end.

In other words, the special notification when the transition replay is won is to notify whether the transition should be made to the 4th RT state A or the 4th RT state B, from which transition is possible, and the special notification is This can also be said to be one aspect of the situation notification shown in the first embodiment.

In this embodiment, when transition replay 1 or transition replay 2 is won, the press order notification is not generated on the instruction monitor 68, and as the press order notification effect, the auxiliary display section 65 displays special notification A and special notification as described above. Notification B or special notification C is generated.

Next, the process for moving to the fourth RT, which is executed when the 11th re-game winning or the 12th re-gaming winning is established, will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 121. As described above, the fourth RT state transition process is a process executed in step S1623 in the winning result corresponding process.

The 4th RT transition process grasps the possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the 4th RT state to be transitioned to, based on the acquired AT counter C, and selects the 4th RT according to the expected value (possibility). This is a process for setting the start effect of a state. Here, as the start effects for the fourth RT state, fourth RT effects A, fourth RT effects B, and fourth RT effects C are set. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 122(b1) to 122(b3), the background color is set to be different in the start effect of the fourth RT state on the auxiliary display section 65, and as shown in FIG. 122(b1) In the 4th RT performance A, the start performance is performed with a red background color, in the 4th RT performance B of Figure 122 (b2), the start performance is performed with a green background color, and in the 4th RT performance C of Figure 122 (b3), the start performance is performed with a green background color. The starting effect is set to be performed with a blue background color, so that the player can identify each one. The 4th RT performance A, 4th RT performance B, and 4th RT performance C are ranked in order of probability of winning the AT mode transition during the 4th RT state, and it can be seen that the 4th RT performance A has the highest probability of winning the AT mode transition. This is set as a presentation.

In the fourth RT transition process, first in step S5101, it is determined whether the cherry counter CC and the watermelon counter SC are the same number. If it is determined that the numbers are not the same, the process advances to step S5102. In step S5102, it is determined whether the cherry counter CC is larger than the watermelon counter SC. If the cherry counter CC is larger, the process advances to step S5103. In step S5103, it is determined whether the 11th re-game winning has been achieved. The case where the eleventh re-game winning is established in step S5103 is the case where a transition to the fourth RT state A, which is cherry RT, occurs in a situation where the number of cherry counters CC is greater than the number of watermelon counters SC.

FIG. 122(a) shows an example of the AT counter C stored in each storage area RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106f when the cherry counter CC is larger than the watermelon counter SC. Specifically, the AT stored in six areas: first storage area RE1, second storage area RE2, fourth storage area RE4, sixth storage area RE6, seventh storage area RE7, and ninth storage area RE9. Counter C is a value corresponding to cherry replay, and AT counter C stored in four areas: third storage area RE3, fifth storage area RE5, eighth storage area RE8, and tenth storage area RE10 is cherry replay. is the value corresponding to . In this case, in the 4th RT state as a fixed RT state of 10 games, if you win the cherry replay in any of the 1st, 2nd, 4th, 6th, 7th, and 9th games, If you win the AT mode transition lottery and win Suikari Play in any of the 3rd, 5th, 8th, or 10th games, you will win the AT mode transition lottery. As mentioned above, in Cherry RT, you have a high probability of winning Cherry Replay, and in Watermelon RT, you have a high probability of winning Suikari Play. That is, in this example, there is a higher possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery when the player moves to the fourth RT state A, which is cherry RT, than when the player moves to fourth RT state B, which is watermelon RT.

Therefore, if it is determined in step S5103 that the transition to the fourth RT state A, which is cherry RT, has occurred in a situation where the number of cherry counters CC is greater than the number of watermelon counters SC, the fourth RT production command A is displayed in step S5104. After executing the process of setting it as an output target to the control device 81, the fourth RT transition process ends. The 4th RT performance command A is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that there is a high possibility of winning the AT mode shift lottery in the current 4th RT state, and the 4th RT performance command This is a command to be executed as production A. As described above, the fourth RT effect A is a start effect indicating that there is a high possibility of winning the AT mode transition in the current fourth RT state.

The case where it is determined in step S5103 that the 11th re-game winning is not established is the case where the 12th re-gaming winning is established. This case shows a case where a transition to the fourth RT state B, which is watermelon RT, occurs, and when the cherry counter CC is larger than the watermelon counter SC as shown in FIG. The chances of winning the lottery are lower. Therefore, in this case, in step S5105, the process of setting the fourth RT effect command C as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process for moving to the fourth RT ends. The 4th RT performance command C is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that there is a low possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the current 4th RT state, and the start performance of the current 4th RT state is This is a command to be executed as performance C. As described above, the fourth RT effect C is a start effect indicating that there is a low possibility of winning the AT mode transition in the current fourth RT state.

The case where it is determined in step S5102 that the watermelon counter SC is larger than the cherry counter CC is the opposite situation to that shown in FIG. This is a situation in which the possibility of winning the AT mode transition becomes higher, but the probability of winning the AT mode transition becomes lower if the transition to the fourth RT state A, which is cherry RT, occurs.

In this case, it is determined in step S5106 whether or not the 11th re-game winning has been achieved. When the 11th re-game winning is established, that is, when the transition to the 4th RT state A, which is Cherry RT, occurs, the process of setting the 4th RT effect command C as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S5105 After executing this, the fourth RT transition process ends. In this case, the fourth RT effect C indicating that the possibility of winning the AT mode transition is low is performed as the start effect of the fourth RT state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5106 that the 12th replay win has been established instead of the 11th replay win, that is, if the transition to the 4th RT state B, which is watermelon RT, has occurred, the process proceeds to step S5104. After executing the process of setting the fourth RT effect command A as an output target to the display control device 81, the process for moving to the fourth RT ends. In this case, the fourth RT effect A indicating that there is a high possibility of winning the AT mode transition is performed as a start effect of the fourth RT state.

If it is determined in step S5101 that the cherry counter CC and watermelon counter SC are the same number, the process advances to step S5107, and after executing the process of setting the fourth RT effect command B as an output target to the display control device 81, This fourth RT transition process ends. The 4th RT performance command B is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the possibility of winning the AT mode shift lottery in the current 4th RT state is about intermediate, and is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the current 4th RT state is This is a command for executing as the fourth RT performance B. As described above, the fourth RT effect B is a start effect indicating that the probability of winning the AT mode transition in the current fourth RT state is about medium.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is held during the gaming state in which the transition becomes possible when the transition to the gaming state becomes possible, the contents of the AT mode transition lottery are The structure is such that a notification corresponding to the contents of the transition lottery is specified as a special notification. By doing so, it becomes possible to shift the gaming state after grasping the degree of expectation of winning the AT mode shift during the gaming state before shifting.

In particular, when transition replay 1 is won, it is determined whether the transition to the 4th RT state A or the 4th RT state B should occur based on the AT counter C obtained in advance, and the contents By configuring this to be performed as a special notification, the player can select which fourth RT state to transition to based on the special notification. Therefore, it is possible to realize a new gaming experience in which the player selects the gaming state to which the player is to transition based on the relationship with the AT counter C that has been acquired in advance.

In this case, when the transition replay 2 is won, the special notification C is executed without specifying which fourth RT state should be transitioned to from the AT counter C. This increases the number of situations in which the player can make selections, making it possible to improve the gameplay.

In this embodiment, instead of individual displays (special images as pending displays) corresponding to each AT counter C as in the first to third embodiments, the AT counters stored in the lottery information storage area 106f are displayed. The structure is such that the AT mode transition lottery for C is notified all at once. By doing so, it becomes possible to equalize the expectations for the AT mode transition lottery in the games corresponding to each AT counter C, and it is possible to evenly increase the attention level of each game.

After making a special announcement when a transition replay 1 or transition replay 2 is won, if a transition to the 4th RT state actually occurs, the 4th RT state production will be performed to express the expectation level of winning the AT mode transition in the 4th RT state to be transitioned to. The system is configured to notify the public as follows. In this case, the cherry counter CC and watermelon counter SC are used to predict the expected value of winning the AT mode transition, and the fourth RT state effect is performed based on the prediction. In the fourth RT state A, Cherry Replay is the most likely to trigger the AT mode shift win, and in the fourth RT state B, the Watermelon Replay is the most likely to trigger the AT mode shift win. The cherry counter CC and watermelon counter SC assume that the AT mode transition lottery is held using the game result that is most likely to lead to a win when transitioning to the fourth RT state, and determines whether the AT mode transition lottery is won. It represents the number of items. In the fourth RT state performance, the cherry counter CC and watermelon counter SC are used to notify the expected value of winning the AT mode transition. By doing so, it becomes possible to accurately predict the winning expectation of the AT mode transition lottery in the fourth RT state to be transitioned to, in relation to the AT counter C acquired in advance.

In other words, in a configuration in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT counter C obtained in advance and the game lottery result when the AT mode transition lottery is implemented, the element of the game lottery result that occurs after the fact , it is difficult to predict 100% whether the AT mode transition lottery is successful or not using only the AT counter C that has been obtained in advance. Therefore, in the fourth embodiment described above, a lottery result that is likely to win in each game in the game state to be transferred is identified, and it is assumed that a lottery result for transition to AT mode is held based on the lottery result that is likely to be won. The system is configured to predict the results of the migration lottery. By doing so, even if the prediction includes elements that occur after the fact, it is possible to improve the prediction accuracy to some extent, and it is possible to improve the reliability of the notification (special notification) based on the prediction.

In this case, as a lottery result of the game in the fourth RT state A or the fourth RT state B, strong cherry, middle bell, etc. are lottery results with a higher AT winning probability than cherry replay or watermelon play. However, considering the winning probability of each game, Cherry Replay and Suikari Play are more likely to trigger a winning opportunity to switch to AT mode than Strong Cherry and Middle Bell. Therefore, by using such Cherry Replay and Watermelon Play to predict the AT mode transition lottery, it is possible to make the prediction more likely to match the actually possible outcome.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, a predetermined calculation process is performed using the value of the AT counter C stored in each storage area RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106f, and a special notification is issued based on the calculation result. Execute.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing special notification processing in this modification.

In step S5201, it is determined whether the currently winning transition replay is transition replay 1. If it is the transition replay 1, the process advances to step S5202, and the value of the AT counter C stored in each storage area RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106f is integrated. That is, as a predetermined calculation process using the values of the AT counters C stored in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10, a process of calculating the total value of each AT counter C is executed.

In the following step S5203, it is determined whether the calculation result in step S5202 is smaller than 650. 650 is a value corresponding to 10 games of "65", which is the boundary value between the value at which AT mode transition is won in Cherry Replay and the value at which AT mode transition is won at Suikari Play. That is, the more the AT counter C has a value that results in AT mode transition winning in the cherry replay, the more the total value of the AT counter C can become smaller than 650. Therefore, if it is determined in step S5203 that the number is smaller than 650, a process of setting the special notification A command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S5204. As already explained, the special notification A command is a command for notifying the operation mode corresponding to the 11th re-game winning that will move to the 4th RT state A, which is Cherry RT.

The case where it is determined in step S5203 that the value is 650 or more is the case where it is assumed that there are many AT counters C with a value that makes the AT mode transition winning in Suikari Play, and in this case, in step S5205, the special notification B A process of setting a command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. As already explained, the special notification B command is a command for notifying the operation mode corresponding to the 12th re-game winning that will cause the player to move to the 4th RT state B, which is watermelon RT.

If it is determined in step S5201 that it is transition replay 2, the process advances to step S5206, and a process of setting the special notification C command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. As already explained, the special notification C command is a command for notifying the player to select which of the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B to transition to.

After executing the processing in steps S5204, S5205, and S5206, the press order notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S5207, and then the special notification processing ends.

The fourth RT transition process in this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 124.

In step S5301, the value of the AT counter C stored in each storage area RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106f is integrated. The processing in step S5301 is similar to the processing in step S5202 described above.

In the following step S5302, it is determined whether the processing result in step S5301 is greater than 500 and smaller than 800. If a negative determination is made in step S5302, it is determined in step S5303 whether the processing result of step S5301 is 500 or less. The case where it is 500 or less means that there is a high possibility that many of the AT counters C stored in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10 are on the smaller side. In this case, in step S5304, it is determined whether or not the 11th re-game winning is established and a transition to Cherry RT occurs. If a transition to Cherry RT occurs, in step S5305, a process of setting the fourth RT effect command A as an output target to the display control device 81 in order to cause the fourth RT effect A to be performed as the start effect of the current fourth RT state. After executing this, the fourth RT transition process ends.

In step S5304, if the 12th replay win is established instead of the 11th replay win and a transition to watermelon RT occurs, in step S5306, the 4th RT effect C is performed as the start effect of the current 4th RT state. In order to do so, a process is executed to set the fourth RT effect command C as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the fourth RT transition process is ended.

In step S5303, the case where it is determined that the total value of AT counter C is not 500 or less means that the total value of AT counter C is 800 or more. In this case, there is a high possibility that many of the AT counters C stored in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10 have values on the large side. Therefore, when a negative determination is made in step S5303, it is determined in step S5307 whether or not the 11th re-game winning is established, and if the 11th re-gaming winning is established, the 4th RT is determined in step S5306. After executing the process of setting the production command C as an output target to the display control device 81, the fourth RT transition process is ended. If the 12th re-game winning is established, in step S5305, a process is executed to set the 4th RT effect command A as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the process for moving to the 4th RT is ended. .

If it is determined in step S5302 that the total value of the AT counter C is larger than 500 and smaller than 800, in step S5308, a process of setting the fourth RT production command B as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed. After execution, the fourth RT migration process ends.

As mentioned above, the smaller the value of AT counter C, the more likely it is to be won to switch to AT mode when winning Cherry Replay, and the larger the value of AT counter C, the more likely it is to be won to switch to AT mode when winning Cherry Replay. The configuration is such that the degree of expectation of winning the transition to AT mode is predicted based on the integrated value of the AT counter C. In other words, the smaller the integrated value of AT counter C is, the more AT counter C corresponding to cherry replay is likely to have been acquired, and the larger the integrated value of AT counter C is, the more AT counter C corresponding to cherry replay is likely to have been acquired. There is a high possibility that it has been done. Therefore, by using these trends to predict the expectation level of winning the transition, we took advantage of the AT mode transition lottery, which is difficult to predict 100% in advance, and made a somewhat irregular prediction announcement. Regarding the plurality of AT counters C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f, it is possible to collectively predict the degree of expectation of winning the AT mode transition when each of these plural AT counters C is entered into the AT mode transition lottery. becomes.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the integrated value of the AT counter C stored in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106f is calculated before the transition to the fourth RT state becomes possible, and notification is made based on the calculation result. is performed before a transition replay win that may cause a transition to the fourth RT state.

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing in this modification.

In step S5401, an AT counter C acquisition process is executed, and in step S5402, an AT counter C storage process is executed. In the following step S5403, the value of the AT counter C stored in each storage area RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106f is integrated. The processing in step S5403 is similar to the processing in step S5202 and step S5301 described above.

After executing the process in step S5403, in step S5404, a process is executed to set the integrated value command including the information of the process result in step S5403 as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the main random number End the acquisition process.

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing integrated value information processing in this modification. The integrated value information process is started in the display control device 81, for example, in other processes (step S2917) of the full stop effect setting process.

In step S5501, it is determined whether the above integrated value command has been received. If the integrated value command has not been received, the integrated value information processing is immediately terminated. If an integrated value command has been received, the process advances to step S5502. In step S5502, it is determined whether the integrated value included in the integrated value command is greater than 500 and smaller than 800. If a negative determination is made in step S5502, it is determined in step S5503 whether the integrated value is 500 or less. 500 or less means, as described above, that there is a high possibility that most of the AT counter C values are on the small side. In this case, in step S5504, the state A effect is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, etc. After executing the process to be performed, this integrated value information process is ended.

State A performance is a performance that suggests that when comparing cherry and watermelon (cherry replay and watermelon play), winning cherry is more likely to result in AT mode transition winning. For example, as shown in FIG. 127(b), a display effect is created that shows a cherry character and a watermelon character being weighed on a scale, and the cherry character is heavier than the watermelon character. It is best to create a performance that shows this (a performance that leans toward the cherry side).

If it is determined in step S5503 that the value is not 500 or less, it means that the integrated value of the AT counter C is 800 or more. In this case, as described above, there is a high possibility that many of the AT counters C are on the large side. Therefore, in step S5505, a process is executed to perform the state C effect on the auxiliary display section 65, etc., and then the present integrated value information process is ended.

The state C performance is a performance that suggests that in comparison between cherry and watermelon (cherry replay and watermelon play), winning watermelon is more likely to result in AT mode transition winning. For example, as shown in FIG. 127(c), a display effect is created that shows a cherry character and a watermelon character being compared in weight on a scale, and it is shown that the watermelon character is heavier in the weight comparison. It would be good to perform a presentation that shows this (a presentation that leans toward the watermelon side).

If it is determined in step S5502 that the integrated value of AT counter C is larger than 500 and smaller than 800, then in step S5506, after executing the process of performing the state B effect on the auxiliary display section 65, etc., the main The integrated value information processing ends.

State B performance is a state in which there is no difference or a small difference in the ease of AT mode transition winning when cherry and watermelon are won (cherry replay and watermelon play). It is a performance that suggests that For example, as shown in FIG. 127(a), a display effect is created that shows a cherry character and a watermelon character being compared in weight on a scale, and by comparing the weights, the cherry character and the watermelon character are compared. It is a good idea to create a performance that shows that the weight is balanced.

By doing this, before winning the transition replay 1 or the transition replay 2, it is possible to inform in advance which fourth RT state the transition should occur. Therefore, it is possible to arouse expectations for winning the lottery result (the 11th re-game or the 12th re-game) that will trigger the transition to the 4th RT state.

In this case, in the fourth embodiment, both the 11th replay win and the 12th replay win can be achieved when transition replay 1 is won, and the 11th replay win is possible when transition replay 2 is won. Although the explanation has been made on the premise that both of the above and the 12th re-gaming win can be realized, as in the above modification example, notification is given as to which of the 4th RT states should be shifted to. In this case, the lottery results that trigger the transition to each fourth RT state may be provided separately. Specifically, for example, when transition replay 1 is won, the 11th replay win is established and the transition to the 4th RT state A occurs, and when transition replay 2 is won, the 12th replay win is established and the transition to the 4th RT state occurs. A transition to B may occur.

Furthermore, as explained in the first embodiment and the like, in the first BB state, it is easy to win a strong cherry, etc., and in the second BB state, it is easy to win a strong watermelon, etc. Such a configuration may be used to encourage which BB should win in the state presentation.

<Modification 3>
In the fourth embodiment described above, the value of the AT counter C that is the winning AT mode transition in the 4th RT state A and the 4th RT state B is set as a common value for each specific combination, including Cherry Replay and Watermelon Replay. However, in this modified example, the value of the AT counter C, which is the winning of AT mode transition, is different between the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B. FIG. 128 shows an AT mode transition lottery table in this modification.

In this modification, regarding Cherry Replay and Watermelon Replay, the AT counter C, which is a winning AT mode transition, is not associated in states other than the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B. In the 4th RT state A, the AT counters C for which AT mode transition is won during cherry replay are associated with "1" to "128", and no matter which AT counter C value is acquired, If the cherry replay is won in the fourth RT state A, the AT mode transition is won. In addition, in the fourth RT state A, the AT counters C for which AT mode transition is won during Suikari play are associated with "116" to "128", and in the situation where these AT counter C values have been acquired, the AT mode transition is won. If you win the replay, you will win the AT mode transition.

In the 4th RT state B, the AT counters C that will result in AT mode transition winning at the time of cherry replay are associated with "1" to "13", and in the situation where these AT counter C values are acquired, cherry replay winning will occur. If so, the AT mode transition will be successful. In addition, in the fourth RT state B, the AT counters C for which the AT mode transition is won during Suikari play are associated with "1" to "128", and the value of which AT counter C is acquired. However, if Suikari Play is won in the 4th RT state B, the AT mode transition will be won.

In other words, in the 4th RT state A, if you win Cherry Replay, you will have a 100% probability of winning to switch to AT mode, but if you win Suikari Play, you will have a probability of about 10% to switch to AT mode, and in 4th RT state A, The AT mode transition lottery table is set so that it is more advantageous for the player if he wins Cherry Replay than if he wins Suikari Play.

On the other hand, in the 4th RT state B, if you win Suikari Play, you will have a 100% chance of winning the AT mode transition, but if you win the Cherry Replay, you will have a 10% probability of winning the AT mode transition, and the 4th RT state In B, the AT mode transition lottery table is set so that it is more advantageous for the player if he wins Suikari Play than if he wins Cherry Replay.

As described above, in this modification, even if the same lottery result is used, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery differs depending on the RT state to be transitioned to. By using such a configuration, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery can be varied depending on the game state, and the degree of freedom in setting the state, lottery results of each game, and winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is greatly improved. do.

FIG. 129 shows the difference in the probability of winning a specific combination according to the gaming state in this modification.

In this modification, the winning probability of Cherry Replay and the winning probability of Watermelon Play are the same between the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B. In other words, in any of the fourth RT states, the chance of AT mode transition lottery being held in Cherry Replay is about the same, and the chance of AT mode transition lottery being held in Suikari Play is also about the same. By doing this, for example, if the production mode is such that it is difficult to determine which 4th RT state it has transitioned to or which 4th RT state it is staying in, the appearance rate of Cherry Replay or Watermelon Replay can be The possibility that the type of 4RT state will be determined can be reduced.

In addition, the probability of winning the AT mode transition during Cherry Replay and Suikari Play is different between the 4th RT state A and the 4th RT state B, so when winning Cherry Replay or Suikari Play, it will be possible to win the AT mode transition. The game can be anticipated while predicting the game state, thereby doubling the fun of the game.

<Fifth embodiment>
In this embodiment, it is determined in advance whether the random number for the AT mode transition lottery that is obtained in advance is a random number that is likely to result in an AT mode transition winning when the AT mode transition lottery is targeted. FIG. 130 shows an AT mode transition lottery table in this modification.

In this modification, the value of the AT counter C that is associated with each specific combination so that the AT mode transition is won is set to include a value within a predetermined range of the update range of the AT counter C. ing. More specifically, "3" of AT counter C is associated with normal replay, "5" of AT counter C is associated with push order replay, and "7" of AT counter C is associated with push order bell. are associated. Furthermore, strong cherries are associated with AT counters C from 1 to 64, weak cherries are associated with AT counters C from 1 to 18, and strong watermelons are associated with AT counter C values of 1 to 18. "1" to "34" are associated with the weak watermelon, and "1" to "13" of the AT counter C are associated with the weak watermelon. Chances A and B are associated with AT counters C "1" to "41", and the middle bell is associated with AT counters C "1" to "99".

Then, if a value of "1" to "13" is acquired as AT counter C, the trigger will be strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, or middle bell. Even if an AT mode transition lottery is held, the AT mode transition will be won. If "3" out of "1" to "13" is obtained as AT counter C, the AT mode transition will be won even if the normal replay is triggered, and "3" out of "1" to "13" is obtained. If "5" is obtained, the AT mode transition will be won even if the push order replay is triggered, and if "7" among "1" to "13" is obtained, the push order bell will be selected. This will also be an opportunity to switch to AT mode.

In other words, if the AT mode transition lottery is held using "1" to "13" as the AT counter C, no matter which of the specific winning combinations that can be won in normal times triggers the transition lottery, the AT mode transition lottery will be held. It's easy to become. In this embodiment, as described above, a situation in which the value of the AT counter C that is likely to result in AT mode transition winning is determined to be a specific situation, and a specific notification is made in this specific situation.

FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing in this embodiment.

In step S5601, processing to obtain the AT counter C is executed, and in step S5602, processing to store the AT counter C is executed. In the subsequent step S5603, the AT counter C acquired in step S5601 is set in the above specific area of "1" to "13" as a value that is likely to result in winning the AT mode shift when it becomes the target of the AT mode shift lottery. Determine whether the value is included. If the value is included in the specific area, the specific area command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S5604, and then the random number acquisition process ends. The specific area command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to understand that the AT counter C of the value included in the specific area has been acquired in advance.

FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the CZ mode processing in this embodiment. The CZ mode process is, for example, a process activated by other processes of the full-stop effect setting process in the display control device 81.

In step S5701, it is determined whether the vehicle is in an advantageous section. If the area is not in an advantageous area, the process advances to step S5702, and it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned specific area command has been received. Considering that the specific area command is output during the random number acquisition process during the third stop OFF operation, the case where the specific area command is received means that the specific area command is output during the third stop OFF operation. This means that the included AT counter C has been acquired, and if the specific area command has not been received, it means that the AT counter C that is not included in the specific area has been acquired during the current third stop OFF operation. means. If the AT counter C included in the specific area is acquired, a process of adding 1 to the specific counter TC provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed in step S5703.

If it is determined in step S5702 that the specific area command has not been received, or after the specific counter TC is incremented in step S5703, the process advances to step S5704. In step S5704, the value of the AT counter C used in the game to be ended this time is ascertained, and it is determined whether the AT counter C is a value included in the specific area. If the value of the AT counter C is included in the specific area, a process of subtracting 1 from the specific counter TC is executed in step S5705.

If it is determined in step S5704 that the AT counter C is not the value included in the specific area, or after the specific counter TC is subtracted in step S5705, the process advances to step S5706. In step S5706, it is determined whether the specific counter TC is a predetermined value of 5 or more. The case where the specific counter TC is 5 or more refers to the case where, in a configuration capable of storing 10 AT counters C, more than half of them are AT counters C whose values are included in the specific area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 133(a), among the storage areas RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106f, for example, the second storage area RE2, the fifth storage area RE5, and the sixth storage area RE6 In the situation where the AT counter C of the value included in the specific area is stored in the ninth storage area RE9, the AT counter C of the value included in the specific area is stored in the tenth storage area RE10 in the current acquisition process. As a result, the specific counter TC becomes 5. In this case, in the next game, the values of the AT counters C stored in at least the first storage area RE1, fourth storage area RE4, fifth storage area RE5, eighth storage area RE8, and ninth storage area RE9 will be Since it is included in the specific area, the specific counter TC is 5 or more in the next game as well. In the next game, the value of the AT counter C stored in the third storage area RE3, the fourth storage area RE4, the seventh storage area RE7, and the eighth storage area RE8 is included in the specific area, and is replenished. If the value of the AT counter C stored in the ninth storage area RE9 or the tenth storage area RE10 is not included in the specific area, the specific counter TC will be less than five.

If the specific counter TC is 5 or more in step S5706, it is determined in step S5707 whether the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The CZ mode flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the situation is such that a performance should be performed in the CZ mode, which is a chance zone where it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery.

If the CZ mode flag is not set, processing for setting the CZ mode flag is executed in step S5708. Then, in step S5709, processing is performed so that the CZ mode effect is executed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. As a CZ mode effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 133(b), it is preferable to display a message such as "AT winning probability increasing!!" at the top or bottom of the screen of the auxiliary display section 65.

In the subsequent step S5710, processing is executed to input 10 into the CZ counter ZC provided in the various counter areas 183b. The CZ counter ZC is a counter for defining the minimum number of consecutive games in the CZ mode as a chance zone. More specifically, in this embodiment, the CZ mode is started when the specific counter TC becomes 5 or more, and after the specific counter TC becomes less than 5, the situation in which the specific counter TC is less than 5 continues for 10 games. The configuration is such that the process ends by doing this.

After executing the process in step S5710, this CZ mode process ends. Further, if the CZ mode flag is set in step S5707, the CZ mode processing is directly ended. In this case, the CZ mode effect described above will continue.

If it is determined in step S5706 that the specific counter TC is less than 5, the process advances to step S5711. In step S5711, it is determined whether the CZ mode flag is set. If set, it means that the specific counter TC has become less than 5 during the CZ mode, and in this case, a process of subtracting 1 from the CZ counter ZC is executed in step S5712. Thereafter, in step S5713, it is determined whether or not the CZ counter ZC is 0. If it is 0, the process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed in step S5714. Then, in step S5715, processing is performed to end the CZ mode performance, and then the present CZ mode processing is ended. If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S5711, or if the CZ counter ZC has not yet become 0 even if the CZ mode is in step S5713, the CZ mode processing is ended.

If it is determined in step S5701 that the vehicle is in an advantageous section, a process is executed to clear the value of the specific counter TC to the initial value (0) in step S5716, and then the present CZ mode process ends. Note that if the value of the specific counter TC is already the initial value, that state is maintained.

As mentioned above, since the CZ mode performance is performed using the AT counter C obtained in advance, the game will move to the chance zone where it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery based on the lottery results of each game as in the past. A completely different gameplay experience is achieved compared to other configurations.

That is, as already explained, the AT counter C is acquired in the random number acquisition process regardless of the lottery result of each game. Furthermore, when performing the CZ mode performance, the lottery results in the game that performs the CZ mode processing are not taken into account. In other words, the setting of the CZ mode performance is performed using only the AT counter C. Therefore, for example, a CZ mode effect may occur even in the case of a game lottery result (for example, a normal replay) in which there is no hope of winning the AT mode transition, and conversely, a CZ mode effect may occur in a game where the AT mode transition win is expected. Even if the lottery result is a strong cherry (for example, strong cherry), the CZ mode effect may not occur, and the CZ mode effect is completely different from the conventional chance zone, making it possible to maintain the sense of anticipation for each game. This increases the level of surprise when the CZ mode effect is performed.

When setting a CZ mode performance, a specific range is set as the value range of an AT counter C that is likely to result in an AT mode shift winning, and the CZ mode performance is set based on the number of AT counters included in the specific range. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform the CZ mode performance as a result of predicting the degree of expectation of winning the AT mode shift with a certain degree of accuracy, and it is possible to improve the effectiveness of the CZ mode performance.

Since the CZ mode effect can be continued for more games than the number of AT counters C that can be stored in the lottery information storage area 106f, in the AT mode transition lottery using any AT counter C. It becomes difficult to know whether it is likely to be won, and it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the AT mode transition lottery using any of the AT counters C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f.

It is now possible to perform CZ mode performance before shifting to an advantageous section. By doing so, it is possible to make the driver expect to shift to the AT mode even before shifting to the advantageous section. Although the CZ mode performance is performed based on the AT counter C, the AT mode transition lottery itself is performed after the transition to the advantageous section. In other words, even if the CZ mode performance is performed, the AT mode transition lottery may not be performed. In other words, the CZ mode performance in this embodiment occurs regardless of whether the AT mode transition lottery is actually held. By doing this, it becomes possible to generate CZ mode performance from a completely different perspective from the configuration of conventional gaming machines, where the game does not shift to chance mode unless it moves to an advantageous section. By increasing the rate, it is possible to improve the normal gameplay.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the embodiments and modifications described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments and each modification, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments and each modification. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments and modified examples, or it is also possible to apply some or all of them in combination.

(1) In a configuration in which random numbers for the lottery are obtained in advance and a lottery is performed using the random numbers and the lottery results of each game, an example is an AT counter C used for the AT mode transition lottery as the random number for the lottery. However, each of the above inventions may be applied to random numbers used in other lotteries. For example, it may be applied to a configuration in which a lottery counter used in an advantageous section transition lottery is acquired in advance, or a configuration in which a lottery counter used in a VB mode transition lottery is acquired in advance, The present invention may be applied to a configuration in which a counter for a lottery used in a special zone transition lottery is acquired in advance, or a configuration in which a counter for a lottery used in an additional lottery or a lottery for the number of additional games is acquired in advance. However, the present invention may be applied to a configuration in which a lottery counter used in a lottery for a predetermined performance (for example, a setting value suggestion performance, a winning content confirmation performance, etc.) is acquired in advance.

In other words, the specific event for which the occurrence or non-occurrence is determined based on pre-obtained specific information (random numbers) is not limited to transition to AT mode, but may also be transition to an advantageous section, or VB mode. It may be a transition to a specialized zone, it may be an addition to the number of games, or it may be an addition to a predetermined number of games (more or less number of additional games). Alternatively, it may be the occurrence of a predetermined effect.

(2) As an example of a game state transition, we have explained the states (1st BB state, 2nd BB state, 4th RT state) where the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is high, but the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is lower. May be applied to any state. The winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery may be determined by the winning probability of a specific role that triggers the AT mode transition lottery, or an AT counter C etc. that is associated with the specific role. may be defined by the number of values, or may be both.

(3) The AT mode transition lottery is conducted based on the AT counter C, etc., the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held, and the gaming state in which the AT mode transition lottery is held. parameters may be used, and any configuration that uses at least the random number (AT counter C) obtained in advance and the lottery result of the game may be used. Other parameters may include, for example, the number of games played, the number of times a predetermined game result (for example, a bell) is won or won, the lottery result of a game before the current game (game history), and the like.

(4) The AT counter C, etc., as a lottery random number used in the AT mode transition lottery, was configured to be acquired at the third stop OFF operation among the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44, but it can be acquired at other timings. It may also be a configuration. For example, it may be during the first stop OFF operation, the second stop OFF operation, or the first to third stop ON operations. Further, it may be configured to be acquired based on the operation of the start lever 41, or it may be configured to be acquired based on the operation of the credit input switches 56 to 58. These operations may be valid operations that cause the game to proceed based on the operations, or may be configured to be acquired based on invalid operations such as during a period in which the operations are invalidated. Further, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the data is acquired immediately based on the operation, but may be configured to be acquired after a predetermined period of time based on the operation, or when the middle stop switch 43 is operated after the left stop switch 42 is operated. may be obtained by a combination of a plurality of operations, for example, the information may be obtained by a combination of a plurality of operations, such as when the left stop switch 42 is operated and then the right stop switch 44 is operated.

(5) The configuration is such that one AT counter C etc. is acquired as a lottery random number used in the AT mode transition lottery based on one third stop OFF operation, but there is a one-to-one relationship between the operation and the number of acquisitions. However, the relationship may be one-to-many, plural-to-one, or plural-to-many. More specifically, it may be configured to acquire multiple AT counters C etc. based on one operation, or it may be configured to acquire one AT counter C etc. based on multiple operations, or it may be configured to acquire multiple AT counters C etc. based on multiple operations. A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of AT counters C etc. are acquired based on the operation. In a one-to-many relationship, for example, two AT counters C, etc. are obtained when a third stop OFF operation is performed in a predetermined game, and two AT counters C, etc. are acquired when the third stop OFF operation is performed in the game following the predetermined game. The number of AT counters C, etc. is determined by the relationship between the consumption frequency and the acquisition frequency, such as not acquiring them, and then acquiring two AT counters C, etc. at the third stop OFF operation in the next game. It is advisable to adjust the acquisition timing so that the number is always a constant number. In addition, in a multiple-to-one relationship, the number of AT counters C, etc. may be acquired based on multiple operations such as a second stop OFF operation and a third stop OFF operation, for example. It is best to adjust it so that it always remains a constant number.

(6) The AT mode transition lottery is configured to be performed based on the operation of the start lever 41, but at least at the timing when the lottery result of the current game can be grasped and the AT counter C etc. has been acquired in advance. For example, an AT mode transition lottery may be performed based on the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 (first to third stop ON operations, first to third stop OFF operations). Incidentally, in the configuration where the AT mode transition lottery is performed at the time of the third stop OFF operation, both the acquisition of AT counter C etc. and the AT mode transition lottery are performed based on the third stop OFF operation. The AT counter C, etc. that is acquired is the AT counter C, etc. used in subsequent games, and the AT counter C, etc. used for the AT mode transition lottery is the AT counter C, etc. used in the game before the third stop OFF operation. This is the one acquired during the third stop OFF operation.

(7) The random number acquisition process may be performed before the lottery process (FIG. 16). For example, the random number acquisition process may be started between step S210 and step S211 (lottery process) in the normal process (FIG. 15). By doing so, it becomes clearer that the AT counter C etc. are acquired independently without being influenced by the lottery result of the game.

(8) When acquiring the AT counter C etc. in the random number acquisition process, the AT counter C etc. can be acquired independently of the lottery result of the game concerned without being influenced by the lottery result etc. of the game at the time of acquisition. Although the configuration is such that the AT counter C etc. acquired based on the lottery result of the game etc. may be different. For example, when the lottery result of the game is the first result such as strong cherry, the AT counter C with a value of 1 from "1" to "64" is acquired as the first numerical range, and the game If the lottery result is a second result such as strong watermelon, the AT counter C with a value of 1 from "65" to "128" is acquired as the second numerical range. A configuration may be adopted in which the numerical value to be acquired is defined based on the lottery result.

(9) As the winning mode for the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, we have set a winning mode in which a prize may be missed depending on the operating timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, but a winning mode in which a winning is achieved regardless of the operating timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 is set. may be set. In this case, the presence or absence of missed winnings may be configured to differ depending on the type of BB, for example, the first BB is set to a winning mode in which missed winnings may occur, and the second BB is set to a winning mode in which missed winnings may not occur.

(10) Regarding the 11th re-gaming and 12th re-gaming in which a prize is won in the 4th RT state A or 4th RT state B, a winning is achieved as long as the operating order matches, regardless of the operating timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Although the winning mode has been set, it is also possible to set a winning mode in which winnings may be missed depending on the operation timing. In this case, for example, if the eleventh re-game win is not achieved, the first re-game win is achieved, so that any re-game win may be achieved.

(11) Regarding the 11th re-game and the 12th re-game where a prize is won in the 4th RT state A or the 4th RT state B, the winning flag may be carried over until the prize is won, as in the 1st BB or the 2nd BB.

(12) Although the termination condition for the first BB state and the second BB state is that the upper limit number of medals has been paid out, other termination conditions may be defined. For example, there are configurations where the game ends when a predetermined number of games are played, configurations where the game ends when a predetermined number of wins (with predetermined results) are achieved, and a configuration where the game ends when a predetermined number of games are won (with a predetermined result). There is a configuration in which the game ends when the number of increased (decreased) medals, which is the difference, reaches a predetermined number, or when a predetermined end result (so-called punk win) is won, or when a predetermined end result is won. It may be configured to end. In these cases, the termination conditions may be different between the first BB state and the second BB state, and the termination conditions may be greater than the number (10) of AT counters C etc. stored in the lottery information storage area 106f. It is preferable that there are cases in which the game ends with a long number of games and cases in which the game ends with a number of games that are shorter than the number (10).

(13) Normal replay, push order replay, push order bell, etc. were set up as the lottery results that can be won in the regular game, and these lottery results were made so that they could not be won in the BB game, but they could also be won in the BB game. You may also do so. In this case, the probability of winning at BB is set to be lower than the probability of winning at normal times, or the winning probability at BB is set to be lower than the winning probability at BB than at AT counter C, etc. By setting the number of AT counters C, etc., which result in an AT mode shift winning result, to be smaller, it becomes more difficult to become an AT mode shift win triggered by these lottery results during BB times than in normal times. In addition, we have set up the 1st prize in BB, the 2nd prize in BB, and the 3rd prize in BB as the lottery results that can be won in games during BB, and we have made it so that these lottery results cannot be won in regular games. , it may also be possible to win in normal times. In this case, the probability of winning in normal times is set to be lower than the probability of winning in BB, or the probability of winning in normal times is set to be lower than the probability of winning in normal times than in AT counter C, etc., where the winning probability of AT mode transition is won in these lottery results in BB. By setting the number of AT counters C, etc., which result in AT mode transition winnings in the results, to be smaller, it becomes more difficult to become AT mode transition winnings triggered by these lottery results in normal times than in BB times.

(14) Concerning the status display, if the status display has already been performed for another special image, the configuration is configured to restrict the start of the status display for the current special image, but the status display that has already been performed will be terminated. The configuration may be such that the status display for the current special image is started after the current status is displayed, or it is possible to decide whether to give priority to the status display that has already been performed or the current status display (whether to start the current status display or not). The configuration may be such that the decision (whether or not) is determined by a lottery or the like, and which situation display is given priority may be changed depending on the target special image or the contents of the situation display.

(15) In a configuration that displays a hold display using a special image, if a lottery to switch to AT mode is held based on the lottery result that is subject to the hold display (if the AT mode switch is won), The contents of the performance may be different depending on when the AT mode transition lottery is held based on a lottery result different from the target lottery result (when the AT mode transition is won). In addition, when the AT mode transition lottery is held based on the lottery result that is subject to the pending display (in the case where the AT mode transition is won), and when the lottery result is not displayed and the pending display is not performed, The content of the presentation may be different depending on when the AT mode transition lottery is held (when the AT mode transition is won). For example, in a game that is the target of the first special image P1 corresponding to cherries, if a lottery to shift to AT mode is held with strong cherries or weak cherries, and in a game that is the target of the first special image P1, Depending on the case where the AT mode transition lottery is held at Watermelon, the game on the auxiliary display section 65 for which the AT mode transition lottery was held or the result of the transition lottery may be displayed differently.

(16) In a configuration in which the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB can be obtained, the normal AT counter CA is used to perform the AT mode transition lottery, and the BB AT counter CB is consumed. However, at the time of BB, AT counter CB for BB is used to perform the AT mode transition lottery, and only the normal AT counter CA is consumed, so that the AT counters CA and CB are consumed regardless of the state. In normal times, the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the normal AT counter CA, and the BB AT counter CB is not consumed (retained), and during BB, the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the BB AT counter CB. We have described a configuration in which the AT counters CA and CB are consumed differently depending on the state, such as in which the normal AT counter CA is not consumed (maintained), but the player can select whether or not they are consumed. You can also use it as That is, for example, after performing the AT mode transition lottery using the normal AT counter CA in normal times, a predetermined operation unit (for example, the credit input switch 56) determines whether or not to consume the BB AT counter CB. 58) may be configured such that the player can select it based on the operation.

(17) The normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB may have different update ranges. Specifically, for example, the normal AT counter CA may be updated in the range of "1" to "128", while the BB AT counter CB may be updated in the range of "1" to "64". Often, the update range may be set depending on the probability of winning the AT mode transition. More specifically, depending on the update range, the minimum probability of winning to switch to AT mode is defined (in the update range of 1 to 128, the minimum probability is 1/128). If you want to lower the rate, it is best to widen the update range, but on the other hand, as the update range becomes wider, the number of random numbers that will result in AT mode transition winning will increase for the same winning probability, which will complicate the configuration and complicate the process. may occur. Therefore, by allowing the update ranges of the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB to be different as described above, it becomes possible to customize each counter for the gaming state in which the AT mode transition lottery is held. .

(18) If the lottery result of the game is a strong watermelon as a predetermined result, and if the value of the normal AT counter CA is the predetermined value (65), you will win the AT mode transition lottery, but the normal AT counter CA When the value (65) of the AT counter CB for BB corresponding to the predetermined value of , the AT mode transition lottery is not won, as shown in (15) above, the AT counter CA for normal use and the AT counter CB for BB In a configuration in which the update ranges are different from each other, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which whether the AT mode transition is won or not is different when the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the converted value assuming the update range is the same. More specifically, for example, in a configuration where the update range of the normal AT counter CA is "1" to "128" and the update range of the BB AT counter CB is "1" to "256", the normal AT counter If you want to target a strong watermelon that can be switched to AT mode with CA "65", use "130" and "131" of the BB AT counter CB as the corresponding BB AT counter CB to switch to AT mode at the time of strong watermelon. It is best to prevent this from becoming a transition win. If the update range of the BB AT counter CB is "1" to "64", "32" or "33" is set as the corresponding BB AT counter CB and the AT mode is set at strong watermelon. It is better to avoid becoming a transitional winner.

(19) The normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB may have different upper limit storage numbers. Specifically, the normal AT counter CA is configured to be able to store a larger number than the BB AT counter CB, and the BB AT counter CB is able to store a larger number than the normal AT counter CA. It is also possible to have a configuration in which In these cases, although the upper limit storage number is different, the actual number to be stored may be the same.

(20) The configuration is configured to display a hold display corresponding to the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB, but during normal times, only the hold display corresponding to the normal AT counter CA is displayed, and during BB time, the hold display corresponding to the BB AT counter CB is displayed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which only the hold display corresponding to the AT counter CB is displayed, or in normal times, only the hold display corresponding to the BB AT counter CB is displayed, and during BB, only the hold display corresponding to the normal AT counter CA is displayed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is done. Furthermore, it may be difficult or impossible to identify whether the displayed pending display corresponds to the normal AT counter CA or the BB AT counter CB. good.

(21) A configuration in which the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB have different values for winning the AT mode transition during normal times and BB times, but a common AT counter C is used for both normal times and BB times. The above configuration may be applied to. That is, for example, in the AT mode transition lottery based on a predetermined specific winning combination, the value of the AT counter C for winning the AT mode transition during normal and BB times may be different.

(22) A configuration that shifts to the normal gaming state after the end of either the first BB state or the second BB state, and shifts to the normal gaming state after the end of the first BB state, but shifts to the fourth RT state after the end of the second BB state. Although we have described a configuration in which the state transitions to the fourth RT state after the end of either the first BB state or the second BB state, a configuration in which the state transitions to the fourth RT state after the end of the first BB state may be adopted. After the end of the second BB state, it may be configured to shift to a normal gaming state, or it may be configured to shift to another gaming state (for example, a first RT state to a third RT state).

(23) Although we have described a configuration in which the initial random number acquisition process is executed when the winning probability setting process is started in the main process when the power is turned on, the power is turned on regardless of whether the winning probability setting process is started. The configuration may be such that the initial random number acquisition process is executed at times, or the initial random number acquisition process may be executed when the power is turned on regardless of whether or not the RAM 106 initialization process is executed. In this case, if an AT counter C, etc. is stored in the lottery information storage area 106f during the initial random number acquisition process, after clearing the AT counter C, etc., a new AT counter C, etc. acquisition process is performed. The configuration may be such that the stored AT counter C, etc. is retained and no new AT counter C, etc. acquisition process is performed, or the new AT counter C, etc. acquisition process (the stored AT counter C, etc. is not performed). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which whether or not to execute the AT counter C clearing process) is determined by lottery or the like.

Furthermore, for example, if the configuration is such that the acquired AT counter C etc. is cleared during the initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section, the initial random number acquisition process is triggered by the end of the advantageous section, for example, during the normal section. It may also be configured to be performed at the start.

(24) In the initial random number acquisition process, we have explained a configuration in which random numbers for other lottery games are acquired and converted to AT counter C, etc., but in the normal random number acquisition process, random numbers for other lottery games are acquired. A configuration may also be applied in which the data is converted into an AT counter C or the like.

(25) When converting other random numbers for lottery into AT counter C etc., a conversion table is stored in advance and converted according to the conversion table, but it is also possible to convert randomly at the time of acquisition. .

(26) The random numbers for other lottery drawings were configured to be converted into AT counters C, etc., but after acquiring multiple AT counters C, etc. with the same value, the AT counters C, etc. are converted to generate multiple types of values. It may also be configured to be stored as an AT counter C or the like. In this case, it is preferable to allow the AT counter C to have the same value during the conversion. In other words, the conversion process is not limited to a configuration that converts a random number for another lottery into an AT counter C, etc., but also a configuration that converts the AT counter C itself into an AT counter C (with a different value), etc. .

(27) Although the configuration is such that random numbers for other lottery drawings are converted to AT counter C, etc., it is also possible to obtain a random number exclusively for that and convert it to AT counter C, etc., and obtain a random number exclusively for that. It is also possible to store the data as an AT counter C or the like without performing conversion processing.

(28) Although the configuration has been described in which random numbers for other lottery drawings are converted into AT counter C, etc., a configuration may also be adopted in which a random number that does not require conversion is selected, and the random number is acquired and stored as is. The random number that does not require conversion preferably has at least the same update range as the AT counter C or the like.

(29) Although the configuration is such that the random numbers for other lottery games are converted into the AT counter C, etc., the configuration may be such that the random numbers for other lottery games are stored as they are as the AT counter C, etc. In this case, for example, when obtaining a random number (1 to 64) whose update range is narrower than the update range of AT counter C (1 to 128) among random numbers with different update ranges, if the random number is included in the update range of the random number, AT mode transition lottery will not be held with a value that is not valid, so if there is a lottery result that has that value set as AT mode transition winning (for example, strong watermelon), AT mode transition winning will occur with that lottery result. do not. Therefore, in an AT mode transition lottery with a value that is not included in such an update range, it is preferable to set the AT mode transition lottery table so that even if the lottery results are used, the AT mode transition lottery will not be won. In addition, when obtaining a random number (1 to 256) whose update range is wider than the update range of AT counter C (1 to 128), an AT mode transition lottery with a value that is not included in the update range of AT counter C is performed. In this case, regardless of the lottery result, it is impossible to win the AT mode transition. Therefore, in such a case, it is preferable to conduct an AT mode transition lottery using a lottery table set such that a value outside the update range of the AT counter C can result in an AT mode transition winning.

(30) Although the random numbers for other lottery drawings were configured to be converted to AT counter C, etc., the random numbers for other lottery drawings were configured to be stored as they are as AT counter C, etc., and for example, the AT mode was changed for each random number. A configuration may also be adopted in which a lottery table is set. Thereby, even when the AT mode transition lottery is performed using random numbers whose update range is different from that of the AT counter C, etc., it is possible to suitably perform the lottery.

(31) The structure is such that when a transition replay is won, a special announcement is made to notify which transition should occur between the 4th RT state A and the 4th RT state B. However, when the transition replay is won, the 4th RT state Only the notification that a transition to state B is likely to occur (for example, FIG. 120(c)) is made, and when the transition actually occurs, the AT counter C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f is It may also be configured to notify the degree of expectation of winning the AT mode transition based on the above (FIG. 122(b)).

(32) When transitioning to the fourth RT state A or the fourth RT state B, the expectation level of winning the transition to AT mode is notified at once based on the AT counter C etc. stored in the lottery information storage area 106f ( Although the configuration is shown in FIG. 122(b), it is also possible to use a configuration in which, as in the first embodiment, it is possible to individually notify which games are likely to result in AT mode transition winnings, using a hold display or the like.

(33) It may be made difficult or impossible to distinguish which state the user is staying in, the fourth RT state A or the fourth RT state B, from the presentation of the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. Note that this configuration makes the winning probabilities of Cherry Replay and Suikari Play the same in the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B, but the AT mode transition during Cherry Replay and Suikari Play is made possible by the association of AT counter C. It is preferable to apply a configuration in which the probability of winning is different between the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B.

(34) AT in the cherry replay or watermelon play in the 4th RT state A, which is most likely to trigger an AT mode transition win, and the watermelon play, which is most likely to trigger an AT mode transition win in the 4th RT state B. The AT mode transition lottery result is pre-read based on the assumption that a mode transition lottery will be held, but the lottery results that are most likely to trigger an AT mode transition lottery are provided separately from Cherry Replay and Suikari Play. Good too.

(35) Using Cherry Replay, which has the highest probability of winning in each game in the 4th RT state A, and Suikari Play, which has the highest probability of winning in each game in the 4th RT state B, shift to AT mode in the cherry replay or watermelon play. Although the configuration is such that the result of the AT mode transition lottery is pre-read on the assumption that a lottery will be held, the lottery result with the highest probability of winning may be provided separately from Cherry Replay and Suikari Play.

(36) As the AT counter C that wins AT mode transition, the value associated with Cherry Replay is the smaller value in the update range, and the value associated with Watermelon Replay is the larger value. , in a configuration that predicts which AT counter C corresponds to which replay is stored based on the integrated value of each AT counter C, by calculating the average value instead of the integrated value, it is possible to predict which AT counter C corresponds to which replay. It may be configured to predict whether or not is stored. In this case, if the value of the AT counter C associated with the lottery result to be predicted is within a predetermined range (for example, 1 to 64), the average value of the stored AT counter C calculated above is within the predetermined range. is included, it is possible to predict that the lottery result to be predicted is likely to result in a successful transition to AT mode. In addition, the closer the calculated average value of the stored AT counter C is to the average value of a predetermined range (for example, 1 to 64) of the AT counter C associated with the lottery result to be predicted, the more It is also possible to predict that the AT mode transition will likely be won based on the target lottery result.

(37) In the configuration in which the result of the AT mode transition lottery is predicted by performing calculation processing on the stored AT counters C, etc., the calculation processing is not limited to the integration processing of each AT counter C, but may be performed as described above. The process of calculating the average value may be used as an arithmetic process, the process of counting the number of objects as in the fourth embodiment may be used as an arithmetic process, the process of calculating the difference may be a process of calculation, or any of the other four arithmetic processes may be used as an arithmetic process. The process of performing calculations may be referred to as calculation processing. For example, if the process of computing a difference is defined as an arithmetic process, if the difference is small, the values of the AT counters C that are the targets of the arithmetic process will be similar, and if the difference is large, the values of the AT counters C that are the targets of the arithmetic process will be similar. The value of counter C will be significantly different. If they are similar, it is predicted that the AT mode transition lottery using the same lottery result will likely result in the same result, and if so, it is predicted that consecutive wins or consecutive losses will occur. In addition, if they are significantly different, it is predicted that the same lottery result will likely result in a different result in the AT mode transition lottery, and if so, it is predicted that one of the AT mode transition lottery results will be won (or lost). be done.

(38) In the configuration in which the stored AT counters C are subjected to calculation processing, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which all AT counters C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f are subjected to calculation processing, a predetermined The AT counter C and the other AT counters C may be picked up and subjected to calculation processing. Which AT counter C is to be picked up may be determined by picking up the AT counter C of a predetermined storage area, such as the one with the smallest number (RE1 and RE2) among the storage areas RE1 to RE10. However, the storage area to be picked up may be determined by lottery. Furthermore, the number of AT counters C to be subjected to arithmetic processing may be two or more, and may be three or more. The number may also be a predetermined number, or may be determined by lottery.

Further, the number of AT counters C to be subjected to the calculation process, the storage area in which they are stored, etc. may be configured to vary depending on the timing of the calculation process, the gaming state, and the lottery result of the game.

(39) Among the update ranges of the AT counter C, a specific range that is likely to result in a transition to AT mode is determined, the number of values within that specific range is determined, and the CZ mode is set based on the determined result. As in the embodiment 4, assuming that the AT mode transition lottery was held based on the lottery result with the highest probability of winning in each game in the gaming state, the number of winning AT mode transitions is grasped, and the grasping result is The CZ mode may be set based on the arithmetic processing of each AT counter C, or the CZ mode may be set based on the calculation processing of each AT counter C.

(40) The configuration is such that the CZ mode is set when the number of stored AT counters C with values within a specific range exceeds a predetermined number (5). The configuration may be such that the CZ mode is set in stages depending on the number of Cs stored. For example, a 1st CZ mode, a 2nd CZ mode, and a 3rd CZ mode are established in descending order of the expected value for winning the AT mode transition, and when the number of AT counters C stored with a value within a specific range is 3 or more, the 1st CZ mode is selected. mode, and when there are five or more, the mode is shifted to the second CZ mode, and when there are seven or more, the mode is shifted to the third CZ mode.

(41) In a configuration in which the CZ mode is set when the number of stored AT counters C with a value within a specific range exceeds a predetermined number, the CZ mode is set when the number exceeds the predetermined number and a predetermined start condition is met. It is also possible to configure the settings. The predetermined start condition is, for example, that the number of stored AT counters C with a value within a specific range is equal to or greater than a predetermined number for a predetermined number of games, or that the lottery result of the game is a predetermined result. (any rare role).

(42) A specific combination was set as the lottery result that triggers the AT mode transition lottery, and there was no difference in the winning probability depending on the set value for the specific combination, but there is a difference in the winning probability depending on the set value. A configuration may also be adopted in which a lottery for switching to AT mode is performed based on the lottery results. In addition, we set a transition trigger as the lottery result that triggers the advantageous section transition lottery, and we made sure that there is no difference in winning probability depending on the setting value for the transition trigger, but there is a difference in winning probability depending on the setting value. It may also be configured to perform an advantageous section transition lottery based on a certain lottery result.

(43) The AT mode transition lottery may also be executed in combinations with BB (strong cherry duplication 1 with index value IV = 34 to 51, etc.), or it may be configured to execute the AT mode transition lottery in combination with BB (strong cherry duplication 1 with index value IV = 34 to 51, etc.), or it may be possible to execute the AT mode transition lottery in combination with BB (strong cherry duplication 1 with index value IV = 34 to 51, etc.), or BB wins alone (index value IV = 52, 53) ), or may be executed at CB winning or lottery results (index value IV=54 to 58) during CB state. Even in these cases, the trigger for the AT mode transition lottery may be a lottery result with a difference in winning probability depending on the set value.

(44) The invention has been explained in which the game state occurs when the first BB or the second BB is won or when the transition replay 1 and 2 are won. The inventions may be applied to a case where a player wins an MB (middle bonus) and moves to the MB state, a case where a REG (regular bonus) is won and moves to a REG state, etc. Furthermore, the respective inventions may be applied to the cases where the first BB state, the second BB state, the fourth RT state, the fourth RT state A, the fourth RT state B, or any of these other states end, as cases in which a state transition occurs. good. Further, depending on the type of game state that can be transferred, the types and conditions of occurrence of the hold display, special notification, and specific notification may be varied. For example, if the second BB is won, the pending display is performed without going through the pending display lottery (Modification 1 of the first embodiment), whereas if the first BB is won, the pending display is performed without going through the pending display lottery. It is also possible to have a configuration in which only the winning items are displayed on hold.

(45) The ball output rate changes depending on each setting value, with setting 1 having the lowest ball output rate and setting 6 having the highest ball output rate. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or manner of increase or decrease in the amount changes. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the ball payout rates for some setting values are the same and the ball payout rates for other setting values are different, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate. Further, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high rate of increase/decrease in the number of balls put out, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low rate of increase/decrease in the number of balls put out. In addition, settings 1 and 5 increase the number of balls in a short period of time and decrease the number of balls in a long period of time, while settings 2, 3, and 4 take a longer time to increase the number of balls than in settings 1 and 5. It takes a shorter time than settings 1 and 5 to reduce the predetermined amount, and setting 6 may have a configuration in which almost no increase or decrease in the number of balls produced occurs. In these cases, the ball payout rate for each set value may be the same.

(46) Although a description has been given of a slot machine that includes three reels and three stop switches corresponding to the reels in parallel, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, a slot machine that includes five reels and stop switches corresponding to the reels in parallel. It may also be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operations in stopping the reels, it is sufficient to have at least two reels and stop switches corresponding thereto. Furthermore, although a slot machine has been described in which the active line is set to 1 line when the number of bets is 3, the present invention is not limited to this configuration; for example, the active line may be 5 lines.

(47) Although a specific example has been shown for the slot machine 10, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a slot machine and a pachinko machine. That is, the slot machine may be a gaming machine (a so-called reel-type gaming machine using balls) that has ball insertion and ball payout functions, such as a pachinko machine, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

For example, if a pachinko machine or a reel-type game machine using balls is configured to have multiple levels of setting values that change the ball payout rate, etc., each of the above inventions may be applied to suggest and teach these setting values. good. In this case, in a pachinko machine that has a high probability state and a low probability state in which the jackpot probability is high or low, the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high probability state, and the ball enters the predetermined entry section. In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state where the ball rate varies, the above inventions may be applied by setting the advantageous section of the slot machine 10 to the high ball entry state.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

The inventions shown in each feature group below are as follows: ``Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as types of gaming machines.In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions. There is a known configuration in which a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.Specifically, in the case of a slot machine, when a start lever is operated in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. Then, an internal lottery is carried out, and the reels start rotating.If the stop switch is operated while the reels are rotating, the reels stop rotating.Then, the reel stop result is determined by the internal lottery. If the game machine corresponds to the result of It is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to be visible through the display unit, the A benefit granting means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to a predetermined result;
Equipped with
A first game state (for example, normal game state) and a second game state (for example, a second game state) have different probabilities that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a predetermined special result (for example, strong cherry, cherry replay, watermelon play). 1BB state, 2nd BB state, 4th RT state A and 4th RT state B) are set,
A gaming state transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing and RT state processing by the main controller 101) for shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined transition condition; ) A gaming machine comprising:
a specific information acquisition unit (a function for executing random number acquisition processing in the main controller 101) that acquires specific information (AT counter C) based on the fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
Specific lottery means capable of executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event (transition to AT mode) will occur, using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery device. (Function to execute AT mode transition lottery by main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, specific execution means (by the main controller 101) that causes the specific event to occur. (a function to execute processing for transitioning to AT mode),
The specific lottery means uses predetermined specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means in the first gaming state and stored in the specific information storage means, and the lottery result by the lottery means in the second gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific lottery can be executed using the following.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting stops, In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means are stored. Since a specific lottery is performed to determine whether or not a specific event will occur using the specific information stored in the means, it is no longer possible to simply match the lottery results of the lottery means with the results of stopping the orbiting body. The game experience is completely different from that of a slot machine.

Moreover, a first gaming state and a second gaming state are provided in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result is different, and the specific information acquired in the first gaming state and the game in the second gaming state are provided. A specific lottery can be executed using the lottery results. Therefore, in games using specific lottery, an element such as whether or not a transition of the gaming state occurs after acquiring specific information is added, and the elements that players are interested in are diversified, and the elements that attract players are diversified. It can be played as a game. More specifically, for example, if the acquired specific information is information that corresponds to the content that if the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result, the person will win the specific lottery (the result of the specific lottery will be the specific result). After acquiring the specific information, the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state occurs, and the probability of winning the specific lottery changes after the fact. Therefore, a player who wants to cause a specific event may want to move to a state where the probability of a special result is high, or may not want to shift to a state where the probability of a special result is low. Players who do not want this to occur may want to change the state of the acquired results, such as hoping that the probability of a special result will be low or not moving to a state that has a high probability of a special result. It becomes possible to realize novel gameplay that makes users expect whether or not there will be a transition in the gaming state in relation to the specific information.

Regarding the "specific lottery means", "whether or not a specific event is caused by using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the special result of the lottery results by the lottery means" It may also be expressed as "specific lottery means capable of executing the specific lottery."

Further, in the above configuration, "the specific lottery means collects predetermined specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means in a predetermined game and stored in the specific information storage means, and The specific lottery can be executed using the lottery results of the lottery means in the specific game, which is a game of It can be made clearer that a specific lottery may be held in relation to game results.

Note that "specific information storage means capable of storing the specific information" may also be expressed as "specific information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information", or "specific information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information". It may also be expressed as "specific information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information." Such changes in representation can also be applied to other features or groups of features.

Feature A2. The predetermined specific information stored in the specific information storage device can be specified by a destination specifying device (for example, a pending display by the display control device 81) that can specify the predetermined specific information stored in the specific information storage device before the predetermined specific information becomes a target of the specific lottery. function to perform processing), and
A specific notification execution means (a process for displaying a special image in a pending display process by the display control device 81) that can execute a specific notification corresponding to the identification result by the destination identification means on a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) ) and
The gaming machine according to feature A1, comprising:

According to the above configuration, the specific notification corresponding to the acquired specific information is made by the predetermined notification means, and it is determined whether it is better to cause a transition of the gaming state while checking the specific notification. You can play games while playing the game. Therefore, the game of feature A1 can be suitably executed.

Feature A3. The specific notification execution means executes, as the specific notification, a notification corresponding to a lottery result by the lottery unit that results in the specified result or is likely to result in the specified result when the specific lottery is performed using the predetermined specific information. The gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized in that it is possible to.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp from the specific notification what kind of lottery result by the lottery means will be a specific result or is likely to be a specific result regarding the acquired specific information. By doing this, it is possible to judge whether or not the presence or absence of a shift in the gaming state will be advantageous for the player in relation to the specific notification, and to give benefits based on the lottery results for each game. This will attract more interest than the benefits granted by the granting means. Therefore, the interest in the game is improved.

Feature A4. The specific lottery means is
When the specific lottery is performed using the first result (for example, strong cherry) of the lottery results by the lottery means and the first specific information (for example, 5 of AT counter C) among the specific information. The above specific result is obtained,
A configuration that can result in the specific result when the specific lottery is performed using a second result different from the first result (for example, weak cherry) among the lottery results by the lottery means and the first specific information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3.

According to the above configuration, in a game in which a specific lottery is performed using already acquired specific information and a game lottery result, the relationship between the specific information and the game lottery result when the specific lottery result is a specific result. is not in a one-to-one relationship, and a plurality of lottery results are associated with one specific information. By doing this, the specific lottery results can be diversified, and even if specific information is obtained that is associated with the lottery results of games that are unlikely to appear, the specific results will be different in relation to other lottery results. There remains a possibility that this will happen, and the fun of the game will increase.

Feature A5. The specific lottery means is
When the specific lottery is performed using the first result (for example, strong cherry) of the lottery results by the lottery means and the first specific information (for example, 5 of AT counter C) among the specific information. The above specific result is obtained,
The specific lottery is performed using the first result of the lottery results by the lottery means and second specific information (for example, 6 of AT counter C) that is different from the first specific information among the specific information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the specified result can be obtained when the gaming machine is played.

According to the above configuration, in a game in which a specific lottery is performed using already acquired specific information and a game lottery result, the relationship between the specific information and the game lottery result when the specific lottery result is a specific result. is not in a one-to-one relationship, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are associated with one lottery result. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the specific lottery while preventing the lottery results of games related to the specific lottery from becoming too complicated.

Feature A6. The specific lottery means selects a third result (for example, strong cherry or 3rd winning combination in BB) of the lottery results by the lottery means and third specific information (for example, 1 of AT counter C) among the specific information. is configured such that when the specific lottery is conducted using , the specific result will be obtained,
If a lottery is held by the lottery means in the second gaming state, the third result will be obtained, whereas if a lottery is conducted by the lottery means in the first gaming state, the third result will not be obtained. Or, the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, characterized in that the third result is less likely to occur than in the second gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the third specific information is acquired by the specific information acquisition means, if the lottery result of the game becomes the third result, the specific lottery is won. However, in the first gaming state, the setting is such that the third result does not occur or is less likely to result in the third result than in the second gaming state. With such a configuration, in the gameplay where a specific lottery is held using the specific information acquired in advance by the specific information acquisition means and the lottery results of the subsequent game, the specific information acquired in advance is If the specific information is the third specific information, it is possible to make the player desire to transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. Therefore, the interest in the game is improved by making the player pay attention to whether or not there is a transition in the game state based on the relationship with the specific information.

Feature A7. The specific lottery means uses the fourth result (for example, normal replay) of the lottery results by the lottery means and the fourth specific information (for example, 3 of AT counter C) among the specific information. It is configured so that the specific result will be obtained when a specific lottery is conducted,
If a lottery is held by the lottery means in the first gaming state, the fourth result will be obtained, whereas if a lottery is conducted by the lottery means in the second gaming state, the fourth result will not be obtained. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that the fourth result is less likely to occur than in the first gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the fourth specific information is acquired by the specific information acquisition means, if the lottery result of the game becomes the fourth result, the specific lottery is won, and in the first game state, the fourth result is However, in the second gaming state, the setting is such that the fourth result does not occur or is more likely to occur than in the first gaming state. With such a configuration, in the gameplay where a specific lottery is held using the specific information acquired in advance by the specific information acquisition means and the lottery results of the subsequent game, the specific information acquired in advance is If the specific information is the fourth specific information, it is possible to make it desirable that the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state does not occur. Therefore, the interest in the game is improved by making the player pay attention to whether or not there is a transition in the game state based on the relationship with the specific information.

Feature A8. The second gaming state includes a first specific state (first BB state, fourth RT state A) and a second specific state (second BB state, fourth RT state B) in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result is different. ), The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7.

According to the above configuration, in the game that provides the fun of determining whether or not a transition of the gaming state occurs after acquiring the specific information, the lottery means determines whether the transition occurs in the first specific state or the second specific state. The contents of the lottery will be different, for example, it will be more advantageous if the transition to the first specified state occurs due to the relationship with the specific information that has already been obtained than if the transition to the second specified state occurs. With the above-mentioned gameplay, it is possible to attract interest in the destination.

Feature A9. The transition condition is that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (first BB winning, second BB winning), and the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the valid position. is set,
A reservation means (a function for executing a process of carrying over the bonus winning flag by the main control device 101) capable of retaining the information that the transfer result is winning until the transfer symbol combination stops at the valid position. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8.

The above configuration is a configuration that occurs when the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state results in a transition result winning and the transition symbol combination stops, and the transition result winning occurs until the transition symbol combination stops. The configuration will be carried over. By applying such a configuration to feature A1, in the gameplay where specific information is acquired in advance and a specific lottery is performed based on the lottery result of the game, the second game state is changed in relation to the acquired specific information. A game feature is created in which the player judges whether or not it is better to cause a transition, and then stops the pattern combination for transition when the situation is such that it would be better to transition.

Feature A10. As the transition condition, the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (transition replay 1 win, transition replay 2 win), and the symbol combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the valid position. It is set that
In a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transfer result, if the transfer symbol combination does not stop at the valid position, an erasing means ( Regardless of whether the main controller 101 has a function of executing a process of erasing the winning flag of each game or the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, the lottery result by the lottery means is the transfer result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that the transitional symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position in a game where the game is played.

In the above configuration, the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state occurs when the transition result is a win and the symbol combination for transition stops, and the information on the transition result winning is only for that game. It becomes valid. By doing this, in the gameplay where specific information is acquired in advance and a specific lottery is drawn based on the lottery results of the game, a transition to the second gaming state is caused in relation to the acquired specific information. However, whether or not the transition actually occurs will be strongly influenced by the element of luck. Therefore, for example, in a situation in which it would be advantageous if a transition to a second advantageous state occurs in relation to specific information, the results of the lottery means of each game will attract a lot of attention, and players will be excited to play the game. It becomes possible to perform the following.

Feature A11. The drive control means is capable of stopping the transfer pattern combination at the effective position when the stop operation means is operated in a predetermined operation mode, and the drive control means is capable of stopping the transfer pattern combination at the valid position. The gaming machine according to feature A9 or feature A10, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the transfer pattern combination cannot be stopped at the valid position when the gaming machine is operated in an operating mode different from the operating mode.

According to the above configuration, even if the transition result is a win, if it is better not to transition to the second gaming state, the player may change the operation mode of the stop operation means to a different operation mode from the predetermined operation mode. By doing so, it may be possible to prevent the pattern combinations for transition from being stopped, so the player has room to choose the content of the specific lottery, and the fun of the game is improved.

Feature A12. The second gaming state is configured to transition to the first gaming state or another gaming state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined end condition (payout of the upper limit number of payouts, completion of a fixed number of games, etc.),
The specific information storage means is configured to be able to store a predetermined number of the specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, wherein the termination condition can be satisfied with a number of games smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the above configuration, since the second gaming state can end with a number of games smaller than the predetermined number which is the upper limit of the number of specific information stored by the specific information storage means, the second gaming state can be acquired before transitioning to the second gaming state. The second gaming state can end before all the specific information that has been stored is consumed. By doing this, for example, if the specific information corresponds to a situation in which the first gaming state is preferable, it is possible to prevent not only a shift to the second gaming state from occurring, but also a second gaming state. It is also possible to play a game in which a transition to the second gaming state occurs and the second gaming state is ended before the specific information becomes a target of a specific lottery. Therefore, it is possible to more suitably improve the interest of the game, which allows players to enjoy the presence or absence of a transition in the gaming state in relation to the specific information.

Feature A13. The second gaming state is configured to transition to the first gaming state or another gaming state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined end condition (payout of the upper limit number of payouts, completion of a fixed number of games, etc.),
The specific information storage means is configured to be able to store a predetermined number of the specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, wherein the termination condition can be satisfied with a number of games greater than the predetermined number.

According to the above configuration, since the second gaming state can end when the number of games is greater than the predetermined number which is the upper limit of the number of specific information that can be stored in the specific information storage means, it is possible to end the second gaming state by The configuration allows the second gaming state to end after all of the previously acquired specific information has been consumed. By doing this, for example, if the specific information corresponds to a situation where the second gaming state is more preferable than the situation where the first gaming state is, the second gaming state can be moved to the second gaming state. The specific information becomes the target of the specific lottery before the gaming state ends. Therefore, it is possible to more suitably improve the interest of the game, which allows players to enjoy the presence or absence of a transition in the gaming state in relation to the specific information.

Feature A14. The gaming machine according to feature A12 or feature A13, wherein the ending condition is such that the number of games in the second gaming state can vary depending on a lottery result by the lottery means in the second gaming state.

According to the above configuration, an element of luck is added to the number of consecutive games in the second gaming state, and for example, whether specific information favorable to the player becomes a target of a specific lottery during the second gaming state or whether Whether or not the game becomes a target of a specific lottery after the game ends depends on the lottery results of each game in the second gaming state. By doing this, in each game in the second gaming state, it is possible to attract a great deal of interest not only in the specific lottery result, but also in the lottery result of the game in relation to the specific information that follows. .

Feature A15. An end result (for example, a strong cherry as a payout combination) is set as a lottery result by the lottery means in the second gaming state,
The lottery result by the lottery means is the end result, and when the ending symbol combination stops at the valid position, the benefit giving means awards a benefit corresponding to the end result,
The configuration is such that the success or failure of the termination condition may differ depending on whether or not the benefit granting means grants a benefit corresponding to the termination result;
The drive control means is configured to stop the ending symbol combination at the valid position when the stopping operating means is operated in the ending operating mode, while stopping the ending symbol combination in the ending operating mode. The game according to any one of features A12 to A14, characterized in that when operated in a different operation manner, it is possible to control the ending symbol combination so as not to stop it at the valid position. Machine.

According to the above configuration, the operation of the stop operation means of the game that resulted in the end during the second gaming state is related to the success or failure of the ending condition of the second gaming state. More specifically, in a game that has ended, if the stop operation means is operated in the ending operation mode, the ending symbol combination will stop at a valid position and become eligible for benefits, and the game will end. If the operation is performed in a manner different from the previous operation, the ending symbol combination will not stop at the valid position and will not be eligible for benefits. Since the configuration is such that the success or failure of the termination condition may vary depending on whether or not the bonus is granted, whether or not to terminate the second gaming state may vary depending on the operation mode when the termination result is won. By doing this, the player can be involved in deciding whether to end the second gaming state in relation to the specific information by operating the stop operation means, and active participation in the game is encouraged. , it becomes possible to enjoy the operation of the stop operation means more.

Note that the following configuration can be considered as a specific configuration of the above configuration.

“The termination condition is established when the number of gaming media paid out in the second gaming state reaches a predetermined specific number,
The end result is that a predetermined number of game media are awarded as the bonus by the bonus awarding means.

Feature A16. The second gaming state is more advantageous for the player than the first gaming state,
Features A1 to A15 are characterized in that the probability of obtaining the specific result in the specific lottery using the same specific information is more likely to be higher in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state becomes an advantageous state for the player, and if the specific information is the same, the second gaming state is more advantageous than receiving the specific lottery in the first gaming state. If you receive a specific lottery in a gaming state, the probability of obtaining a specific result is higher. With such a configuration, the game feature that makes you expect a transition to the second gaming state, that is, a transition to the jackpot state, can be specified during the second gaming state using the specific information acquired before the transition to the second gaming state. It is possible to match the gameplay of drawing lots. Therefore, it becomes possible to enjoy the second gaming state as a jackpot state even more.

Feature A17. As gaming states, a normal gaming state (normal section) and a first specific gaming state (advantageous section) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state (AT mode) is set which is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific gaming state,
a first transition lottery means (a function of executing an advantageous section transition lottery by the main control device 101) that executes a first transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the first specific gaming state in the normal gaming state;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is a first transition result (advantageous section winning) corresponding to transition to the first specific game state, the first specific game a first specific transition means for transitioning to the state (a function of executing processing for transitioning to the advantageous section by the main controller 101);
a second transition lottery means (a function for executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main controller 101) that executes a second transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is a second transition result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to transition to the second specific gaming state, the second specific A second specific transition means for transitioning to the gaming state (a function for executing processing for transitioning to the AT mode by the main control device 101);
Equipped with
The specific lottery means executes the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means as the specific lottery, and the specific event is causing a transition to the second specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16.

According to the above configuration, a first specific gaming state that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is provided, and a second specific gaming state that is more advantageous as a state included in the first specific gaming state is provided. Therefore, in a gameplay that is based on a step-by-step transition to a state that becomes advantageous, such as transitioning from a normal gaming state to a first specific gaming state and aiming for a second specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state It is possible to create an innovative game experience in which the lottery for transition to the game is performed based on specific information obtained in advance.

Feature A18. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (press order notification) regarding the operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). (a function for executing push order processing by the main control device 101);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, wherein the specific event causes a transition to a state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be performed.

According to the above configuration, the specific lottery performed based on the specific information acquired in advance is a lottery for a specific event that causes a transition to a state in which the navigation of the stop operation mode can be generated. By doing this, with regard to games using navigation in the stop operation mode, the lottery method is such that specific information for the lottery is acquired in advance, and the specific information acquired in advance is effectively used even after the game state transitions. It becomes possible to create innovative gameplay such as

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to be visible through the display unit, the A benefit granting means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to a predetermined result;
Equipped with
A first gaming state (for example, normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, first BB state, second BB state) in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a predetermined special result (for example, strong cherry) is different. ) and are set,
A game comprising a game state transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) that transitions from the first game state to the second game state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined transition condition. It is a machine,
A first specific information acquisition means that acquires the first specific information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined first acquisition condition (a process for acquiring the normal AT counter CA in the random number acquisition process in the main control device 101). function) and
a first specific information storage unit (normal storage area REA in the main controller 101) capable of storing the first specific information acquired by the first specific information acquisition unit;
Whether or not to cause a specific event (transition to AT mode) using at least the first specific information stored in the first specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means in the first gaming state. a first specific lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery based on the normal AT counter CA by the main controller 101);
A second specific information acquisition means that acquires the second specific information based on the fulfillment of a predetermined second acquisition condition (a process for acquiring the BB AT counter CB in the random number acquisition process in the main control device 101). function) and
a second specific information storage unit (BB storage area REB in the main controller 101) capable of storing the second specific information acquired by the second specific information acquisition unit;
At least the second specific information stored in the second specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means in the second gaming state are used to perform a specific lottery to determine whether or not to cause the specific event. a second specific lottery means to execute (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery based on the BB AT counter CB by the main controller 101);
The lottery result of the first specific lottery by the first specific lottery means or the lottery result of the second specific lottery by the second specific lottery means is a specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event. Based on this, a specific execution means for causing the specific event (a function of executing processing for moving the main controller 101 to an advantageous section);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means draws a lottery for the game and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting stops, In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, the lottery result by the lottery means and the first specific information acquisition means are used to provide a bonus. The first specific information stored in the first specific information storage means is used to determine whether or not a specific event will be caused by a first specific lottery, or the lottery result by the lottery device and the second specific information acquisition device are used. The second specific information acquired by and stored in the second specific information storage means is used to conduct a second specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event will occur. A completely different gaming experience from that of conventional slot machines, such as matching the result with the stop result of the rotating body, is realized.

Here, a first gaming state and a second gaming state are provided in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result is different. In this case, if the configuration is such that both specific lottery results are performed using the same specific information, the probability that the lottery result will be a special result in the first specific lottery in the first gaming state and the second specific lottery in the second gaming state is Due to the difference, the probability that the results of both specific lottery results will be the specific result may also be different. In this case, for example, it is necessary to adjust the probability of winning a special result in order to prevent the probability that the result of a specific lottery will be a specific result to be too high. There may be configuration limitations. Further, for example, depending on the probability that a specific lottery result will be a specific result, it is necessary to adjust the update range of the specific information, and there are circumstances in which the update range should be adjusted according to the probability of a specific result that matches the gaming state.

Therefore, in the above configuration, specific information is separately obtained for each specific lottery in both gaming states, and the specific lottery is performed based on each specific information and the lottery results in each gaming state. It becomes possible to set a specific lottery according to the actual circumstances of the situation, and it becomes possible to realize excellent gameplay using the specific lottery.

In addition, regarding the "first specific lottery means", "the first specific information stored in the first specific information storage means and the special result of the lottery results by the lottery means are used to perform a specific lottery". It may be expressed as "a first specific lottery means that executes a specific lottery to determine whether or not an event will occur," and a "second specific lottery means" may be expressed as "a first specific lottery means that executes a specific lottery to determine whether or not an event will occur." A second specific lottery means that executes a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event will occur, using the second specific information and the special result of the lottery results by the lottery device.

Feature B2. The first specific information acquisition means is capable of acquiring the first specific information based on the first acquisition condition being satisfied in the second gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the second specific information acquisition means is capable of acquiring the second specific information based on the second acquisition condition being satisfied in the first gaming state.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which specific information for both gaming states is provided, it is possible to obtain specific information for the other side in advance before moving to the other gaming state. Become. By doing this, it is possible to determine whether it is more advantageous in a specific lottery to shift the gaming state to the other side based on the specific information corresponding to the gaming state of the other side before the shift. It becomes possible.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.
“The first acquisition condition can be satisfied in the second gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the second acquisition condition can be satisfied in the first gaming state.

Feature B3. The first specific information acquisition means is capable of acquiring the first specific information based on the first acquisition condition being satisfied in the first gaming state,
The game according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the second specific information acquisition means is capable of acquiring the second specific information based on the second acquisition condition being satisfied in the second gaming state. Machine.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which specific information for both gaming states is provided, a specific lottery is held based on the specific information corresponding to the gaming state in which the player is staying, and the specific information is consumed by the specific lottery. This will prevent the occurrence of a situation where specific information is depleted. In other words, a specific lottery is held based on specific information corresponding to the gaming state in which the player is staying, and specific information corresponding to the gaming state is acquired, and the specific information can be constantly replenished. It becomes possible to suitably realize gaming properties using the specified information.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.
“The first acquisition condition can be satisfied in the first gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the second acquisition condition can be satisfied in the second gaming state.

Feature B4. When the first specific lottery is held based on the first specific information in the first gaming state, the second specific information stored in the second specific information storage means, in the game, the first specific lottery is held based on the first specific information. 2. Erasing the second specific information that is a target of the second specific lottery when a specific lottery is being held from the second specific information storage means;
When the second specific lottery is held based on the second specific information in the second gaming state, out of the first specific information stored in the first specific information storage means, in the game, the second specific lottery is held based on the second specific information. Erasing means for erasing the first specific information that is a target of the first specific lottery when a specific lottery is being held from the first specific information storage means (processing of steps S4301 to S4309 in the main controller 101) The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the following functions.

According to the above configuration, when the first specific lottery based on the first specific information is held in the first gaming state, the second specific information is also consumed, and the second specific lottery based on the second specific information is held in the second gaming state. If this is done, the first specific information is also consumed. In other words, the specific information on the side that is not the target of the specific lottery is also consumed, and the specific information is consumed as the game progresses regardless of the gaming state. By doing this, for example, if the acquired second specific information for the second gaming state is undesirable for the player, the second specific information is retained and the second specific information for the second gaming state is This will prevent the situation where an unpleasant situation continues indefinitely even after transitioning to . In other words, for example, if the acquired second specific information for the second gaming state is desirable for the player, by retaining the second specific information, even if the player shifts to the second gaming state. A gaming experience is realized in which the happy situation does not continue indefinitely, and it is necessary to cause a transition to the second gaming state before the second specific information is consumed.

Feature B5. When the first specific lottery based on the first specific information is held in the first gaming state, retaining the second specific information stored in the second specific information storage means;
When the second specific lottery is held based on the second specific information in the second gaming state, holding means (main controller 101). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3.

According to the above configuration, when the first specific lottery is held based on the first specific information in the first gaming state, the second specific information is not consumed, and the second specific lottery based on the second specific information is held in the second gaming state. When a lottery is held, the first specific information is not consumed. In other words, the specific information on the side that is not the target of the specific lottery is not consumed, and the specific information consumed differs depending on the gaming state. By doing this, for example, it becomes possible to suggest the degree of expectation of the second specific lottery in the next second gaming state based on the acquired second specific information for the second gaming state. For example, if the acquired second specific information is favorable, the player will continue playing until the suggestion causes a transition to the second gaming state; if the acquired second specific information is not favorable, then Furthermore, it is also possible to have the player play the game while expecting a transition to the next second game state.

Here, since the first specific lottery and the second specific lottery are conducted using specific information and the lottery results of the game, even if the second specific information is not preferable as described above, The result of the second special lottery may differ depending on the result of the game, and the hope for the second special lottery is not completely cut off. Therefore, even if the above is done, the player's desire to play the game is not likely to be lost, and excellent effects can be expected when the second specific information is preferable.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, wherein the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition can be satisfied in the same game.

According to the above configuration, the first specific information and the second specific information may be acquired in the same game. By doing this, for example, the first specific information is consumed in the first gaming state and there is space for the second specific information, or the second specific information is consumed in the second gaming state, and If the first specific information is available, the first specific information and the second specific information can be replenished in one game. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably avoid a phenomenon in which specific information is exhausted.

Feature B7. The first specific lottery means selects a first result (for example, strong watermelon) of the lottery results by the lottery means and first specific information corresponding to the first result among the first specific information (for example, a normal AT counter). 65) of CA, and is set so that the specific result will be obtained when the first specific lottery is conducted using
The second specific lottery means selects first result corresponding second specific information corresponding to the first result corresponding to the first result among the lottery results obtained by the lottery device and the first result corresponding first specific information among the second specific information. (for example, 65 of the BB AT counter CB corresponding to 65 of the normal AT counter CA), and is set so that the specific result will not be obtained when the second specific lottery is performed using The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6.

According to the above configuration, when the first specific information acquisition means has acquired the first specific information corresponding to the first result, if the lottery result of the game becomes the first result, the specific lottery is won. In the gaming state, if the lottery result of the game becomes the first result as described above, the specific lottery is won, but the second specific information corresponding to the first result corresponding to the first specific information corresponding to the first result is the second specific information. If the winning means has acquired the winning result, even if the lottery result of the game becomes the first result in the second gaming state, the specific lottery will not be won. With this configuration, even if the specific information is the same (the first specific information corresponding to the first result and the second specific information corresponding to the first result), the success or failure of the specific lottery will differ depending on the gaming state, The significance of separately preparing specific information in accordance with the gaming state is enhanced, and it becomes possible to draw more attention to which special information corresponding to the first result was acquired.

In addition, "the first result-corresponding second specific information corresponding to the first result-corresponding first specific information" means that "the update range of the first specific information and the second specific information is the same". As a premise, it may be expressed as "second specific information corresponding to the first result that has the same value as the value of the first specific information corresponding to the first result", or "the first specific information and the second specific information The update range of the first specific information is different from the value of the first specific information corresponding to the first result. It may also be expressed as "second specific information corresponding to the first result having the same value."

Feature B8. The first specific lottery means selects a second result (for example, strong cherry) of the lottery results by the lottery means and first specific information corresponding to the second result among the first specific information (for example, a normal AT counter). It is set so that the specific result will be obtained when the first specific lottery is conducted using 1) of CA,
The second specific lottery means selects second result-corresponding second specific information corresponding to the second result of the lottery results by the lottery device and the second result-corresponding first specific information of the second specific information. (for example, 1 of the BB AT counter CB corresponding to 1 of the normal AT counter CA), and is set so that the specific result will be obtained when the second specific lottery is performed using The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7.

According to the above configuration, when the first specific information corresponding to the second result is acquired by the first specific information acquisition means, if the lottery result of the game becomes the second result, the specific lottery is won. In the gaming state, as described above, if the lottery result of the game becomes the second result, the specific lottery is won, and the second specific information corresponding to the second result corresponding to the first specific information corresponding to the second result acquires the second specific information. If the lottery result of the game becomes the second result in the second gaming state, the specific lottery is won. By doing this, if similar specific information (first specific information corresponding to the second result and second specific information corresponding to the second result) is obtained, the success or failure of the specific lottery will be the same depending on the gaming state. For example, it is possible to enhance the effect of an unexpected configuration such as feature B7, where the success or failure of a specific lottery differs depending on the gaming state even if the specific information is the same, such as feature B7. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the gameplay by separately preparing specific information for both game states.

Feature B9. A first specific notification (pending display in the normal holding display area Dra) regarding the first specific information stored by the first specific information storage device can be executed by a predetermined notification device (auxiliary display section 65). a first specific notification means (a function for executing a process of displaying a special image as a hold display in the normal hold display area Dra by the display control device 81);
A second specific notification (a pending display in the BB pending display area Drb) regarding the second specific information stored by the second specific information storage unit can be executed by a predetermined notification unit (auxiliary display unit 65). a second specific notification means (a function for executing a process of displaying a special image as a hold display in the BB hold display area Drb by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the player can confirm the acquired first specific information for the first gaming state and second specific information for the second gaming state as the first specific notification and the second specific notification, respectively. becomes possible. This makes it possible to proceed with the game while knowing which specific information for the game state would be advantageous for receiving a specific lottery, and it is possible to increase interest in the success or failure of the transition condition.

Feature B10. The second gaming state includes a first specific state (first BB state) and a second specific state (second BB state) in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result is different. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the second specific lottery is performed using the second specific information for the second gaming state that has been acquired in advance, the lottery result of the game in the second gaming state is further determined to be a special result. There are a first specific state and a second specific state that have different probabilities, and depending on which specific state the transition is made to, whether or not the specific result is likely to be achieved may vary depending on the relationship with the acquired second specific information. By doing so, it becomes possible to draw attention to the destination of the game state regarding the second specific information, and it is possible to increase interest by making the game more intense.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to be visible through the display unit, the A benefit granting means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
a specific information acquisition unit (a function for executing random number acquisition processing in the main controller 101) that acquires specific information based on the fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
Specific lottery means capable of executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event (transition to AT mode) will occur, using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery device. (Function to execute AT mode transition lottery by main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, specific execution means (by the main controller 101) that causes the specific event to occur. (a function that executes processing for transitioning to AT mode),
In a specific situation where the specific information stored in the specific information storage means does not reach the predetermined number, the specific information can be acquired based on a specific condition different from the acquisition condition being satisfied. Specific information acquisition means (a function for executing initial random number acquisition processing by the main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting stops, In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, the lottery result by the lottery means and the first specified information acquisition means are acquired and specified. Since the specific information stored in the information storage means is used to perform a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event will occur, it is possible to simply associate the lottery results by the lottery means with the results of stopping the orbiting body. A completely different gameplay experience than that of conventional slot machines is realized.

In addition, in the above configuration, in a specific situation where the specific information storage unit does not store a predetermined number of specific information that is the storage limit, the second specific information acquisition unit acquires specific information when a specific condition different from the acquisition condition is met. The configuration is such that By doing so, it is possible to reduce as much as possible the situations in which the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means, and to suitably realize the gaming experience using the acquired specific information.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the specific condition is established before the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies is started based on the operation by the start operation means.

According to the above configuration, the second specific information acquisition device acquires the specific information before the operation of the start operation device becomes effective when starting the game. By doing this, at the start of the game, it is possible to perform a specific lottery using at least the specific information acquired by the second specific information acquisition means, and to prevent an event in which a specific lottery cannot be conducted. It can be done.

Note that the above configuration limits the configuration in which "the specific lottery means executes the specific lottery based on the operation by the start operation means", so that the specific information is collected before the operation of the start operation means at the start of the game. The significance of acquiring the information will be further enhanced.

Feature C3. comprising a startup processing execution means (a function for executing main processing by the main controller 101) that executes startup processing that is started upon power-on of the gaming machine;
The specific condition is satisfied during the start-up process (the initial random number acquisition process is executed when the winning probability setting process is started),
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein the second specific information acquisition means obtains the specific information during the start-up process.

According to the above configuration, since the specific information is acquired during the startup process when the power is turned on, the specific information is already stored when the startup process ends and the game can be started. The state is as follows. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an event in which a specific lottery cannot be performed due to the absence of specific information during the game from occurring.

Feature C4. In the start-up process by the start-up process execution means, at least a specific erasing unit capable of erasing the specific information stored in the specific information storage unit (initialization processing during main processing in the main controller 101) is provided. functions),
The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the specific condition is satisfied when the specific erasing means performs erasing processing of the specific information.

According to the above configuration, when specific information is deleted in the startup process, new specific information is acquired. In other words, if specific information is not deleted, there is no need to acquire specific information during startup processing, and by configuring it to be acquired only when it is necessary, many processes can be saved. It is possible to avoid increasing the processing load in intensive startup processing as much as possible.

Feature C5. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein the specific condition is established based on a predetermined operation for advancing the game.

According to the above configuration, the information is established based on a predetermined operation in the progress of the game, and even if the specific information is acquired due to the establishment of a specific condition, the player's operation is involved. By doing this, it becomes possible to make the game about a specific lottery, including the operation to obtain specific information, and to make the player interested in the game, including the player's involvement in the operation.

Feature C6. As a predetermined operation for advancing the game, a first advancing operation (for example, a first stop ON operation) and a timing later than the first advancing operation that is the same as the game in which the first advancing operation is performed. and a second progress operation (for example, a second stop ON operation) performed in the game,
The gaming machine according to feature C5, wherein the specific condition is established based on the first advancement operation being performed, and the specific condition is established based on the second advancement operation being performed.

According to the above configuration, specific information is acquired for each progress operation in one game. By doing this, in a situation where there are multiple free areas in the specific information storage means, the possibility of acquiring the specific information corresponding to the free areas in one game is increased, and moreover, it is possible to increase the possibility that specific information for each free area can be acquired in one game. Since the player's operations are involved at different timings, it becomes possible to draw the player's interest in the acquisition operation and complete the acquisition operation more quickly.

Feature C7. a first updating means capable of updating the specific information at a predetermined period (a function of executing processing for updating the AT counter C in timer interrupt processing by the main controller 101);
a second updating means (a function of executing processing such as step S4404 by the main control device 101) capable of executing an updating process of the specific information based on the establishment of the specific condition;
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when specific information that is updated at a predetermined cycle is acquired based on the satisfaction of a specific condition rather than an acquisition condition, the acquisition may be performed before the update at the predetermined cycle starts, or when the specific information is updated at a predetermined cycle. When acquiring specific information, if the acquisition cycle is synchronized with a predetermined cycle or the acquisition cycle is shorter than the predetermined cycle, it is possible to avoid acquiring similar specific information.

In particular, in a configuration where specific information is acquired during the start-up process, as in feature C2, the acquisition timing may be before the first updating means starts updating at a predetermined period. In this case, there is a possibility that the acquired specific information is an initial value. In this regard, as described above, by updating the information by the second updating means upon acquisition, such inconvenience can be avoided.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.
"A first updating means capable of updating the specific information at a predetermined period (a function of executing processing for updating the AT counter C in timer interrupt processing by the main controller 101);
Based on the establishment of the specific condition, a second updating unit (by the main controller 101) capable of executing an update process of the specific information before the second specific information acquiring unit acquires the specific information. function to execute processing such as step S4404);
It is equipped with the following.

Feature C8. The second specific information acquisition means is capable of acquiring a plurality of pieces of specific information based on the satisfaction of the specific condition,
The gaming machine according to feature C7, wherein the second updating means is capable of executing the process of updating the specific information each time the second specific information acquisition means acquires the specific information.

According to the above configuration, since the second specific information acquisition means can acquire a plurality of pieces of specific information at once, if there is a plurality of free areas in the specific information storage means, the second specific information acquisition means can acquire a plurality of pieces of specific information. It is also possible to obtain specific information about the number of minutes. However, as mentioned above, it is undesirable for specific information with similar values to be acquired, and in this respect, in the above configuration, the update process is performed every time the second specific information acquisition means acquires the information. , it becomes possible to acquire a plurality of pieces of specific information all at once while avoiding such inconveniences.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.
“The second specific information acquisition means is capable of acquiring a plurality of pieces of specific information based on the establishment of the specific condition,
The second updating means is capable of executing an update process for the specific information each time the second specific information obtaining means obtains the specific information, and before the second specific information obtaining means obtains the specific information.

Feature C9. Equipped with a predetermined operation means (for example, a stop switch 44) operated by a player,
The acquisition condition is established based on the predetermined operation means being operated,
According to any one of features C1 to C8, the specific condition is established based on the operation of the predetermined operating means or another operating means (for example, the start lever 41). Game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the specific information used for the specific lottery is acquired based on the operation of the predetermined operation means by the player, and when the specific information is acquired by the second specific information acquisition means. Since the lottery is configured to be acquired based on the operation of a predetermined operation means or another operation means, the transparency of the specific lottery is ensured compared to a configuration in which the lottery is automatically acquired on the gaming machine side.

Feature C10. The second specific information acquisition means is configured to acquire information from the predetermined operating means or another one even if in the specific situation there are a plurality of empty areas in the specific information storage means in which the specific information is not stored. The gaming machine according to feature C9, wherein one piece of the specific information is acquired based on one operation of the operating means.

According to the above configuration, even if multiple free areas exist, by having the configuration perform the acquisition operation once, the possibility that specific information will be updated is increased, and similar specific information This makes it possible to prevent as much as possible from being acquired.

Feature C11. The second specific information acquisition means is configured to be able to acquire a plurality of pieces of the specific information based on one operation of the predetermined operation means or another operation means, as described in feature C9. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, for example, when a manager or the like performs the acquisition work before the opening of the game hall, it is possible to improve the work efficiency.

Feature C12. It has predetermined information used for a predetermined lottery of a game (for example, a lottery counter used for a VB mode transition lottery),
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C11, wherein the second specific information acquisition means is capable of acquiring the predetermined information and storing it in the specific information storage means.

According to the above configuration, for example, if specific information cannot be obtained due to reasons such as not being updated in time, or if there is no point in obtaining specific information, the value of the specific information may be undesirable. In cases where the information is likely to be a value, alternative measures can be taken such as acquiring other predetermined information. Moreover, since the other predetermined information is used for the predetermined lottery of the game, compared to a configuration in which dedicated information is provided for alternative measures, it is possible to specify the information without overwhelming the storage capacity. A specific lottery using information can be suitably performed.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a first specific random number acquisition means (a function of executing random number acquisition processing in the main controller 101) that acquires a specific random number (for example, AT counter C) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined first specific condition; ,
a specific random number storage unit (lottery information storage area 106f in the main controller 101) capable of storing information corresponding to the specific random number acquired by the first specific random number acquisition unit up to a predetermined number;
Specific lottery means (AT by main controller 101 function to execute mode transition lottery),
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result (AT mode transition winning) that corresponds to the occurrence of the specific event, specific execution means (main) capable of causing the specific event; (a function of executing processing for transitioning to AT mode by the control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
A predetermined random number different from the specific random number (for example, a lottery counter used in a game lottery process) is provided,
a second specific random number acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S4605 by the main controller 101) that acquires the predetermined random number based on the fulfillment of a predetermined second specific condition;
a conversion unit (a function for executing the process of step S4606 by the main control device 101) that converts the predetermined random number acquired by the second specific random number acquisition unit into the specific random number;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the first specific condition is met, a specific random number is acquired and stored in the specific random number storage means with a predetermined number as the upper limit, and then it is determined whether or not to cause a specific event based on the specific random number. In the configuration in which the specific lottery is performed, when the second specific condition is satisfied, a predetermined random number different from the specific random number is obtained, and the predetermined random number is converted into the specific random number.

Here, for example, in a situation where the number of specific random numbers not stored in the specific random number storage means is less than a predetermined number, it is desirable to quickly replenish the specific random numbers. On the other hand, if you try to obtain multiple specific random numbers at the same time (at the same time), the same specific random numbers will be obtained, and specific results such as winning a specific lottery will occur consecutively, or vice versa. This is also undesirable from the viewpoint of the fairness of the lottery, such as consecutive results that are not specific results. In this regard, in the above configuration, since a predetermined random number as another random number is acquired and converted to a specific random number, it is difficult to cause the inconvenience that a similar specific random number is acquired. It becomes possible to quickly replenish specific random numbers.

Feature D2. a predetermined random number acquisition means (a function in which a hardware circuit in the main controller 101 latches a lottery counter value from a free run counter) that acquires the predetermined random number based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition;
A predetermined lottery means (a lottery by the main controller 101) that executes a predetermined lottery to determine whether or not to cause a predetermined event (BB state) different from the specific event based on the predetermined random number acquired by the predetermined random number acquisition means function to perform processing), and
A predetermined execution means (main controller 101); and
The gaming machine according to feature D1, comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is made clear that the predetermined random number is used for a predetermined lottery to determine whether or not a predetermined event will occur, and is not separately prepared for replenishing a specific random number. In this way, by making good use of the existing configuration and creating a configuration that quickly replenishes specific random numbers, it is possible to quickly replenish specific random numbers without complicating the configuration. Become.

Feature D3. a specific update means (a function that executes processing for updating the AT counter C in timer interrupt processing by the main controller 101) that updates the specific random number at a predetermined specific period;
a predetermined updating means (hard circuit that updates a lottery counter used in lottery processing) that updates the predetermined random number at a predetermined period;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, wherein the specific cycle and the predetermined cycle are different cycles.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined random number that is converted into the specific random number is updated at a different cycle from the specific random number. By doing this, for example, even if the initial value is the same and the specific random number and the predetermined random number are obtained at the same timing, the values are likely to be different, and as a result, there is a problem with feature D1. This makes it possible to suitably avoid a phenomenon in which a specific lottery is held with similar values.

Feature D4. The specific random number is updated in a range from an initial value (1) to a specific maximum value (128),
The predetermined random number is updated in a range from an initial value (0) to a predetermined maximum value (65535) that is larger than the specific maximum value,
The conversion means converts a first predetermined random number among the predetermined random numbers into a first specific random number among the specific random numbers, and converts a second predetermined random number different from the first predetermined random number among the predetermined random numbers. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that the first specific random number is converted.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration where the numerical range of the predetermined random number is wider than the numerical range of the specific random number, the predetermined random numbers of a plurality of values are associated with the specific random number of one value, and the conversion by the conversion means is performed. It will be done. By doing this, even when converting random numbers with a large numerical range into specific random numbers, there will be no inconvenience such as there being no destination for conversion, and it is possible to suitably replenish specific random numbers using predetermined random numbers. Become.

Feature D5. The specific random number is updated within a range from an initial value to a specific maximum value,
The predetermined random number is updated within a range from an initial value to a predetermined maximum value smaller than the specific maximum value,
The converting means converts a first predetermined random number of the predetermined random numbers into a first specific random number of the specific random numbers, and distinguishes the first predetermined random number of the predetermined random numbers from the first specific random number. It is possible to convert into a different second specific random number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein a ratio of converting the first predetermined random number to the first specific random number and a ratio of converting the first specific random number to the second specific random number are determined in advance. .

According to the above configuration, in the configuration where the numerical range of the predetermined random number is narrower than the numerical range of the specific random number, the specific random numbers of a plurality of values are associated with the predetermined random number of one value, and the conversion by the conversion means is performed. The ratio of specific random numbers to be converted into is determined in advance. By doing this, when converting a random number with a small numerical range to a specific random number, there is no need to perform processing to determine the conversion destination each time, and the predetermined random number can be converted without increasing the processing load. It becomes possible to suitably replenish the used specific random numbers.

Feature D6. The predetermined random numbers include a first predetermined random number (for example, a lottery counter used in a lottery process) and a second predetermined random number (for example, a lottery counter used in a VB mode transition lottery) that are different in type. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5.

By providing multiple types of predetermined random numbers that can be converted into specific random numbers as in the above configuration, it is possible to replenish specific random numbers more efficiently, such as when there are multiple free areas in the specific random number storage means. becomes.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to feature D6, wherein the predetermined random numbers of different types are equal to or larger than the predetermined number minus 1.

According to the above configuration, even in a situation where no specific random number is stored in the specific random number storage means, the predetermined number that is the upper limit memory number can be stored at a time, including those that acquire and store specific random numbers as they are. It becomes possible to obtain and store random numbers. This makes it possible to replenish specific random numbers more quickly.

Feature D8. The gaming machine according to feature D6 or feature D7, wherein the predetermined random numbers of different types include the same number of predetermined random numbers as the predetermined number.

According to the above configuration, even in a situation where no specific random number is stored in the specific random number storage means, it is possible to obtain and store a predetermined number of random numbers, which is the upper limit storage number, at one time. Furthermore, since the same number of predetermined random numbers as the predetermined number are provided, even if a specific random number cannot be obtained or is pointless even if obtained, it can be replaced with another predetermined random number. This makes it possible to replenish specific random numbers more quickly.

Feature D9. The update period of the first predetermined random number is shorter than the update period of the second predetermined random number,
The game according to any one of features D6 to D8, wherein the second specific random number acquisition means is configured to be able to acquire the first predetermined random number before the second predetermined random number. Machine.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined random number (the first predetermined random number) with a short update cycle is obtained first, so if, for example, the initial value is not updated at the time of obtaining, the predetermined random number may be obtained and converted to a specific random number. This reduces the possibility of inconveniences such as always having the same value.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to be visible through the display unit, the A benefit granting means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As gaming states, a normal gaming state (normal section) and a first specific gaming state (advantageous section) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state (AT mode) is set which is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific gaming state,
a first transition lottery means (a function of executing an advantageous section transition lottery by the main control device 101) that executes a first transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the first specific gaming state in the normal gaming state;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is a first transition result (advantageous section winning) corresponding to transition to the first specific game state, the first specific game a first specific transition means for transitioning to the state (a function of executing processing for transitioning to the advantageous section by the main controller 101);
a specific information acquisition unit (a function for executing random number acquisition processing in the main controller 101) that acquires specific information (AT counter C) based on the fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
A second transition in which a second transition lottery is executed to determine whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery device. A lottery means (a function for executing the AT mode transition lottery by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is a second transition result (AT mode winning) corresponding to transition to the second specific game state, the second specific game a second specific transition means for transitioning to the AT mode (a function for executing processing for transitioning to the AT mode by the main controller 101);
Predetermined specific information stored in the specific information storage device can be specified by destination specifying means (for example, pending by the display control device 81) before the predetermined specific information becomes a target of the second transition lottery. a function to execute display processing, a function to execute processing such as step S4802 by the main control device 101),
A specific notification execution means (a process for displaying a special image in a pending display process by the display control device 81) that can execute a specific notification corresponding to the identification result by the destination identification means on a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) (a function to execute special notification processing by the main controller 101),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting stops, In a so-called slot machine in which a bonus is awarded by a bonus awarding means if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a first specific gaming state that is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is present. Since a more advantageous second specific gaming state is provided as a state included in the first specific gaming state, the normal gaming state is shifted to the first specific gaming state, and the second specific gaming state is changed to The gameplay is based on the step-by-step transition to a state that becomes more advantageous, such as aiming, and can be of great use in improving interest. Moreover, since the second lottery for transition to the second specific gaming state is performed using the specific information acquired in advance by the specific information acquisition means and the lottery result by the lottery means, it is simply a lottery by the lottery means. A completely different gaming experience from that of conventional slot machines, such as matching the result with the stop result of the rotating body, is realized.

Then, specific notification regarding the pre-obtained specific information may be performed by a predetermined notification means before the specific lottery regarding the specific information is performed. By doing this, for example, it is possible to have the player participate in the lottery for that game after knowing information such as what kind of lottery result for that game will lead to winning the second transition lottery. . Therefore, regarding the lottery for transitioning to the second specific gaming state, which is the ultimate goal in the game, such as transitioning from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state and then to the second specific gaming state, the game can be played while providing an intense feeling of excitement. It becomes possible to perform the following. Therefore, interest can be improved.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the specific information acquisition means is configured to be able to acquire the specific information in the normal gaming state.

According to the above configuration, the specific information used for the second transition lottery for determining whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state in the first specific gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state before the transition to the first specific gaming state. It becomes possible to obtain By doing this, in a configuration in which specific information is acquired in advance and specific notification is made for the specific information acquired in advance, even if the situation where specific notification should be made has come, specific notification will not be issued. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event where the original specific information is not acquired, and the specific information for the second transition lottery can be prepared before the first specific gaming state in which the second transition lottery is held. A novel gameplay experience such as acquiring

Feature E3. Regardless of whether or not the specific information stored in the specific information storage device is used for the second transition lottery, erasing means (main control The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a process of clearing the AT counter C of the execution area AE in the process of step S3401 etc. by the device 101.

According to the above configuration, the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is configured to be erased as the game progresses, and it is not kept in memory indefinitely just because the second transition lottery is not held. It is made clear that this is not the case. By doing so, in the configuration in which the specific information is acquired in advance and then used in the second transition lottery, the specific information can always be kept up to date. Therefore, the specific information changes from moment to moment depending on the timing (game) at which the second transition lottery is held, and not only the success or failure results of the first transition lottery, but also the winning timing of the first transition lottery and whether or not you won the first transition lottery. The player can be involved in the game until the time when the player moves to the first specific game state, making the game more intense and increasing the interest of the game.

Feature E4. When the second transition lottery is performed using the predetermined specific information as the specific notification, the specific notification execution means selects a lottery result by the lottery device that is likely to result in the second transition result or that is likely to result in the second transition result. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that it is possible to execute notification corresponding to.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp from the specific notification what kind of lottery result by the lottery means will be the second transition result or is likely to be the second transition result with respect to the acquired specific information. By doing this, the lottery results in each game will attract more interest than the prizes corresponding to the results, and the interest in the game will be improved.

Feature E5. A first gaming state (normal gaming state, first BB state, fourth RT state A) and a second gaming state (any BB state, A second BB state and a fourth RT state B) are set,
The second transition lottery means is capable of executing the second transition lottery using the specific information and the special result as a lottery result by the lottery means,
The specific information to be the target of the specific notification performs status notification (situation display) that includes information as to whether the specific information to be the target of the specific notification should be the target of the second transition lottery in the first gaming state or the second gaming state. Feature E1 (a function of executing a status display start process and a status display update process by the display control device 81, a function of executing a special notification process by the main control device 101) capable of The gaming machine according to any one of E4.

According to the above configuration, the player is able to understand whether or not to cause a transition of the gaming state from the state notification in addition to the specific notification regarding the specific information that is the subject of the second transition lottery. . By doing this, it is possible to make a transition from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state and receive a second transition lottery to determine whether or not to cause a transition to the second specific gaming state. Furthermore, factors such as whether the second transition lottery should be received in the first gaming state or the second gaming state are added, and the winning probability of the second transition lottery can change moment by moment depending on the transition of each state. This can assist in understanding complex games like this. This makes it possible for even players who are not accustomed to the game to enjoy the game while easily understanding its complex gameplay.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to feature E5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a means (a function for executing status display update processing by the display control device 81) capable of updating the status notification in accordance with the progress of the game.

According to the above configuration, in a game in which the winning probability of the second transition lottery can change moment by moment due to the transition of each state, the status notification is updated in accordance with the progress of the game. By doing so, it becomes possible to further enhance the effect of helping the player understand the game through the status notification.

Feature E7. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (1st BB win, 2nd BB win), and by stopping the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result at the valid position, the game state is changed to a special one. A special state transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) for transitioning to a gaming state (first BB state, second BB state),
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the specific notification execution means executes the specific notification when the lottery result by the lottery unit becomes the transfer result.

According to the above configuration, a so-called bonus is set as a result of transition of the gaming state to the special state, and specific notification is performed when the bonus is won. By doing this, the gameplay of moving from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state and further to the second specific gaming state is further added with the gaming feature of aiming to win a bonus, and the second specific gaming state is added. A specific notification indicating the ease of transition to the gaming state is made when a bonus is won, thereby improving interest by associating both gaming features.

Feature E8. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (1st BB win, 2nd BB win), and by stopping the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result at the valid position, the gaming state is changed to a special one. A special state transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) for transitioning to a gaming state (first BB state, second BB state);
means capable of retaining information indicating that the transfer result is winning until the transfer symbol combination stops at the valid position (a function that executes a process of carrying over the bonus winning flag by the main control device 101);
The fact that when the second transition lottery based on the specific information is executed in a game in the special gaming state, the result of the second transition lottery does not become the second transition result or is unlikely to become the second transition result. When it is specified by the destination specifying means, a means (a winning delay display by the display control device 81) that can be executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display section 65) to notify that the transition symbol combination is not stopped. ) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, a so-called bonus is set as a transition result that causes the gaming state to transition to the special state, and when the bonus is won, it is assumed that the second transition lottery is conducted based on the specific information acquired in advance. If it is specified that the second transition result is not achieved or that the second transition result is unlikely to occur during the bonus state, a notification is made to prevent the transition to the bonus state from occurring. In this way, in a configuration where specific information is consumed and updated at any time, if the transition to the bonus state is delayed until the specific information that is likely to result in the second transition result in the bonus state is delayed, it will be possible to It becomes possible to increase the level of expectation for the second transition result.

Feature E9. The destination specifying means is characterized in that it is possible to specify the predetermined specific information in the first specific gaming state before the predetermined specific information becomes a target of the second transition lottery. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8.

According to the above configuration, in a game where the normal gaming state is transferred to the first specific gaming state and then transferred to the second specific gaming state, it is determined whether or not to transfer to the second specific gaming state in the first specific gaming state. Part of the information regarding the second transition lottery can be grasped through specific notification. That is, by winning the first transition lottery, the destination specifying means performs the destination specification, and a specific notification regarding the second transition lottery is performed. By doing this, a game that moves to the second specific gaming state through multiple stages, such as moving from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state and from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state. It becomes possible to make specific announcements within the scope that does not violate the meaning of gender.

Feature E10. The destination specifying means determines the predetermined specific information in the normal gaming state before the predetermined specific information becomes a target of the second transition lottery and before the transition to the first specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, characterized in that it is possible to specify.

According to the above configuration, in a game where the normal gaming state is transferred to the first specific gaming state and then transferred to the second specific gaming state, the second determination of whether or not to transfer to the second specific gaming state in the normal gaming state is made. Part of the information regarding the transition lottery will be made available through specific notifications. In other words, if it is possible to transition to the first specific gaming state, it becomes possible to determine whether or not a transition to the second specific gaming state may occur before shifting to the first specific gaming state. be. In this way, in a gaming machine that undergoes a stepwise transition as described above, it is possible to determine whether a transition to the second specific gaming state occurs even if the transition to the first specific gaming state does not actually occur. It is possible to make the player do calculations such as , etc., and it is possible to stimulate the player's desire to play.

Feature E11. The gaming machine according to feature E10, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification before the lottery result of the first transition lottery becomes the first transition result.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of feature E9, the specific notification can be performed before the transition to the first specific gaming state, and moreover, before winning the lottery for transition to the first specific gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the normal gaming state, which is the starting point, in a game where the normal gaming state is transferred to the first specific gaming state and then further transferred to the second specific gaming state.

Feature E12. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a winning is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (press order notification) regarding the operation modes including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is sent to a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68). (a function for executing push order processing by the main control device 101) is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E11, wherein the second specific gaming state is a state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be performed.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration where the degree of advantage for the player can change by causing a transition to the second specific gaming state that generates the navigation of the stop operation mode, the transition to the second specific gaming state The specific information acquired in advance will be used in the second transition lottery to determine whether or not to cause the occurrence. In this way, it is possible to create a novel gaming experience in which specific information for the lottery is acquired in advance regarding a game using a navigation with a stop operation mode.

<Characteristics Group F>
Feature F1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to be visible through the display unit, the A benefit granting means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to a predetermined result;
Equipped with
A first game state (for example, normal game state) and a second game state (for example, a second game state) have different probabilities that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a predetermined special result (for example, strong cherry, cherry replay, watermelon play). 1BB state, 2nd BB state, 4th RT state A and 4th RT state B) are set,
A gaming machine comprising a gaming state transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing and RT state processing by the main control device 101) for shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on a predetermined opportunity, ,
a specific information acquisition unit (a function for executing random number acquisition processing in the main controller 101) that acquires specific information (AT counter C) based on the fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
At least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the special result of the lottery results by the lottery means are used to carry out a specific lottery to determine whether or not to cause a specific event (transition to AT mode). A specific lottery means to be executed (a function for executing the AT mode transition lottery by the main controller 101),
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result (AT mode transition winning) that corresponds to the occurrence of the specific event, specific execution means (main) capable of causing the specific event; (a function of executing processing for transitioning to AT mode by the control device 101);
In a specific situation that is a situation before the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state becomes possible, changing to the second gaming state based on the specific information stored in the specific information storage means. A specific notification execution means (displaying a special image in a pending display process by the display control device 81) that can execute a specific notification regarding the specific lottery when a transition occurs on a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) (a function to execute processing, a function to execute special notification processing by the main controller 101),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting stops, In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means are stored. Since a specific lottery is performed to determine whether or not a specific event will occur using the specific information stored in the means, it is no longer possible to simply match the lottery results of the lottery means with the results of stopping the orbiting body. The game experience is completely different from that of a slot machine.

Moreover, in the above configuration, a first gaming state and a second gaming state are provided in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result is different, and it is possible to shift from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. In a specific situation that is a previous situation, specific notification regarding a specific lottery to be executed in a second gaming state is performed by a predetermined notification means based on the acquired specific information. By doing this, for example, it is possible to determine whether or not a specific lottery will be advantageous due to the different lottery contents of each game after transitioning to the second gaming state before transitioning to the second gaming state. etc., the gameplay in the first gaming state is dramatically enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve interest.

Feature F2. The specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification as a notification of a plurality of pieces of specific information when the specific lottery is held in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature F1.

According to the above configuration, specific notification of specific information when a specific lottery is held in the second gaming state is performed for a plurality of pieces of specific information at once. At a point where the player is likely to concentrate on the game, such as when the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state becomes possible, if each specific information is reported individually, attention will be divided instead. Although there is a possibility, by using the above configuration, it becomes possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game by consolidating the parts that require attention. Moreover, if multiple pieces of specific information are reported together as described above, it becomes possible to equalize the expectations for the games corresponding to each piece of specific information, and it is possible to evenly increase the attention level of each game.

Feature F3. The specific notification execution means relates to the degree of expectation that the specific result will be obtained in any of the specific lottery games held in the second gaming state based on each of the specific information stored in the specific information storage device. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, characterized in that the notification can be executed as the specific notification.

According to the above configuration, when a specific lottery is held in the second gaming state where transition is possible, the degree of expectation of a specific result in the specific lottery can be grasped before transitioning to the second gaming state. I can do it. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to judge whether it is desirable to cause a transition to the second gaming state, and the gameplay of the specific situation before the transition is enhanced.

Feature F4. The specific notification execution means is configured to generate, among the specific information stored in the specific information storage device, the specific information in a case where the specific lottery result by the specific lottery device using the special result is the specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, characterized in that a notification corresponding to the number of items can be executed as the specific notification.

According to the above configuration, as long as information such as what kind of specific information becomes a specific result in a specific lottery using special results is stored in advance, it is only necessary to count the number of pieces of specific information when making a specific notification, It becomes possible to realize specific notification before shifting to the second gaming state with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to feature F4, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification based on a probability that a lottery result by the lottery unit will be the special result in the second gaming state.

According to the above configuration, specific notification is performed based not only on the number of pieces of specific information that results in a specific result in a specific lottery using special results, but also on the winning probability of the special result. By doing so, it becomes possible to predict in advance to some extent what probability a special result will actually be obtained in the second gaming state and a specific result will be obtained in a specific lottery using specific information.

Feature F6. As the second gaming state, a first specific state (fourth RT state A) and a second specific state (fourth RT state B) are set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the special result is different between the first specific state and the second specific state.

According to the above configuration, if the winning probabilities of the special results assigned to the specific lottery are different, the probabilities of a specific result in the specific lottery may also be different. In such a configuration, since the specific notification execution means makes a specific notification when a specific lottery is held in these first specific state or second specific state, depending on which specific state the transition is made to, It becomes possible for the player to grasp the contents of a specific lottery, which may have different probabilities of achieving a specific result, before changing the state.

Feature F7. The special results include a first special result (cherry replay) and a second special result (watermelon replay),
In the first specific state, the lottery result by the lottery means is more likely to be the first special result than the second special result,
The gaming machine according to feature F6, wherein in the second specific state, the lottery result by the lottery means is more likely to be the second special result than the first special result.

According to the above configuration, when a transition to the first specific state occurs, a specific lottery based on the first special result is likely to be conducted, and when a transition to the second specific state occurs, a specific lottery based on the second special result is conducted. It becomes easier. Then, the specific state to which the system should transition will differ depending on whether specific information corresponding to the first special result or second special result has been obtained. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably realize a gaming feature in which the destination of the gaming state is changed depending on the specific information acquired in advance.

Feature F8. When the specific lottery is held using the first special result and the first specific information of the specific information, the specific result is obtained, and the first specific result of the first special result and the first specific information of the specific information While it is set so that the specific lottery result will not be obtained when the specific lottery is performed using second specific information different from the information,
The specific result is obtained when the specific lottery is held using the second special result and the second specific information, and the specific lottery is conducted using the second special result and the first specific information. The gaming machine according to feature F7, characterized in that the gaming machine is set so that the specific result will not be obtained when the specified result is obtained.

According to the above configuration, depending on whether the special information obtained in advance is the first specific information or the second specific information, the result of the specific lottery will be the first special result or the second special result. Become different. With such a configuration, the type of specific state to be transitioned to differs depending on which specific information has been acquired, and the importance of specific notification is further increased.

Feature F9. The gaming machine according to any one of features F6 to F8, wherein in the specific situation, it is possible to shift to either the first specific state or the second specific state.

According to the above configuration, in the specific situation where specific notification is performed, it is possible to shift to any specific state, so it is possible to change the content such as whether it is advantageous to shift to the first specific state or the second specific state. It may be possible to understand from specific notifications.

Feature F10. As the predetermined trigger, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result, the transition to the first specific state becomes possible, and when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second transition result, the second transition result becomes possible. It is a configuration that allows transition to a specific state,
The gaming machine according to feature F9, wherein the lottery result by the lottery means includes an overlap result of the first transition result and the second transition result.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature F9.

Feature F11. The gaming machine according to feature F9 or feature F10, wherein the gaming machine is configured to allow a player to select which of the first specific state and the second specific state to shift to in the specific situation.

According to the above configuration, in a specific situation, the player can select which specific state to transition to according to the specific notification. As a result, with regard to a specific lottery using specific information acquired in advance, the player can select and transfer the specific state to which the game will be transferred, after understanding the contents of the specific lottery to some extent in advance.

Feature F12. As the predetermined trigger, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result, the transition to the first specific state becomes possible, and when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second transition result, the second transition result becomes possible. It is a configuration that allows transition to a specific state,
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a duplicate result of the first transition result and the second transition result is provided,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the duplicate result, the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode to cause a transition to the first specific state, and the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. The gaming machine according to feature F11, characterized in that the transition to the second specific state occurs when the gaming machine is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature F11.

Feature F13. The predetermined opportunity occurs when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined transition result (transition replay 1 win, transition replay 2 win),
The specific notification executing means is configured to control the second game when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined transition result in a game before the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined transition result. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F12, characterized in that the specific notification regarding the specific lottery in a state can be executed (for example, state A performance, state B performance, and state C performance in FIG. 127). .

According to the above configuration, the specific situation is a situation before the transition to the second gaming state becomes possible, and the specific notification when the transition becomes possible is performed before the transition becomes possible. You will be killed. By doing this, it is possible to obtain a predetermined transition result that causes a transition to the second gaming state while understanding whether or not it is advantageous for the player to be able to transition to the second gaming state. can be expected.

Feature F14. When the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means using the special result is the specific result, the specific information is common in the first gaming state and the second gaming state (for example, as shown in FIG. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F13, characterized in that the AT counter C) is associated with Cherry Replay and Suikari Play of No. 116.

According to the above configuration, among the parameters of the specific lottery, although the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means used for the specific lottery will be a special result is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, regarding the specific information, The first gaming state and the second gaming state become common. By doing so, it is possible to vary the probability of winning a specific lottery without having to associate specific information (lottery table) for each gaming state. Thereby, when performing specific notification, it is possible to perform specific notification regarding a specific lottery in advance with a relatively simple configuration, such as understanding the probability of a special result.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to be visible through the display unit, the A benefit granting means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
a specific information acquisition unit (a function for executing random number acquisition processing in the main controller 101) that acquires specific information (AT counter C) based on the fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
Specific lottery means for executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event (transition to AT mode) will occur, using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery device ( A function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result (AT mode transition winning) that corresponds to the occurrence of the specific event, specific execution means (main) capable of causing the specific event; (a function of executing processing for transitioning to AT mode by the control device 101);
Equipped with
The lottery results by the lottery means include high winning results (for example, Cherry Replay in Cherry RT) and low winning results (for example, Suikari Play and Strong Cherry in Cherry RT) in which the winning probability is relatively high or low in a predetermined gaming state. is set,
Regarding the predetermined specific information stored in the specific information storage means, information corresponding to the result of the specific lottery when the specific lottery is held using the high winning result and the predetermined specific information, A gaming machine characterized by comprising a destination specifying means (a function for executing specific notification processing by the main control device 101) that can specify the predetermined specific information before it becomes a target of the specific lottery.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting stops, In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means are stored. Since a specific lottery is performed to determine whether or not a specific event will occur using the specific information stored in the means, it is no longer possible to simply match the lottery results of the lottery means with the results of stopping the orbiting body. The game experience is completely different from that of a slot machine.

Moreover, in the above configuration, regarding the predetermined specific information acquired in advance, the information corresponding to the result of a specific lottery assuming a case where a high winning result that is relatively easy to win among the lottery results of each game is The specific information is identified before it becomes a target of the specific lottery. By doing so, it becomes possible to predict with a certain degree of accuracy the result of a specific lottery performed using the specific information acquired in advance and the lottery results of each game. Therefore, for example, it is possible to change the notification content based on the prediction result, change the lottery content based on the prediction result, etc. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the high winning result is a result that is most likely to trigger the specific result among the lottery results by the lottery means in the predetermined gaming state.

According to the above configuration, the lottery result by the lottery means that is most likely to have an opportunity to win in a specific lottery becomes a high winning result, and by using such a configuration to predict the result of the specific lottery, the prediction accuracy is improved. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature G3. In the predetermined gaming state, when the specific lottery is conducted using the low winning results, the probability of the specific lottery being held using the low winning results is greater than the probability of the specific lottery being held using the high winning results. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2, characterized in that the probability of the specific result is higher.

According to the above configuration, the probability of a specific lottery result using a low winning result is higher than that of a high winning result. On the other hand, a high winning result is more likely to be a lottery result by the lottery means, and as a result, there are more chances to be selected for a specific lottery. By predicting the result of a specific lottery using the high-winning results among the lottery results having such a relationship, it becomes easier to obtain a result close to an actually possible result.

Feature G4. It has a first gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (fourth RT state) as gaming states,
The predetermined gaming state is the second gaming state,
The high winning result is a result in which the winning probability is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
Feature G1 characterized in that the destination specifying means is capable of specifying, in the first gaming state, information corresponding to the result of the specific lottery when the specific lottery is held in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of G3 to G3.

According to the above configuration, the specific lottery is specified by the destination specifying means while taking into consideration the transition of the gaming state that results in different winning probabilities. By doing so, it becomes possible to accurately predict the result of the specific lottery, taking into consideration the transition of the gaming state.

Feature G5. The high winning results are:
Among the lottery results by the lottery means in the second gaming state, the lottery result by the specific lottery is the result that is most likely to become the specific result;
The gaming machine according to feature G4, characterized in that among the lottery results by the lottery means in the first gaming state, the lottery result by the specific lottery is not the result that is most likely to trigger the specific lottery result.

According to the above configuration, in the second gaming state, the lottery result by the lottery means that is most likely to be a winning opportunity in the specific lottery becomes a high winning result, and such a result is used to predict the result of the specific lottery. , it becomes possible to improve the prediction accuracy. On the other hand, in the first gaming state before the transition to the second gaming state, it is not the lottery result by the lottery means that is most likely to be an opportunity to win in the specific lottery. In other words, while it is possible to predict the result of a specific lottery by the destination specifying means with high accuracy in the second gaming state, the accuracy in the first gaming state is lower than that in the second gaming state. . In this way, by skillfully customizing the specification by the first specifying means for the second game state, it becomes easier to improve the prediction accuracy compared to a general-purpose prediction means.

Feature G6. Based on the specific result by the destination specifying means, when the specific lottery is held using the high winning result and the predetermined specific information, a specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific lottery is sent to the predetermined notification device. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a specific notification execution means (a function for executing special notification processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the main controller 101.

According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the predicted result of the specific lottery by the destination specifying means, and can play the game after grasping the predicted result. By doing so, it becomes possible to reflect the prediction of the specific lottery on the gameplay.

Feature G7. The specific notification execution means is configured to issue the specific notification according to the number of times the specific lottery result is the specific result when the specific lottery is conducted using the high winning result and the predetermined specific information. The gaming machine according to feature G6, characterized in that the notification mode can be made different.

In the above configuration, when a specific lottery is performed using a high winning result that is likely to be won in a predetermined gaming state and specific information acquired in advance, the number of times that a specific result will be obtained is specified, and The notification mode of specific notification is changed accordingly. By doing this, for example, if a specific notification is made in a notification mode that corresponds to a large number of times that a specific result is likely to occur, it becomes possible to predict that a specific result is likely to occur after that, and conversely, If specific notification is performed in a notification mode that corresponds to the fact that the number of times that the result is likely to be small is small, it becomes possible to predict that the specific result is unlikely to be obtained after that.

Feature G8. The specific notification executing means specifies that the specific lottery result will be the specific result when the specific lottery is held using the high winning result and the predetermined specific information. The gaming machine according to feature G6 or feature G7, characterized in that the specific notification can be executed in a manner that makes it difficult to distinguish a game corresponding to the predetermined specific information from a game corresponding to other specific information. .

According to the above configuration, if a high lottery result is obtained, it becomes difficult to identify a game that is predicted to have a specific result. By doing this, it becomes difficult to understand which game should have a high lottery result, and it becomes possible to increase the attention level of the entire game that is the target of the specific notification.

Feature G9. The specific notification executing means specifies that the specific lottery result will be the specific result when the specific lottery is held using the high winning result and the predetermined specific information. The gaming machine according to feature G6 or feature G7, characterized in that the specific notification can be executed so that a game corresponding to the predetermined specific information can be distinguished from a game corresponding to other specific information. .

According to the above configuration, if a high lottery result is obtained, a game that is predicted to have a specific result can be identified. By doing this, it becomes easy to understand which game should have a high lottery result, and it becomes possible to intensively increase the attention of that game.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to be visible through the display unit, the A benefit granting means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
a specific random number acquisition unit (a function for executing random number acquisition processing in the main controller 101) that acquires a specific random number (AT counter C) based on the fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a specific random number storage unit (lottery information storage area 106f in the main controller 101) capable of storing the specific random number acquired by the specific random number acquisition unit;
Specific lottery means for executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event (transition to AT mode) will occur, using at least the specific random number stored in the specific random number storage means and the lottery result by the lottery device. A function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result (AT mode transition winning) that corresponds to the occurrence of the specific event, specific execution means (main) capable of causing the specific event; (a function of executing processing for transitioning to AT mode by the control device 101);
Arithmetic processing that utilizes a predetermined specific random number stored in the specific random number storage means and another specific random number that is different from the predetermined random number and is stored in the specific random number storage device. (a function for executing the integration process of the AT counter C by the main controller 101),
a specific notification execution means (a function for executing integrated value information processing by the display control device 81) capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the calculation result by the specific calculation device on a predetermined notification device (auxiliary display section 65); ,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting stops, In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific random number acquired by the specific random number acquisition means are stored. Since a specific random number stored in the means is used to conduct a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event will occur, it is possible to use The game experience is completely different from that of a slot machine.

Moreover, in the above configuration, after the specific calculation means performs arithmetic processing on the stored predetermined specific random number and other specific random numbers, the specific notification corresponding to the result of the calculation is performed by the predetermined notification device. There are cases. Arithmetic processing specifically includes integration processing, averaging processing, subtraction processing, etc. In a lottery that uses numerical information (specific random numbers), the result of the arithmetic processing predicts the success or failure of the lottery. This can be useful information. More specifically, for example, if numerical information with a smaller value is easier to win than numerical information with a larger value, then the results of the integration process will be of great help in determining whether or not it is easier to win overall. Become useful. Further, for example, if the numerical information is a predetermined value, the winning result is determined, and the averaging process is very useful in determining whether or not the winning number is close to the predetermined value. Furthermore, for example, if the result of the subtraction process is a small value, it is determined that similar numerical information has been obtained, and if that numerical information corresponds to a win, the possibility of winning consecutive games increases. (If it corresponds to a miss, there is a high possibility that it will be a miss.) On the other hand, if the difference in the subtraction process is large, there is a large dispersion in the obtained numerical information, and there is a possibility of successive hits. The result of the subtraction process can also be useful information for predicting the content of the subsequent game, such as increasing the probability of winning in either game.

Therefore, regarding a specific lottery using specific random numbers, it is possible to predict in advance whether or not the situation is likely to win a specific lottery based on the results of arithmetic processing, information that may be useful for players to proceed with the game. is provided, making the game more interesting.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the specific calculation means is capable of performing an integration process of the predetermined specific random number and the other specific random number as the calculation process.

According to the above configuration, by setting the integration process that has a relatively low processing load among the calculation processes, it is possible to avoid an increase in the processing load and use the calculation results to predict the results of a specific lottery. It becomes possible. By the way, for example, in a configuration where the larger the specific random number is, the easier it is to win a specific lottery, or the smaller the specific random number is, the easier it is to win a specific lottery, the cumulative value of a predetermined specific random number and other specific random numbers is This information is very useful in predicting the likelihood of winning a specific lottery using either a predetermined specific random number or another specific random number.

Feature H3. The gaming machine according to feature H2, characterized in that the smaller the specific random number, the more likely the specific result will be obtained in the specific lottery, or the larger the specific random number, the more likely the specific result will be obtained in the specific lottery. .

By applying the configuration of feature H2 to a gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantage of performing integration processing as arithmetic processing can be utilized.

Feature H4. In the specific lottery performed using a first result (for example, cherry replay) as the lottery result by the lottery means, the smaller the specific random number, the more likely the specific result is to be obtained, and the first result is the lottery result by the lottery means. The gaming machine according to feature H3 is characterized in that, in the specific lottery performed using a second result (for example, Suikari Play) different from the above, the specific random number having a larger value is more likely to result in the specific result.

According to the above configuration, depending on the game result, the larger the specific random number is, the more likely it is to get a specific result, and the smaller the specific random number is, the more likely it is to be a specific result. Events where expectations cannot be met become less likely to occur.

Feature H5. A first gaming state (fourth RT state A) and a second gaming state (fourth RT state B) are provided as gaming states,
In the first gaming state, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first result is higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the second result,
In the second gaming state, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the second result is set to be higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the first result. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, depending on the gaming state, the larger the value of the integration process, the more you can expect to get a specific result, and the smaller the value of the integration process, the more you can expect to get a specific result. It happens. By doing this, in a configuration that makes a specific notification corresponding to the result of the integration process, it is possible to also grasp the gaming state to which the specific notification should be transferred (to which it should be transferred). Therefore, in a game that uses a specific lottery using specific random numbers obtained in advance, the element of the gaming state is added, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature H6. The specific random number is configured to be updated in an update range from an initial value to a maximum value,
A feature characterized in that, if the specific random number is a value included in a specific range (for example, 1 to 13) that is included in the update range, the specific lottery is likely to result in the specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of H1 to H5.

According to the above configuration, if the specific random number is a value included in a specific range, it is set so that a specific result is likely to be obtained, so for example, the number of specific random numbers whose value is included in the specific range is measured. If the configuration is configured to perform such arithmetic processing, it becomes possible to determine whether or not each acquired specific random number is likely to be a winning result with a relatively simple configuration. Therefore, it becomes possible to make specific notification of the result of arithmetic processing more useful.

Feature H7. The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein the specific calculation means is capable of counting the number of the specific random numbers having values included in the specific range as the calculation process.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration where a specific random number is likely to yield a specific result if the value is included in a specific range, the specific calculation means performs a process of counting the number of specific random numbers within the specific range as the calculation process. By doing this, it becomes possible to grasp the number of specific random numbers that are likely to result in a specific result from among the specific random numbers stored in the specific random number storage means, from the specific notification.

Feature H8. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7, wherein the specific calculation means executes the calculation process for all the specific random numbers stored in the specific random number storage means.

The above configuration does not pick up predetermined ones from the acquired specific random numbers and perform arithmetic processing on them, but instead subjects all specific random numbers to arithmetic processing. By doing this, it becomes difficult to know which specific random number that a specific notification corresponds to that has been obtained in advance, and as a result, the attention level of each game that corresponds to these specific random numbers is evenly distributed. It becomes possible to increase the

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set to be visible through the display unit, the A benefit granting means (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) capable of granting a benefit corresponding to a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
a specific information acquisition unit (a function for executing random number acquisition processing in the main controller 101) that acquires specific information (AT counter C) based on the fulfillment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
Specific lottery means for executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event (transition to AT mode) will occur, using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery device ( A function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result (AT mode transition winning) that corresponds to the occurrence of the specific event, specific execution means (main) capable of causing the specific event; (a function of executing processing for transitioning to AT mode by the control device 101);
Based on the predetermined specific information stored in the specific information storage means, before the predetermined specific information becomes a target of the specific lottery, it corresponds to a specific state where it is easy to win the specific lottery. a specific notification execution unit (a function for executing CZ mode processing by the display control device 81) capable of executing notification on a predetermined notification unit (auxiliary display unit 65);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting stops, In a so-called slot machine where a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means are stored. Since a specific lottery is performed to determine whether or not a specific event will occur using the specific information stored in the means, it is no longer possible to simply match the lottery results of the lottery means with the results of stopping the orbiting body. The game experience is completely different from that of a slot machine.

Moreover, in the above configuration, based on the predetermined specific information acquired in advance, before the predetermined specific information becomes a target of the specific lottery, a notification corresponding to a specific state that is a situation where it is easy to win the specific lottery is issued. It may be done. By doing this, it becomes possible to detect in advance that a specific lottery is likely to result in a specific lottery using predetermined specific information acquired in advance, and the lottery method that is carried out every game It is possible to contribute to the creation of a new game experience that is on a different level from the game experience that uses the lottery results.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the specific information acquisition means acquires the specific information regardless of a lottery result by the lottery means in a game in which the acquisition condition is met.

According to the above configuration, in a game using specific information acquired in advance, the lottery result of each game is related to the lottery result of the game when the specific lottery is performed, but the lottery result of the game when the specific information is acquired in advance is The result will be no involvement. By doing this, it is possible to avoid the phenomenon where the specific information obtained in advance is grasped by the lottery results of each game, and it is possible to increase the surprise of the specific state that is notified based on the specific information. becomes.

Feature I3. Feature I1 or The gaming machine according to feature I2.

According to the above configuration, in a game that notifies you of a specific state that makes it easier to win a specific lottery based on specific information acquired in advance, the lottery result of each game is the same as the lottery result of the game when the specific lottery is held. Although it is involved, the lottery result of the game is not involved in the notification of the specific state. By doing this, a phenomenon in which the specific state is not expected depending on the lottery result of each game does not occur, and it is possible to increase the unexpectedness of the specific state to be notified.

Feature I4. Any of features I1 to I3, characterized in that the specific notification execution means is capable of notifying the specific state based on a plurality of pieces of predetermined specific information stored in the specific information storage device. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to the above configuration, the notification of the specific state is not performed simply when one piece of specific information that makes it easy to win a specific lottery is obtained, but the specific state is notified based on a plurality of pieces of specific information. By doing so, the significance of providing a state in which it is easy to win a specific lottery as a specific state can be enhanced, and it is possible to expect an effect of increasing the degree of attention across a plurality of games.

Feature I5. The specific information storage means is configured to be able to store a predetermined number of the specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, wherein the specific notification execution means notifies the specific state in a manner that allows the game to be continued for the predetermined number of games or more.

According to the above configuration, information such as which specific information stored in the specific information storage means is likely to win a specific lottery becomes difficult to understand, and information such as which specific information stored in the specific information storage means is likely to win a specific lottery is difficult to understand, and information that is not acquired in advance at the time when the notification of the specific state is started. This makes it possible to draw attention to all of the specific information that is available.

Feature I6. In the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result, the specific information that makes the lottery result of the specific lottery become the specific result is common between the specific state and the other state. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5.

According to the above configuration, even if the specific state is set, the probability of winning the specific lottery does not increase, but the notification of the specific state is only due to the fact that the specific information obtained in advance corresponds to the winning. It will be done. By doing so, it is possible to create a novel state that is completely different from the conventional so-called chance zone where the probability of winning a predetermined lottery is high.

Feature I7. As gaming states, a normal gaming state (normal section) and a first specific gaming state (advantageous section) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state (AT mode) is set which is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific gaming state,
a first transition lottery means (a function of executing an advantageous section transition lottery by the main control device 101) that executes a first transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the first specific gaming state in the normal gaming state;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is a first transition result (advantageous section winning) corresponding to transition to the first specific game state, the first specific game a first specific transition means for transitioning to the state (a function of executing processing for transitioning to the advantageous section by the main controller 101);
a second transition lottery means (a function for executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main controller 101) that executes a second transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is a second transition result (AT mode winning) corresponding to transition to the second specific game state, the second specific game a second specific transition means for transitioning to the AT mode (a function for executing processing for transitioning to the AT mode by the main controller 101);
Equipped with
The specific lottery means executes the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means as the specific lottery, and the specific event is causing a transition to the second specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I6.

According to the above configuration, a first specific gaming state that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is provided, and a second specific gaming state that is more advantageous as a state included in the first specific gaming state is provided. Therefore, in a gameplay that is based on a step-by-step transition to a state that becomes advantageous, such as transitioning from a normal gaming state to a first specific gaming state and aiming for a second specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state It becomes possible to realize a game that has never been seen before, such as holding a lottery for transition to the game based on specific information acquired in advance.

In addition, by notifying the so-called chance zone as a situation in which it is easy to win the second transition lottery based on specific information obtained in advance, it is possible to avoid the conventional chance zone where the chance zone is set based on the lottery results etc. by lottery means. The gameplay is completely different from that of a gaming machine, and for example, even if the lottery result would not have been expected to be in the chance zone in the past, it will still be in the chance zone, regardless of the lottery result of each game. It becomes possible to create a sense of expectation for the zone (specific state).

Feature I8. The gaming machine according to feature I7, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of notifying the specific state in the normal gaming state.

According to the above configuration, the notification of the specific state in which it is easier to win the lottery for transition to the second specific gaming state is provided before the transition to the first specific gaming state in which the lottery for transition to the second specific gaming state is held. This is done in the normal gaming state. By doing this, even though the game is premised on a step-by-step transition from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state and then further to the second specific gaming state, the final stage of the second specific gaming state is It becomes possible to notify of a specific state in which a transition to the state is more likely to occur in the normal gaming state at the initial stage, and in the case where the state shifts to the first specific gaming state in a situation where the state has not even shifted to the first specific gaming state. It becomes possible to provide a new enjoyment of the normal game state by allowing the player to play the game while counting the contents of the second transition lottery after the first one.

Note that it is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the respective configurations of other feature A groups to feature I groups to each structure of feature A group to feature I group detailed above. However, it is also possible to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, and the symbols begin to fluctuate due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row as a final stop; A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.), and further includes a throwing device that is provided with a ball tray and performs a throwing process of taking in game balls from the ball tray, and a putting device that puts out game balls to the ball tray. A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown into the game machine.

10... Slot machine as a gaming machine, 32... Reel as a rotating body, 41... Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64... Speaker forming an auxiliary performance section, 65 ... Auxiliary display part constituting an auxiliary production part, 68... Instruction monitor, N8... Eighth display segment as a section indicator, 81... Display control device as a sub control board, 101... Main control device as a main control board , 102...A CPU that constitutes various control means such as a lottery means and a main control means.

Claims (1)

a plurality of orbiting bodies with plural kinds of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a starting operation means that, when operated, causes each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting;
a stop operation means that stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
drive control means for causing each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a lottery means that performs a lottery to decide whether or not to give a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
specific information acquisition means for acquiring specific information based on fulfillment of predetermined acquisition conditions;
specific information storage means capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
Specific lottery means for executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event will occur, using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and a lottery result by the lottery device;
Specific execution means capable of causing the specific event based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery device is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images